Tektronix Caulking Gun TDS420A User Manual
Programmer Manual  
TDS Family Digitizing Oscilloscopes  
(TDS 420A, 430A, 460A, 510A, 520C, 540C, 620B,  
644B, 680B, 684B, 724C, 754C, & 784C)  
070-9876-00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARRANTY  
Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three (3) years  
from the date of shipment. If any such product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either  
will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in exchange for the  
defective product.  
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the  
warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for  
packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid.  
Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the  
Tektronix service center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any  
other charges for products returned to any other locations.  
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate  
maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting  
from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair  
damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; or c) to service a product that has been  
modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or  
difficulty of servicing the product.  
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY  
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND  
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX  
AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS  
ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Getting Started  
Overview of the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Setting Up Remote Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1–1  
1–3  
Syntax and Commands  
Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Command and Query Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Clearing the TDS Family Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Command Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Constructed Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Argument Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Syntax Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2–1  
2–1  
2–4  
2–4  
2–6  
2–8  
2–10  
Command Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Acquisition Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Alias Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Application Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Calibration and Diagnostic Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Cursor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
File System Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Hardcopy Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Histogram Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Horizontal Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Limit Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Mask Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Measurement Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Miscellaneous Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
RS-232 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Save and Recall Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Status and Error Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Trigger Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Vertical Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Waveform Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Zoom Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2–11  
2–13  
2–14  
2–14  
2–15  
2–15  
2–16  
2–18  
2–19  
2–19  
2–20  
2–22  
2–23  
2–24  
2–26  
2–27  
2–28  
2–28  
2–29  
2–37  
2–38  
2–45  
Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2–47  
Status and Events  
Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Event Handling Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Synchronization Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3–1  
3–5  
3–6  
3–7  
3–12  
i
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Programming Examples  
Appendices  
Compiling the Example Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4–2  
Appendix A: Character Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Appendix B: Reserved Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
A–1  
B–1  
Appendix C: Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
GPIB Function Subsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Interface Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C–1  
C–1  
C–2  
Appendix D: Factory Initialization Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
D–1  
Glossary and Index  
ii  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
List of Figures  
Figure 1–1: Common Message Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1–1  
1–2  
Figure 1–2: Functional Groupings and an Alphabetical List of  
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–3: Service Requests (SRQs) Provide for Event (Interrupt)  
Driven Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1–2  
1–3  
1–3  
1–4  
1–5  
1–5  
Figure 1–4: The Disk That Accompanies This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–5: GPIB Connector Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–6: How to Stack GPIB Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–7: Typical GPIB Network Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–8: Selecting the I/O System in the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 1–9: Selecting the GPIB Address in the GPIB Configuration  
Side Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1–6  
Figure 2–1: Command Message Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 2–2: Block Argument Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 2–3: Typical Syntax Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 2–4: Displaying an Extended Acquisition Length Data . . . . . .  
2–2  
2–10  
2–11  
2–41  
Figure 2–5: Message Window Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–241  
Figure 2–6: LESSThan and MOREThan Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–294  
Figure 3–1: The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–2: The Status Byte Register (SBR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–3: The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER) . . . .  
Figure 3–4: The Event Status Enable Register (ESER) . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–5: The Service Request Enable Register (SRER) . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–6: Status and Event Handling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure 3–7: Command Processing Without Using Synchronization .  
Figure 3–8: Processing Sequence With Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . .  
3–2  
3–2  
3–3  
3–4  
3–4  
3–6  
3–8  
3–8  
Figure 4–1: Equipment Needed to Run the Example Programs . . . . .  
4–1  
iii  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
List of Tables  
Table 2–1: BNF Symbols and Meanings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–2: Command Message Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–3: Comparison of Header Off and On Responses . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–4: Acquisition Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–5: Alias Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–6: Application Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–7: Calibration and Diagnostic Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–8: Cursor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–9: Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–10: File System Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–11: Hardcopy Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–12: Histogram Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–13: Horizontal Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–14: Limit Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–15: Mask Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–16: Measurement Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–17: Miscellaneous Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–18: RS-232 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–19: Save and Recall Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–20: Status and Error Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–21: Trigger Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–22: Vertical Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2–1  
2–2  
2–3  
2–13  
2–14  
2–14  
2–15  
2–15  
2–16  
2–18  
2–19  
2–19  
2–20  
2–22  
2–23  
2–24  
2–26  
2–27  
2–28  
2–29  
2–30  
2–37  
Table 2–23: Extended-Acquisition-Length Mode Channels and Record  
Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2–42  
2–43  
2–45  
Table 2–24: Waveform Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–25: Zoom Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–26: Waveform Data Points Supported for Reference  
Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2–63  
2–69  
Table 2–27: Commands that Affect BUSY? Response . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 2–28: Offset Ranges for the TDS 400A, 510A, 540C, 600B, 754C, &  
784C (All Channels) and the TDS 520C & 724C  
(Channel 1 & Channel 2) using a 1x Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2–74  
Table 2–29: Offset Ranges for the TDS 520C & 724C (Aux 1 & Aux 2)  
using a 1x Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2–74  
Table 2–30: DATa and WFMPre Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–101  
iv  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Table 2–31: XY Format Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–123  
Table 2–32: Record Length Values (<NR1>) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–176  
Table 2–33: Commands that Generate an Operation Complete  
Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–244  
Table 2–34: Additional WFMPre Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–352  
Table 3–1: SESR Bit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 3–2: SBR Bit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 3–3: No Event Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 3–4: Command Error Messages – CME Bit 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 3–5: Execution Error Messages – EXE Bit 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 3–6: Device Error Messages – DDE Bit 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 3–7: System Event Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 3–8: Execution Warning Messages – EXE Bit 4 . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table 3–9: Internal Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3–2  
3–3  
3–12  
3–12  
3–14  
3–17  
3–17  
3–18  
3–19  
Table A–1: The TDS Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table A–2: ASCII & GPIB Code Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Table C–1: TDS Family Oscilloscope Standard Interface Message . .  
Table D–1: Factory Initialization Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
A–1  
A–2  
C–2  
D–1  
v
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
This programmer manual covers the TDS 420A, 430A, 460A, 510A, 520C,  
540C, 620B, 644B, 680B, 684B, 724C, 754C, & 784C. It also covers Advanced  
DSP Math (optional on the TDS420A, 430A, 460A, 510A, 520C, 540C, 620B,  
& 680B), the RS-232/Centronics Interface (optional on the TDS 420A, 430A,  
460A, 510A, 520C, 540C, 620B, & 640B), and the Option 05 Video Trigger.  
This manual provides information on operating your oscilloscope using the  
General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB) interface.  
Related Manuals  
Table i lists other documentation for the TDS 420A, 430A, 460A, 510A, 520C,  
540C, 620B, 644B, 680B, 684B, 724C, 754C, & 784C digitizing oscilloscopes.  
Table i: Other Documentation  
Manual  
Tek Part Number  
TDS User Manual  
TDS 420A, 430A, 460A, & 510A  
TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05 Video Trigger  
TDS Reference  
070–9701–XX  
070–9869–XX  
070–8748–XX  
TDS 420A, 430A, 460A, & 510A  
TDS 500B, 600B, & 700A  
TDS Performance Verification  
TDS 420A, 430A, & 460A  
TDS 510A  
070–9758–XX  
070–9382–XX  
070–9705–XX  
070–9706–XX  
070–9874–XX  
TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C  
TDS Service Manual  
TDS 420A, 430A, & 460A  
TDS 510A  
070–9703–XX  
070–9704–XX  
070–9875–XX  
TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C  
vii  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
Default Model  
This manual documents the TDS 400A, TDS 510A, TDS 500C, TDS 600B, &  
TDS 700C Digitizing Oscilloscopes. Take special note of the following  
conventions:  
H
Some TDS models have two auxiliary channels called AUX 1 and AUX 2,  
instead of CH 3 and CH 4. Some references to these channels default to  
CH 3 and CH 4.  
H
The TDS 684B display screen appears as the default screen wherever a  
display screen is illustrated in this manual.  
Model References  
This manual documents the TDS 400A, TDS 510A, TDS 500C, TDS 600B, &  
TDS 700C Digitizing Oscilloscopes. Take note of the following conventions  
used when referencing these oscilloscopes:  
H
H
H
H
The name “TDS 400A” is used when providing information common to the  
TDS 420A, 430A, and TDS 460A model oscilloscopes.  
The name “TDS 500C” is used when providing information common to the  
TDS 520C and TDS 540C model oscilloscopes.  
The name “TDS 600B” is used when providing information common to the  
TDS 620B, TDS 644B, TDS 680B, and TDS 684B model oscilloscopes.  
The name “TDS 700C” is used when providing information common to the  
TDS 724C, TDS 754C, and TDS 784C model oscilloscopes.  
viii  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
You can write computer programs that remotely set the oscilloscope front panel  
controls or that take measurements and read those measurements for further  
analysis or storage.  
To help you get started with programmng the oscilloscope, this section includes  
the following sections:  
H
H
Overview of the Manual – summarizes the type of programming information  
contained in each major section of this manual.  
Setting Up Remote Communications – describes how to physically connect  
the oscilloscope to a controller and set the appropriate front panel controls.  
Overview of the Manual  
The information contained in each major section of this manual is described  
below.  
Syntax and Commands  
The Syntax and Commands chapter describes the structure and content of the  
messages your program sends to the digitizing oscilloscope. Figure 1–1 shows a  
syntax diagram and command parts as described in the Command Syntax  
subsection.  
Comma  
Header  
Command Parts  
SAVe:WAVEform  
CH1,REF3  
Mnemonics  
Space Arguments  
Syntax Diagram  
SAVe  
:
<Comma>  
REF  
WAVEform  
<Space>  
<wfm>  
<x>  
Figure 1–1: Common Message Elements  
Chapter 2 also describes the effect of each command and provides examples of  
how you might use it. The Command Groups section provides a list by function-  
al area. The Command Descriptions section arranges commands alphabetically  
(Figure 1–2).  
1–1  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
ACQuire:NUMACq? (Query Only)  
Application Menu Commands  
Zoom  
Zoom  
ACQuire:MODe  
Alias Commands  
S
G
E
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
ACQuire? (Query Only)  
Acquisition Commands  
S
G
E
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Syntax: . . .  
Group: . . .  
ACQuire:MODe  
ACQuire:NUMACq?  
ACQuire:NUMAVg  
ACQuire:NUMEnv  
ACQuire:REPEt  
Examples: . . .  
ACQuire:STATE  
ACQuire:STOPAfter  
Commands Grouped in Functional Areas  
Commands Listed Alphabetically  
and  
Figure 1–2: Functional Groupings and an Alphabetical List of Commands  
Status and Events  
The program may request information from the oscilloscope. The oscilloscope  
provides information in the form of status and error messages. Figure 1–3  
illustrates the basic operation of this system.  
The Status and Events chapter starting on page 3–1 describes how to use service  
requests (SRQs) and various event messages in your programs.  
Your program requests  
status and event reports.  
TDS sends status and event reports.  
Controller  
Digitizing Oscilloscope (Rear Panel)  
GPIB Cable  
Figure 1–3: Service Requests (SRQs) Provide for Event (Interrupt) Driven Programs  
Programming Examples  
The Programming Examples chapter starting on page 4–1 describes some  
example digitizing oscilloscope programs and how to compile them. The disk  
that comes with this manual (Figure 1–4) has an executable and a Microsoft  
QuickBASIC 4.5 and a Microsoft QuickC 2.5 source-code version of each  
program.  
1–2  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
TDS Example  
Programs  
Figure 1–4: The Disk That Accompanies This Manual  
Setting Up Remote Communications  
Even the best instrument control program will not do much if the instrument is  
not connected to the controller.  
The digitizing oscilloscope has a 24-pin GPIB connector on its rear panel, as  
shown in Figure 1–5. This connector has a D-type shell and conforms to IEEE  
Std 488.1–1987.  
Attach an IEEE Std 488.1–1987 GPIB cable (available from Tektronix as part  
number 012–0991–00) to this connector.  
GPIB Connector Port  
Figure 1–5: GPIB Connector Location  
1–3  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
If needed, you can stack GPIB connectors as shown in Figure 1–6.  
Figure 1–6: How to Stack GPIB Connectors  
GPIB Requirements  
Observe these rules when you use your digitizing oscilloscope with a GPIB  
network:  
H
Assign a unique device address to each device on the bus. No two devices  
can share the same device address.  
H
H
H
Do not connect more than 15 devices to any one bus.  
Connect one device for every 2 meters (6 feet) of cable used.  
Do not use more than 20 meters (65 feet) of cable to connect devices to a  
bus.  
H
H
Turn on at least two-thirds of the devices on the network while using the  
network.  
Connect the devices on the network in a star or linear configuration as shown  
in Figure 1–7. Do not use loop or parallel configurations.  
1–4  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
GPIB Device  
GPIB Device  
GPIB Device  
GPIB Device  
GPIB Device  
GPIB Device  
GPIB Device  
Figure 1–7: Typical GPIB Network Configurations  
Appendix C: Interface Specifications gives more information on the GPIB  
configuration of the digitizing oscilloscope.  
Setting the GPIB  
Parameters  
You need to set the GPIB parameters of the digitizing oscilloscope to match the  
configuration of the bus. Once you have set these parameters, you can control the  
digitizing oscilloscope through the GPIB interface.  
1. Press the UTILITY (SHIFT DISPLAY) button to display the Utility menu.  
2. Press the System button in the main menu until it highlights the I/O  
selection in the pop-up menu. See Figure 1–8.  
Figure 1–8: Selecting the I/O System in the Main Menu  
1–5  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
3. Press the Port button in the main menu until it highlights the GPIB  
selection in the pop-up menu. See Figure 1–9.  
4. Press the Configure button in the main menu to display the GPIB Configu-  
ration side menu. See Figure 1–9.  
5. Press the Talk/Listen Address side menu button, and set the GPIB address  
using either the general purpose knob or, if available, the keypad.  
Figure 1–9: Selecting the GPIB Address in the GPIB Configuration Side Menu  
The digitizing oscilloscope is set up for bidirectional communication with your  
controller. If you wish to isolate the digitizing oscilloscope from the bus:  
H
Press the Off Bus side menu button. This disables all communication with  
the controller.  
If you wish to enter a special mode of operation to communicate directly with  
non-488.2 hard copy devices:  
H
Press the Hardcopy side menu button to have the digitizing oscilloscope  
send hard copy information only when you press the HARDCOPY button  
(and accept a HARDCOPY ABORT command).  
1–6  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Syntax  
You can control the digitizing oscilloscope through the GPIB interface using  
commands and queries. This section describes the syntax these commands and  
queries use. It also describes the conventions the digitizing oscilloscope uses to  
process them. The next section, entitled Command Groups, lists the commands  
and queries themselves.  
You transmit commands to the digitizing oscilloscope using the enhanced  
American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) character  
encoding. Appendix A: Character Charts on page A–2 contains a chart of the  
ASCII character set.  
This manual describes commands and queries using Backus-Naur Form (BNF)  
notation and syntax diagrams.  
This manual uses the BNF symbols shown in Table 2–1 below:  
Table 2–1: BNF Symbols and Meanings  
Symbol  
<ą>  
::=  
Meaning  
Defined element  
Is defined as  
|
Exclusive OR  
{ą}  
[ą]  
.ă.Ă.  
(ą)  
Group; one element is required  
Optional; can be omitted  
Previous element(s) may be repeated  
Comment  
Command and Query Structure  
Commands consist of set commands and query commands (usually simply called  
commands and queries). Commands modify instrument settings or tell the  
digitizing oscilloscope to perform a specific action. Queries cause the digitizing  
oscilloscope to return data and information about its status.  
Most commands have both a set form and a query form. The query form of the  
command differs from the set form by its question mark on the end. For  
example, the set command ACQuire:MODe has a query form ACQuire:MODe?.  
Not all commands have both a set and a query form. Some commands have set  
only and some have query only.  
2–1  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Syntax  
A command message is a command or query name followed by any information  
the digitizing oscilloscope needs to execute the command or query. Command  
messages may contain five element types, defined in Table 2–2 and shown in the  
example in Figure 2–1.  
Table 2–2: Command Message Elements  
Symbol  
Meaning  
<Header>  
The basic command name. If the header ends with a question  
mark, the command is a query. The header may begin with a  
colon (:) character. If the command is concatenated with other  
commands, the beginning colon is required. Never use the  
beginning colon with command headers beginning with a star  
(*).  
<Mnemonic>  
<Argument>  
A header subfunction. Some command headers have only one  
mnemonic. If a command header has multiple mnemonics, a  
colon (:) character always separates them from each other.  
A quantity, quality, restriction, or limit associated with the  
header. Some commands have no argument while others have  
multiple arguments. A <Space> separates arguments from the  
header. A <Comma> separates arguments from each other.  
<Comma>  
<Space>  
A single comma between arguments of multiple-argument  
commands. It may optionally have white space characters  
before and after the comma.  
A white space character between command header and  
argument. It may optionally consist of multiple white space  
characters.  
Comma  
Header  
Command Parts  
SAVe:WAVEform  
CH1,REF3  
Mnemonics  
Space Arguments  
Syntax Diagram  
SAVe  
:
<Comma>  
REF  
WAVEform  
<Space>  
<wfm>  
<x>  
Figure 2–1: Command Message Elements  
Commands  
Commands have the structure:  
[:]<Header>[<Space><Argument>[<Comma><Argument>]...]  
2–2  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Syntax  
A command header consists of one or more mnemonics arranged in a hierarchi-  
cal or tree structure. The first mnemonic is the base or root of the tree and each  
subsequent mnemonic is a level or branch off the previous one. Commands at a  
higher level in the tree may affect those at a lower level. The leading colon (:)  
always returns you to the base of the command tree.  
Queries  
Queries have the structure:  
H
H
[:]<Header>?  
[:]<Header>?[<Space><Argument>[<Comma><Argument>]...]  
You can specify a query command at any level within the command tree unless  
otherwise noted. These branch queries return information about all the mnemon-  
ics below the specified branch or level. For example, MEASUreĆ  
ment:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIRection? returns the starting point and direction of  
the edge of a delayed measurement, while MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?  
returns the current settings of all delayed measurement parameters, and  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>? returns all the measurement parameters for the  
specified measurement.  
Headers in Query  
Responses  
You can control whether the digitizing oscilloscope returns headers as part of the  
query response. Use the HEADer command to control this feature. If header is on,  
the query response returns command headers and formats itself as a valid set  
command. When header is off, the response includes only the values. This may  
make it easier to parse and extract the information from the response. Table 2–3  
shows the difference in responses.  
Table 2–3: Comparison of Header Off and On Responses  
Query  
Header Off Response  
Header On Response  
APPMenu:TITLe?  
"Test Setup"  
:APPMENU:TITLE "Test  
Setup"  
ACQuire:NUMAVg?  
100  
:ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 100  
2–3  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Syntax  
Clearing the TDS Family Oscilloscope  
You can clear the Output Queue and reset the digitizing oscilloscope to accept a  
new command or query by using the Device Clear (DCL) GPIB command.  
Command Entry  
The following rules apply:  
H
H
You can enter commands in upper or lower case.  
You can precede any command with white space characters. White space  
characters include any combination of the ASCII control characters 00  
through 09 and 0B through 20 hexadecimal (0 through 9 and 11 through 32  
decimal).  
H
The digitizing oscilloscope ignores commands consisting of any combina-  
tion of white space characters and line feeds.  
Abbreviating Commands  
You can abbreviate many digitizing oscilloscope commands. Each command  
listing in the Commands section shows the minimum acceptable abbreviations in  
capitals. For example, you can enter the command ACQuire:NUMAvg simply as  
ACQ:NUMA or acq:numa.  
NOTE. Keep in mind that abbreviation rules change over time as new TDS  
models are introduced. Thus, for the most robust code, use the full spelling.  
Avoid using the command abbreviations.  
If you use the HEADer command to have command headers included as part of  
query responses, you can further control whether the returned headers are  
abbreviated or are full-length. The VERBose command lets you control this.  
Concatenating Commands  
You can concatenate any combination of set commands and queries using a  
semicolon (;). The digitizing oscilloscope executes concatenated commands in  
the order received.  
When concatenating commands and queries, you must follow these rules:  
1. Separate completely different headers by a semicolon and by the beginning  
colon on all commands but the first. For example, the commands TRIGĆ  
ger:MODe NORMal and ACQuire:NUMAVg 10 would be concatenated into a  
single command:  
TRIGger:MODe NORMal;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 10  
2–4  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Syntax  
2. If concatenated commands have headers that differ by only the last mnemon-  
ic, you can abbreviate the second command and eliminate the beginning  
colon. For example, you can concatenate the commands ACQuire:MODe  
ENVelope and ACQuire:NUMAVg 10 into a single command:  
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope; NUMAVg 10  
The longer version works equally well:  
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 10  
3. Never precede a star (*) command with a colon:  
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;*TRG  
Any commands that follow will be processed as if the star command was not  
there so  
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;*TRG;NUMAVg 10  
will set the acquisition mode to envelope and set the number of acquisitions  
for averaging to 10.  
4. When you concatenate queries, the responses to all the queries are concate-  
nated into a single response message. For example, if the display intensity  
for text is 80% and for the waveform it is 90%, the concatenated query  
DISplay:INTENsity:TEXt?;WAVEform?  
will return either :DISPLAY:INTENSITY:TEXT 80;:DISPLAY:INTENSIĆ  
TY:WAVEFORM 90 if header is on or 80;90 if header is off.  
5. Set commands and queries may be concatenated in the same message. For  
example,  
ACQuire:MODe NORMal;NUMAVg?;STATE?  
is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to normal. The message  
then queries the number of acquisitions for averaging and the acquisition  
state. Concatenated commands and queries are executed in the order  
received.  
Here are some invalid concatenations:  
H
H
DISPlay:INTENsity:TEXt 80;ACQuire:NUMAVg 10  
(no colon before ACQuire)  
DISPlay:INTENsity:TEXt 80;:WAVEform 90  
(extra colon before WAVEform — could use DISPlay:INTENsity:WAVEform  
instead)  
2–5  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Syntax  
H
H
DISPlay:INTENsity:TEXt 80;:*TRG  
(colon before a star (*) command)  
APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM1 "foo";LABel:BOTTOM2 "fee"  
(levels of the mnemonics are different — either remove the second use of  
LABel: or place :APPMenu: in front of LABel:BOTTOM2)  
Message Terminators  
This manual uses <EOM> (End of message) to represent a message terminator.  
Symbol  
Meaning  
<EOM>  
Message terminator  
The end-of-message terminator may be the END message (EOI asserted  
concurrently with the last data byte), the ASCII code for line feed (LF) sent as  
the last data byte, or both. The digitizing oscilloscope always terminates  
messages with LF and EOI. It allows white space before the terminator. For  
example, it allows CR LF.  
Constructed Mnemonics  
Some header mnemonics specify one of a range of mnemonics. For example, a  
channel mnemonic can be either CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4. You use these mnemon-  
ics in the command just as you do any other mnemonic. For example, there is a  
CH1:VOLts command, and there is also a CH2:VOLts command. In the command  
descriptions, this list of choices is abbreviated as CH<x>.  
Application Menu  
Mnemonics  
When the application menu is displayed, commands may specify which menu  
button to use.  
Symbol  
Meaning  
BOTTOM<x>  
A main menu button selector; <x> is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.  
Main menu buttons are located along the bottom of the display  
and are numbered left to right, starting with 1.  
RIGHT<x>  
A side menu button selector; <x> is 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. Side menu  
buttons are located along the right side of the display and are  
numbered top to bottom, starting with 1.  
Cursor Position  
Mnemonics  
When cursors are displayed, commands may specify which cursor of the pair to  
use.  
2–6  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Syntax  
Symbol  
Meaning  
POSITION<x>  
A cursor selector; <x> is either 1 or 2.  
Measurement Specifier  
Mnemonics  
Commands can specify which measurement to set or query as a mnemonic in the  
header. Up to four automated measurements may be displayed with each  
displayed waveform. The displayed measurements are specified in this way:  
Symbol  
Meaning  
MEAS<x>  
A measurement specifier; <x> is either 1 [top], 2, 3, or  
4[bottom].  
Channel Mnemonics  
Commands specify the channel to use as a mnemonic in the header.  
Symbol  
Meaning  
CH<x>  
A channel specifier; <x> is either 1, 2, 3, or 4.  
For the TDS 520C, 620B, 680B, and 724C, CH3 and CH4  
represent the front-panel inputs labeled AUX 1 and AUX 2  
respectively.  
Math Waveform  
Mnemonics  
Commands can specify the mathematical waveform to use as a mnemonic in the  
header.  
Symbol  
Meaning  
MATH<x>  
A math waveform specifier; <x> is 1, 2, or 3.  
Reference Waveform  
Mnemonics  
Commands can specify the reference waveform to use as a mnemonic in the  
header.  
Symbol  
Meaning  
REF<x>  
A reference waveform specifier; <x> is either 1, 2, 3, or 4.  
Waveform Mnemonics  
In some commands, you can specify a waveform regardless of whether it is a  
channel waveform, a math waveform, or a reference waveform. Specify such a  
waveform as follows:  
2–7  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Syntax  
Symbol  
Meaning  
<wfm>  
Can be CH<x>, MATH<x> or REF<x>  
Argument Types  
The argument of a command may be in one of several forms. The individual  
descriptions of each command tell which argument types to use with that  
command.  
Numeric Arguments  
Many digitizing oscilloscope commands require numeric arguments. The syntax  
shows the format that the digitizing oscilloscope returns in response to a query.  
This is also the preferred format when sending the command to the digitizing  
oscilloscope though any of the formats will be accepted. This manual represents  
these arguments as follows:  
Symbol  
<NR1>  
<NR2>  
<NR3>  
Meaning  
Signed integer value  
Floating point value without an exponent  
Floating point value with an exponent  
Most numeric arguments will be automatically forced to a valid setting, either by  
rounding or truncating, when an invalid number is input unless otherwise noted  
in the command description.  
Quoted String Arguments  
Some commands accept or return data in the form of a quoted string, which is  
simply a group of ASCII characters enclosed by a single quote (') or double  
quote ("). For example:  
"thisisa quoted string"  
Symbol  
Meaning  
<QString>  
Quoted string of ASCII text  
Follow these rules when you use quoted strings:  
1. A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7-bit ASCII  
character set. (See Appendix A: Character Charts on page A–2).  
2. Use the same type of quote character to open and close the string:  
2–8  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Syntax  
"this is a valid string"  
3. You can mix quotation marks within a string as long as you follow the  
previous rule:  
"this is an'acceptable' string"  
4. You can include a quote character within a string simply by repeating the  
quote. For example,  
"here is a "" mark"  
5. Strings can have upper or lower case characters.  
6. If you use a GPIB network, you cannot terminate a quoted string with the  
END message before the closing delimiter.  
7. A carriage return or line feed imbedded in a quoted string does not terminate  
the string, but is treated as just another character in the string.  
8. The maximum length of a quoted string returned from a query is 1000  
characters.  
Here are some invalid strings:  
H
H
"Invalid string argument'  
(quotes are not of the same type)  
"test<EOI>"  
(termination character is embedded in the string)  
Block Arguments  
Several digitizing oscilloscope commands use a block argument form:  
Symbol  
<NZDig>  
<Dig>  
Meaning  
A nonzero digit character, in the range 1–9  
A digit character, in the range 0–9  
<DChar>  
A character with the hex equivalent of 00 through FF  
hexadecimal (0 through 255 decimal)  
<Block>  
A block of data bytes, defined as:  
<Block> ::=  
{ #<NZDig><Dig>[<Dig>...][<DChar>...]  
| #0[<DChar>...]<terminator> }  
<NZDig> specifies the number of <Dig> elements that follow. Taken together, the  
<Dig> elements form a decimal integer that specifies how many <DChar>  
elements follow.  
2–9  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Syntax  
Figure 2–2 provides a diagram of block argument use.  
Block Argument  
ALIas:DEFINE SETUp1",#231AUTOSet EXECute;:SELect:REF1 ON  
Specifies Data Length  
Specifies Number of  
Block Header  
Length Digits that Follow  
Figure 2–2: Block Argument Example  
Syntax Diagrams  
The syntax diagrams in this manual use the following symbols and notation:  
H
Circles and ovals contain literal elements. You must send most elements  
exactly as shown. The command mnemonics are shown in both upper and  
lower case to distinguish between complete and abbreviated spellings. These  
elements are not case sensitive. You can omit the lower case portion of the  
mnemonic.  
H
H
Boxes contain the defined elements described earlier in this section, such as  
<NR3> or <QString>.  
Elements are connected by arrows that show the allowed paths through the  
diagram and, thus, the orders in which you can send the elements. Parallel  
paths show that you must take one and only one of the paths. A path around  
a group of elements shows that those elements are optional. Loops show  
elements that you can repeat.  
Figure 2–3 shows the structure of a few typical syntax diagrams.  
2–10  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Syntax  
Figure 2–3: Typical Syntax Diagrams  
2–11  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
This section lists TDS Family Oscilloscope commands in two ways. It first  
presents them by functional groups. It then lists them alphabetically. The  
functional group list starts below. The alphabetical list provides more detail on  
each command and starts on page 2–47.  
The TDS Family Oscilloscope GPIB interface conforms to Tektronix standard  
codes and formats and IEEE Std 488.2–1987 except where noted.  
Acquisition Commands  
Acquisition commands affect waveform acquisition. These commands control  
mode, averaging, enveloping, and single-waveform acquisition. (Persistence  
controls are in the Display Commands section on page 2–16.) Table 2–4 lists  
these commands.  
Table 2–4: Acquisition Commands  
Header  
Description  
ACQuire?  
Return acquisition parameters  
Save waveforms to reference memory  
ACQuire:AUTOSAve  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
ACQuire:MODe  
Acquisition mode  
ACQuire:NUMACq?  
ACQuire:NUMAVg  
ACQuire:NUMEnv  
Return # of acquisitions obtained  
Number of acquisitions for average  
Number of acquisitions for envelope  
Repetitive acquisition mode  
ACQuire:REPEt  
(TDS 400A, 510A, 500C, & 700C)  
ACQuire:STATE  
Start or stop acquisition system  
Acquisition control  
ACQuire:STOPAfter  
2–13  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Alias Commands  
Alias commands let you define your own commands as a sequence of standard  
commands. This is useful when you use the same commands each time you  
perform a certain task, such as setting up measurements. Table 2–5 lists these  
commands.  
Table 2–5: Alias Commands  
Header  
Description  
ALIas  
Turn the alias state on and off  
Return a list of aliases  
Create a new alias  
ALIas:CATalog?  
ALIas:DEFIne  
ALIas:DELEte  
ALIas:DELEte:ALL  
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe  
ALIas:STATE  
Remove an alias  
Remove all aliases  
Remove a named alias  
Turn the alias state on and off  
Application Menu Commands  
Application menu commands let you define special-purpose menus. You can  
define labels for the main and side menus as well as a side menu title. You can  
display an Application menu by either pressing the front-panel APPLICATION  
button or sending the APPMenu ACTivate command. Table 2–6 lists these  
commands.  
When the digitizing oscilloscope displays an Application menu and a user  
presses a front-panel button, the oscilloscope generates an event that tells the  
controller which button the user pressed. You can also set up the event reporting  
system so that it generates a Service Request when a user presses a menu button.  
Table 2–6: Application Menu Commands  
Header  
Description  
APPMenu  
Display the application menu  
APPMenu:LABel  
Return or remove all application menu button  
labels  
APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x>  
APPMenu:LABel:RIGHT<x>  
APPMenu:TITLe  
Label for a bottom menu button  
Label for a side menu button  
Create a title for the application menu  
2–14  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Calibration and Diagnostic Commands  
Calibration and Diagnostic commands let you start the self-calibration and  
diagnostic routines that are built into the oscilloscope. The diagnostic test  
operation includes selecting the test sequence, executing the sequence, and  
viewing the results. Table 2–7 lists these commands.  
Table 2–7: Calibration and Diagnostic Commands  
Header  
Description  
*CAL?  
Perform an internal self-calibration  
Return diagnostic tests status  
Return diagnostic test sequence results  
Acquisition system diagnostic test sequence  
DIAg:RESULT:FLAG?  
DIAg:RESULT:LOG?  
DIAg:SELect:ACQUISition  
DIAg:SELect:ALL  
Diagnostic test sequence for Acquisition,  
Processor, Display, and Front panel  
DIAg:SELect:CPU  
DIAg:SELect:DISplay  
DIAg:SELect:FPAnel  
DIAg:STATE  
Processor diagnostic test sequence  
Display system diagnostic test sequence  
Front panel diagnostic test sequence  
Control of diagnostic tests  
Cursor Commands  
Cursor commands provide control over cursor (caliper) display and readout.  
Table 2–8 lists these commands.  
Table 2–8: Cursor Commands  
Header  
Description  
CURSor?  
Return cursor settings  
CURSor:FUNCtion  
CURSor:HBArs?  
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?  
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>  
Cursors on or off; select cursor type  
Return H bar settings  
Return distance between H bars  
Position a horizontal cursor  
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt  
(TDS 400A)  
Position a horizontal cursor in units of % of  
vertical range  
CURSor:HBArs:SELect  
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts  
CURSor:MODe  
Set which cursor the knob controls  
Set H bar units  
Set cursor tracking mode  
2–15  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–8: Cursor Commands (Cont.)  
Header  
Description  
CURSor:PAIred  
CURSor:PAIred:HDELTA?  
Positions paired cursors. Also, returns settings  
st  
Return horizontal distance between 1 and  
nd  
2
paired cursors  
st  
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS1?  
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS2?  
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>  
Return horizontal position of 1 paired cursor  
nd  
Return horizontal position of 2 paired cursor  
st  
nd  
Set or return vbar position of the1 or 2  
paired cursor  
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>Pcnt  
(TDS 400A)  
Position the horizontal paired cursor in units of  
% of record length  
CURSor:PAIred:SELect  
CURSor:PAIred:UNITS  
CURSor:PAIred:VDELTA?  
Select active paired cursor  
Set paired cursor units  
st  
nd  
Return vertical distance between 1 and 2  
paired cursors  
CURSor:VBArs  
Position vertical bar cursors  
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?  
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>  
Return horizontal distance between cursors  
Position a vertical cursor  
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt  
(TDS 400A)  
Position a vertical cursor in units of % of  
record length  
CURSor:VBArs:SELect  
CURSor:VBArs:UNITS  
Set which cursor the knob controls  
Set vertical cursors to seconds, frequency, or  
to lines (with option 05 video on the TDS  
510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
CURSor:VBArs:UNITSTring (TDS 400A)  
Return unit string for the vertical bar cursor  
Display Commands  
Display commands let you change the graticule style, change the displayed  
intensities, display messages, and clear the menu. Table 2–9 lists these com-  
mands.  
Table 2–9: Display Commands  
Header  
Description  
CLEARMenu  
DISplay?  
Clear menus from display  
Return display settings  
DISplay:CLOCk  
Control the display of the date/time stamp  
2–16  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–9: Display Commands (Cont.)  
Header  
Description  
DISplay:COLOr:CONTRast  
(TDS 6X4B & 700)  
Control collision contrast  
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:<item-name>:  
BYCONTents  
Set color for math or ref waveform to the color  
of the waveform content  
(TDS 6X4B & 700C)  
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:<item-name>:TO  
(TDS 6X4B & 700C)  
Set color for math or ref waveform to specific  
color index  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:PERSistence  
(TDS 6X4B & 700C)  
Set current persistence palette to a preset  
persistence palette  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:REGular  
(TDS 6X4B & 700C)  
Set current palette to a preset palette  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RESETALL  
(TDS 6X4A & 700C)  
Reset all palettes to their factory default  
settings  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:  
<palette name>:RESET  
(TDS 6X4B & 700C)  
Reset a selected palette to its factory default  
settings  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:  
<palette name>:<item name>  
(TDS 6X4B & 700C)  
Set the color of a selected item on a selected  
palette  
DISplay:FILTer  
DISplay:FORMat  
DISplay:GRAticule  
Displayed data interpolation  
YT or XY display  
Graticule style  
DISplay:INStavu:PERSistence  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Set InstaVu persistence type – variable or  
infinite  
DISplay:INStavu:STYle  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Set InstaVu waveform dots or vector style  
DISplay:INStavu:VARpersist  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Set InstaVu variable persistence decay time  
DISplay:INTENSITy?  
Return intensity settings  
DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast  
(TDS 400A, 510A, 500C, & 6X0B)  
Waveform intensified zone brightness  
DISplay:INTENSITy:OVERALL  
(TDS 400A, 510A, 500C, & 6X0B)  
Set main brightness  
DISplay:INTENSITy:TEXt  
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform  
DISplay:MODe (TDS 500C &700C)  
DISplay:PERSistence  
Set text brightness  
Set waveform brightness  
Set normal or InstaVu display mode  
Set variable persistence decay time  
2–17  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–9: Display Commands (Cont.)  
Header  
Description  
DISplay:STYle  
Set waveform dots, vector, infinite persistence,  
or variable persistence  
DISplay:TRIGBar  
DISplay:TRIGT  
Control the display of the trigger bar/s on  
screen  
Control the display of the trigger indicator on  
screen  
MESSage  
Remove text from the message window  
Set size and location of message window  
MESSage:BOX  
MESSage:SHOw  
Remove and display text in the message  
window  
MESSage:STATE  
Control display of message window  
File System Commands  
File system commands help you use a built-in disk drive (available with the File  
System). Table 2–10 lists these commands.  
Table 2–10: File System Commands  
Header  
Description  
FILESystem:COPy  
FILESystem:CWD  
Copy file to new file  
Set directory path  
FILESystem:DELEte  
FILESystem:DELWarn  
FILESystem:DIR  
Delete named file  
Set front-panel delete warning  
Make directory  
FILESystem:FORMat  
FILESystem:FREESpace  
FILESystem:MKDir  
FILESystem:OVERWrite  
FILESystem:PRInt  
Format named drive  
Return free space on current drive  
Make new directory  
Set file-overwrite protection  
Print file to port  
FILESystem:READFile  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Copy from file to GPIB port  
FILESystem:REName  
Assign new name to file  
2–18  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–10: File System Commands (Cont.)  
Header  
Description  
FILESystem:RMDir  
Delete named directory  
Copy from GPIB port to file  
FILESystem:WRITEFile  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Hardcopy Commands  
Hardcopy commands let you control the format of hardcopy output and the  
initiation and termination of hardcopies. Table 2–11 lists these commands.  
Table 2–11: Hardcopy Commands  
Header  
Description  
HARDCopy  
Start or terminate hardcopy  
Select file to send hardcopy data to  
HARDCopy:FILEName  
(File System only)  
HARDCopy:FORMat  
HARDCopy:LAYout  
Hardcopy output format  
Hardcopy orientation  
HARDCopy:PALEtte  
(TDS 6X4B & 700C)  
Select palette to use when making hardcopy  
HARDCopy:PORT  
Hardcopy port for output  
Histogram Commands  
Histogram commands let you select the type of histogram, what part of the  
waveform should go into the histogram, and histogram statistics. Table 2–12 lists  
these commands.  
Table 2–12: Histogram Commands  
Header  
Description  
HIStogram?  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Queries the state of all settable parameters  
related to histograms  
HIStogram:BOX  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Defines the left, top, right, and bottom  
positions of the histogram box, in source  
waveform coordinates  
2–19  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–12: Histogram Commands (Cont.)  
Header  
Description  
HIStogram:BOXPcnt  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Define the left, top, right, and bottom positions  
of the histogram box, in percentage coordi-  
nates.  
HIStogram:COUNt  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Zeros the counts for histograms and starts  
recounting  
HIStogram:DISplay  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Select the way the histogram is displayed, if at  
all  
HIStogram:MODe  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Selects the type of histogram to be made – or  
turn the histogram off  
HIStogram:SIZe  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Controls the width (or height) of the histogram  
on the screen  
HIStogram:SOUrce  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Selects which trace to use when histograms  
are turned on  
Horizontal Commands  
Horizontal commands control the time bases of the digitizing oscilloscope. You  
can set the time per division (or time per point) of both the main and delay time  
bases. You can also set the record lengths. Table 2–13 lists these commands.  
You may substitute SECdiv for SCAle in the horizontal commands. This  
provides program compatibility with earlier models of Tektronix digitizing  
oscilloscopes.  
Table 2–13: Horizontal Commands  
Header  
Description  
HORizontal?  
Return horizontal settings  
HORizontal:ACQDURATION?  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Returns the overall time interval covered by  
the live channels  
HORizontal:ACQLENGTH?  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Returns the acquisition length – either the  
extended one when extended acquisition  
length mode is on or the record length when  
this mode is off  
HORizontal:CLOCk  
(TDS 400A)  
Enable internal or external clocks  
Set maximum external clock rate  
Return delay time base settings  
HORizontal:CLOCk:MAXRate  
(TDS 400A)  
HORizontal:DELay?  
2–20  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–13: Horizontal Commands (Cont.)  
Header  
Description  
HORizontal:DELay:MODe  
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle  
HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv  
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe  
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe?  
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter  
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter  
Delay time base mode  
Delay time base time per division  
Same as HORizontal:DELay:SCAle  
Delay time  
Return delay time parameters  
Time to wait in delay-runs-after-main mode  
Time to wait in delay-runs-after-trigger mode  
HORizontal:EXTDACQ  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Enable or disable extended acquisition length  
mode when InstaVu mode is not on  
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Select FastFrame count  
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Select length of each FastFrame frame  
Select FastFrame frame to display  
Setup FastFrame acquisition  
HORizontal:FASTframe:POSition  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
HORizontal:FITtoscreen  
HORizontal:MAIn?  
Setup waveform compress  
Return main time per division  
Main time base time per division  
Same as HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle  
Turn delay time base on or off  
Portion of waveform to display  
Number of points in waveform record  
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle  
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv  
HORizontal:MODe  
HORizontal:POSition  
HORizontal:RECOrdlength  
HORizontal:RECORDSTART  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Set the selected live channel’s record start that  
is to be used in extended acquisition length  
mode  
HORizontal:ROLL  
(TDS 400A)  
Set roll mode to auto or off  
HORizontal:SCAle  
Same as HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle  
Same as HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle  
Return trigger position  
HORizontal:SECdiv  
HORizontal:TRIGger?  
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition  
Main time base trigger position  
2–21  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Limit Test Commands  
The Limit Test commands let you automatically compare each incoming  
waveform against a template waveform. You set an envelope of limits around a  
waveform and let the digitizing oscilloscope find the waveforms that fall outside  
those limits. When it finds such a waveform, it can generate a hardcopy, ring a  
bell, stop and wait for your input, or any combination of these actions.  
Table 2–14 lists these commands.  
Table 2–14: Limit Test Commands  
Header  
Description  
LIMit:BELl  
Ring bell when limit exceeded  
Template to compare waveform to  
Template to compare math waveform to  
LIMit:COMpare:CH<x>  
LIMit:COMpare:MATH<x>  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
LIMit:HARDCopy  
Make hardcopy when limit exceeded  
Turn limit testing on or off  
LIMit:STATE  
LIMit:TEMPLate  
Template to compare waveform to  
Reference storage for template waveform  
Template waveform source  
LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination  
LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce  
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:  
HORizontal  
Tested waveform horizontal tolerance  
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical  
Tested waveform vertical tolerance  
2–22  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Mask Commands  
Mask commands control standard masks, user-defined masks, and testing against  
masks. A mask is a polygonal region on the screen. Every vertical line on the  
screen intersects the polygon in zero, one, or two places, but never in more than  
two. The user has to break up more complicated polygons into separate masks.  
Unlike Limit Testing, the inside of a mask is the region where waveform data  
would not normally fall. A telecom standard requires two, three, or four of these  
masks. Pulse standards always have two masks. Standards with eye patterns  
usually have three masks, but some have four. Table 2–18 lists these commands.  
Table 2–15: Mask Commands  
Header  
Description  
MASK?  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Return mask parameters  
MASK:AUTOSet:MODe  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Controls whether or not an autoset will  
automatically be done after a standard mask is  
selected  
MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Controls whether or not a standard–mask–au-  
toset has the freedom to adjust vertical offset  
so the waveform matches the mask.  
MASK:COUNt  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Clear mask counts and restart counting  
MASK:COUNt:STATE  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Controls whether or not mask counting is  
being done  
MASK:COUNt:TOTal?  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Returns the sum of all the hits in all the  
defined masks  
MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS?  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Returns the number of waveforms that have  
contributed to mask counting  
MASK:DISplay  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Controls whether or not defined masks are  
displayed on the screen  
MASK:FILTer  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Controls whether or not a digital filter will be  
run on the waveform data  
MASK:MASK<NR1>  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
With delete argument, deletes all points in the  
specified mask.  
With query form, queries the state of settable  
parameters of the specified mask  
MASK:MASK<NR1>:COUNt?  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Returns the number of hits in the specified  
mask  
MASK:MASK<NR1>:NR_Pt?  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Returns the number of points in the specified  
mask  
MASK:MASK<NR1>:POInts  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Define points in the specified mask, in user  
coordinates  
2–23  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–15: Mask Commands (Cont.)  
Header  
Description  
MASK:MASK<NR1>:POINTSPcnt  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Define points in a mask, in percentage  
coordinates  
MASK:SOUrce  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Select which trace will be compared against  
the mask(s), when counting is turned on  
MASK:STANdard  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Delete any currently existing mask/s and  
replace with standard mask/s  
MASK:TBPosition  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Set the time base position to the value of the  
argument  
Measurement Commands  
Measurement commands control the automated measurement system. Table 2–16  
lists these commands.  
Up to four automated measurements can be displayed on the screen. In the  
commands, these four measurement readouts are named MEAS<x>, where <x> can  
be 1, 2, 3, or 4.  
In addition to the four displayed measurements, the measurement commands let  
you specify a fifth measurement, IMMed. The immediate measurement has no  
front-panel equivalent. Immediate measurements are never displayed. Because  
they are computed only when needed, immediate measurements slow the  
waveform update rate less than displayed measurements.  
Whether you use displayed or immediate measurements, you use the VALue?  
query to obtain measurement results.  
Measurement commands can set and query measurement parameters. You can  
assign some parameters, such as waveform sources, differently for each  
measurement readout. Other parameters, such as reference levels, have only one  
value, which applies to all measurements.  
Table 2–16: Measurement Commands  
Header  
Description  
MEASUrement?  
Return all measurement parameters  
Take down measurement snapshot  
Set or query measurement gating  
Return immediate measurement parameters  
Return info on immediate delay measurement  
MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot  
MEASUrement:GATING  
MEASUrement:IMMed?  
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?  
2–24  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–16: Measurement Commands (Cont.)  
Header  
Description  
Search direction to use for delay measure-  
ments  
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:  
DIREction  
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE1  
Which waveform edge to use for delay  
measurements  
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2  
Which waveform edge to use for delay  
measurements  
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]  
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2  
Channel to take measurement from  
Second channel to take measurement from  
(delay or “to” channel)  
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe  
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNITS?  
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?  
The measurement to be taken  
Return measurement units  
Return measurement result  
Return parameters on measurement  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Returns the number of values accumulated for  
this measurement since the last statistical  
reset  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?  
Return delay measurement parameters  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:  
DIRection  
Search direction to use for delay measure-  
ments  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE1  
Which waveform edge to use for delay  
measurements  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2  
Which waveform edge to use for delay  
measurements  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Returns the maximum value found for this  
measurement since the last statistical reset  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Returns the mean value accumulated for this  
measurement since the last statistical reset.  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum?  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Returns the minimum value found for this  
measurement since the last statistical test  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2  
Channel (or histogram with TDS 500C &  
700C) to take measurement from  
Second channel (or histogram with TDS 500C  
& 700C) to take measurement from (delay or  
“to” channel)  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE  
Turn measurement display on or off  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Returns the standard deviation of values  
accumulated for this measurement since the  
last statistical reset  
2–25  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–16: Measurement Commands (Cont.)  
Header  
Description  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNITS?  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?  
MEASUrement:METHod  
The measurement to be taken  
Return units to use for measurement  
Return measurement result  
Method for calculating reference levels  
Return reference levels  
MEASUrement:REFLevel?  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH The top level for risetime (90% level)  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID  
The low level for risetime (10% level)  
Mid level for measurements  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 Mid level for delay measurements  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod  
Method to assign HIGH and LOW  
levels: either % or absolute volts  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2  
MEASUrement:SNAPShot  
The top level for risetime (90% level)  
The low level for risetime (10% level)  
Mid level for measurements  
Mid level for delay measurements  
Display measurement snapshot  
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Controls operation and display of measure-  
ment statistics  
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Controls the responsiveness of mean and  
standard deviation to waveform changes  
Miscellaneous Commands  
Miscellaneous commands do not fit into other categories. Table 2–17 lists these  
commands.  
Several commands and queries are common to all 488.2–1987 devices on the  
GPIB bus. The 488.2–1987 standard defines them. They begin with a star (*)  
character.  
Table 2–17: Miscellaneous Commands  
Header  
AUTOSet  
BELl  
Description  
Automatic instrument setup  
Audio alert  
DATE  
Set date  
2–26  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–17: Miscellaneous Commands (Cont.)  
Header  
*DDT  
Description  
Define group execute trigger (GET)  
FACtory  
HDR  
Reset to factory default  
Same as HEADer  
HEADer  
*IDN?  
*LRN?  
LOCk  
Return command header with query  
Identification  
Learn device setting  
Lock front panel (local lockout)  
Change password for User Protected Data  
Access to change User Protected Data  
No action; remark only  
NEWpass  
PASSWord  
REM  
SET?  
Same as *LRN?  
TEKSecure  
TIMe  
Initialize waveforms and setups  
Set time  
*TRG  
Perform Group Execute Trigger (GET)  
Self-test  
*TST?  
UNLock  
VERBose  
Unlock front panel (local lockout)  
Return full command name or minimum  
spellings with query  
RS-232 Commands  
RS-232 commands allow you to utilize the serial communications port (available  
with the RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface). Table 2–18 lists these  
commands.  
Table 2–18: RS-232 Commands  
Header  
Description  
RS232?  
Return RS-232 parameters  
Set baud rate  
RS232:BAUd  
RS232:HARDFlagging  
RS232:PARity  
RS232:SOFTFlagging  
RS232:STOPBits  
Set hard flagging  
Set parity  
Set soft flagging  
Set # of stop bits  
2–27  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Save and Recall Commands  
Save and Recall commands allow you to store and retrieve internal waveforms  
and settings. When you “save a setup,” you save all the settings of the digitizing  
oscilloscope. When you then “recall a setup,” the digitizing oscilloscope restores  
itself to the state it was in when you originally saved that setting. Table 2–19  
lists these commands.  
Table 2–19: Save and Recall Commands  
Header  
Description  
ALLOcate?  
Return number of allocated and unallocated  
data points  
ALLOcate:WAVEform?  
ALLOcate:WAVEform:FREE?  
ALLOcate:WAVEform:REF<x>?  
DELEte:SETUp  
Return number of allocated data points  
Return number of unallocated data points  
Specify the number of allocated data points  
Delete stored setup  
DELEte:WAVEform  
Delete stored waveform  
*RCL  
Recall settings  
RECAll:ACQDATA (TDS 500C & 700C)  
Replace the indicated channel’s live acquisi-  
tion data with data from indicated file  
RECAll:SETUp  
Recall saved instrument settings  
Recall saved waveform  
RECAll:WAVEform  
(File System only)  
*SAV  
Save settings  
SAVe:ACQDATA (TDS 500C & 700C)  
SAVe:SETUp  
Write out acquisition data to the indicated file  
Save instrument settings  
SAVe:WAVEform  
Save waveform  
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat  
(Not on TDS 510A)  
Specifies the file format for saved waveforms  
Status and Error Commands  
Table 2–20 lists the status and error commands the digitizing oscilloscope  
supports. These commands let you determine the status of the digitizing  
oscilloscope and control events.  
Several commands and queries used with the digitizing oscilloscope are common  
to all devices on the GPIB bus. IEEE Std 488.2–1987 defines these commands  
and queries. They begin with an asterisk (*).  
2–28  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–20: Status and Error Commands  
Header  
ALLEv?  
BUSY?  
*CLS  
Description  
Return all events  
Return scope status  
Clear status  
DESE  
Device event status enable  
Event status enable  
*ESE  
*ESR?  
EVENT?  
EVMsg?  
EVQty?  
ID?  
Return standard event status register  
Return event code  
Return event code and message  
Return number of events in queue  
Identification  
*OPC  
Operation complete  
*OPT? (Not in TDS 400A)  
*PSC  
Return installed options  
Power-on status clear  
Query or set User Protected Data  
Reset  
*PUD  
*RST  
*SRE  
Service request enable  
Read status byte  
*STB?  
*WAI  
Wait to continue  
Trigger Commands  
Trigger commands control all aspects of digitizing oscilloscope triggering. Table  
2–21 lists these commands.  
There are two triggers, main and delayed. Where appropriate, the command set  
has parallel constructions for each trigger.  
You can set the main or delayed triggers to edge mode. Edge triggering lets you  
display a waveform at or near the point where the signal passes through a voltage  
level of your choosing.  
You can also set TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, and 700C main triggers to pulse and  
logic modes. Pulse triggering lets the oscilloscope trigger whenever it detects a  
pulse of a certain width or height. Logic triggering lets you logically combine  
the signals on one or more channels. The digitizing oscilloscope then triggers  
when it detects a certain combination of signal levels.  
2–29  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–21: Trigger Commands  
Header  
Description  
TRIGger  
Force trigger event; Return parameters  
Delay trigger level to 50%  
Delay by time or events  
Return delay trigger parameters  
Delay trigger coupling  
TRIGger:DELay  
TRIGger:DELay:BY  
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE?  
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:COUPling  
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SLOpe  
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SOUrce  
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS?  
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt  
TRIGger:DELay:LEVel  
TRIGger:DELay:TIMe  
TRIGger:DELay:TYPe  
TRIGger:MAIn  
Delay trigger slope  
Delay trigger source  
Return delay trigger event parameters  
Delay by events count  
Delay trigger level  
Time for delay by time  
Delay trigger, edge  
Main trigger level to 50%  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:  
AMI:PULSEForm (TDS 500C & 700C)  
AMI pulse form setting (an Eye Diagram, an  
Isolated +1, or an Isolated –1)  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:  
AMI:THReshold:HIGH (TDS 500C & 700C)  
AMI threshold high level  
AMI threshold low level  
Communication trigger bit rate  
CMI pulse form  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:  
THReshold:LOW (TDS 500C & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:  
BITRate (TDS 500C & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CMI:  
PULSEForm (TDS 500C & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CODe  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Select which line code the comm trigger  
should expect on the incoming signal  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:NRZ:  
PULSEForm (TDS 500C & 700C)  
NRZ pulse form  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:SOUrce  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Communication trigger source channel  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:  
STANdard (TDS 500C & 700C)  
Communication trigger standard which  
identifies the code and bit rate  
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE?  
Return main edge trigger parameters  
Main trigger coupling  
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling  
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe  
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff?  
Main trigger slope  
Main trigger source  
Return main trigger holdoff value  
2–30  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–21: Trigger Commands (Cont.)  
Header  
Description  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:ACTUal?  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
Return main trigger holdoff value in seconds  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:BY  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
Main trigger holdoff default  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:TIMe  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
Main trigger holdoff time  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue  
(TDS 400A & 510A)  
Main trigger holdoff value  
TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel  
Main trigger level  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc?  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Returns main logic trigger parameters  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Logic trigger input usage  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:FUNCtion  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Logic trigger input combining  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut?  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Return main logic trigger input settings  
Logic trigger expected channel state  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:  
INPut:CH4  
Logic trigger expected for channel 4 pattern  
class  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Main logic pattern trigger condition  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern  
:WHEn:LESSLimit  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Maximum time the selected pattern may be  
true and still generate main logic pattern  
trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern  
:WHEn:MORELimit  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Minimum time the selected pattern may be  
true and still generate main logic pattern  
trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:  
CLOCk:EDGE  
Clock edge polarity for setup and hold violation  
triggering  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:  
CLOCk:LEVel  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
Setup/Hold clock voltage trigger level  
Setup/Hold clock input source  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:  
CLOCk:SOUrce  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
2–31  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–21: Trigger Commands (Cont.)  
Header  
Description  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:  
DATa:LEVel  
Setup/Hold data level  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:  
DATa:SOUrce  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
Setup/Hold data input data channel  
Setup/Hold trigger hold time  
Setup/Hold trigger set time  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:  
HOLDTime  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:  
SETTime  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:  
CH4  
Logic trigger expected for channel 4 state  
class  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
When the logic trigger occurs (on true or false)  
Return main logic thresholds  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold?  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold:  
CH<x>  
Logic trigger thresholds  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:WHEn  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Logic trigger on combination true or false  
TRIGger:MAIn:MODe  
Main trigger mode  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse?  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Returns pulse trigger parameters  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:CLAss  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Pulse trigger class  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch?  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Returns glitch trigger parameters  
Glitch filter on and off  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:FILTer  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:  
POLarity  
Glitch filter positive, negative, or both  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Glitch trigger with differentiation between glitch  
and valid pulse  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT?  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Return runt trigger parameters  
2–32  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–21: Trigger Commands (Cont.)  
Header  
Description  
Runt trigger positive, negative, or both  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:POLarity  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold? Return runt trigger thresholds  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:  
THReshold:BOTh  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
Trigger level switching thresholds  
Upper limit for runt pulse  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:  
THReshold:HIGH  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:  
THReshold:LOW  
Lower limit for runt pulse  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WHEn  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
Runt pulse width type to check for  
Minimum width for valid main pulse runt trigger  
Slew rate trigger delta time  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WIDth  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:  
DELTATime  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:  
POLarity  
Slew rate trigger polarity  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:  
SLEWRate?  
Return slew rate value  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:  
THReshold:BOTh  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
Upper and lower slew rate trigger thresholds  
Upper limit for slew rate pulse  
Lower limit for slew rate pulse  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:  
THReshold:HIGH  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:  
THReshold:LOW  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:WHEn  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C)  
Slewing signal type to check for  
Pulse trigger channel  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarĆ  
ity  
Pulse timeout trigger polarity  
(TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
2–33  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–21: Trigger Commands (Cont.)  
Header  
Description  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe  
(TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Pulse timeout trigger time  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth?  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Return trigger pulse width parameters  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit Pulse trigger maximum pulse width  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Pulse trigger minimum pulse width  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Pulse trigger positive, negative, or both  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEn  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Pulse trigger when pulse detected or when not  
detected  
TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe  
Set main trigger to edge, logic, pulse, or, with  
option 05, video type  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo?  
(Option 05)  
Return video trigger parameters  
Set video trigger delay mode  
Set video trigger field  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:BY  
(TDS 400A Option 05)  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELD  
(Option 05)  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELDType  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05)  
Set video trigger field type  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat?  
(TDS 510A, 500C. 600B, & 700C Option 05)  
Return FlexFormat parameters  
Set FlexFormat frames per second  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:  
FIELDRATE  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05)  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:  
FIELDS  
Set FlexFormat video fields  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05)  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:  
LINES  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05)  
Set FlexFormat lines in a frame  
Set FlexFormat negative sync width  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:  
NEGSynchwidth  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05)  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:  
V1STArttime  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05)  
Set time from positive (+) edge of tri-sync  
pulse for the last line in the selected field to  
the leading edge (–) of the first negative  
vertical sync pulse  
2–34  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–21: Trigger Commands (Cont.)  
Header  
Description  
Set time from positive edge of tri-sync pulse  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:  
V1STOptime  
for the last line in the selected field (t to  
0)  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05)  
trailing edge (positive) of the first negative  
vertical sync pulse  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:  
FLEXformat:V2STArttime  
Set time from t to the leading edge (positive)  
of the second vertical sync pulse  
0
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05)  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:  
FLEXformat:V2STOptime  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05)  
Set time from t to trailing edge (positive) of  
0
the second negative vertical sync pulse  
Select high definition TV format  
Return video trigger holdoff  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HDTv  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05)  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff?  
(TDS 400A Option 05)  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff:VALue  
(TDS 400A Option 05)  
Set video trigger holdoff value  
Select video trigger interlace format  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:INTERLAce  
(TDS 400A Option 05)  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE  
(Option 05)  
Set video trigger delay in terms of a number of  
lines  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINES  
(TDS 400A Option 05)  
Set video trigger delay in terms of a number of  
lines  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:NTSc  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05)  
Select color or mono NTSC  
Select color or mono PAL  
Set video trigger scan rate  
Set video trigger scan period  
Select video trigger source  
Select video trigger standard  
Select video trigger sync polarity  
Select video trigger class  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:PAL  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05)  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCAN  
(TDS 400A Option 05)  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCANPeriod  
(TDS 400A Option 05)  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce  
Option 05  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANdard  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05)  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNc  
(Option 05)  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYStem  
(TDS 400A Option 05)  
2–35  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–21: Trigger Commands (Cont.)  
Header  
Description  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:TIMe  
(TDS 400A Option 05)  
Set video trigger delay time  
TRIGger:STATE?  
Return trigger system status  
2–36  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Vertical Commands  
Vertical commands control the display of channels and of main and reference  
waveforms. Table 2–22 lists these commands.  
The SELect:<wfm> command also selects the waveform many commands in  
other command groups use.  
You may replace VOLts for SCAle in the vertical commands. This provides  
program compatibility with earlier models of Tektronix digitizing oscilloscopes.  
Table 2–22: Vertical Commands  
Header  
Description  
CH<x>?  
Return vertical parameters  
Channel bandwidth  
CH<x>:BANdwidth  
CH<x>:COUPling  
CH<x>:DESKew (TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
CH<x>:IMPedance  
CH<x>:OFFSet  
Channel coupling  
Channel deskew time  
Channel impedance  
Channel offset  
CH<x>:POSition  
CH<x>:PROBE?  
Channel position  
Return channel probe attenuation  
Return channel probe cal status  
CH<x>:PROBECal?  
(TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Sets the state of the external attenuation for  
the specified channel to the specified value  
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten  
(TDS 500C & 700C)  
Sets the state of the attenuation for the  
specified channel to the specified value, in dB  
CH<x>:SCAle  
CH<x>:VOLts  
MATH<x>?  
Channel volts per div  
Same as CH<x>:SCAle  
Return math waveform definition  
Define math waveform  
MATH<x>:DEFine  
MATH<x>:NUMAVg  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C,  
some models require Option 2F)  
Acquisition number at which to begin  
exponential averaging  
MATH<x>:PROCessing  
(TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C,  
some models require Option 2F)  
Math waveform averaging on or off  
SELect?  
Return selected waveform  
Front-panel channel selector  
Set selected waveform  
SELect:CONTROl  
SELect:<wfm>  
2–37  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Waveform Commands  
Waveform commands let you transfer waveform data points to and from the  
digitizing oscilloscope. Waveform data points are a collection of values that  
define a waveform. One data value usually represents one data point in the  
waveform record. When working with enveloped waveforms, each data value is  
either the min or max of a min/max pair. Before you transfer waveform data, you  
must specify the data format, record length, and waveform locations.  
Table 2–24 lists these commands.  
Waveform Data Formats  
Acquired waveform data uses either one or two 8-bit data bytes to represent each  
data point. The number of bytes used depends on the acquisition mode specified  
when you acquired the data. Data acquired in SAMple, ENVelope, or PEAKde-  
tect mode uses one 8-bit byte per waveform data point. Data acquired in HIRes  
or AVErage mode uses two 8-bit bytes per point. For more information on the  
acquisition modes see the ACQuire: MODe command on page 2–48.  
The DATa:WIDth command lets you specify the number of bytes per data point  
when transferring data to and from the digitizing oscilloscope. If you specify two  
bytes for data that uses only one, the least significant byte will be filled with  
zeros. If you specify one byte for data that uses two, the least significant byte  
will be ignored.  
The digitizing oscilloscope can transfer waveform data in either ASCII or binary  
format. You specify the format with the DATa:ENCdg command.  
ASCII data — is represented by signed integer values. The range of the values  
depends on the byte width specified. One byte wide data ranges from –128 to  
127. Two byte wide data ranges from –32768 to 32767.  
Each data value requires two to seven characters. This includes one to five  
characters to represent the value, another character, if the value is negative, to  
represent a minus sign, and a comma to separate the data points.  
An example ASCII waveform data string may look like this:  
CURVE<space>-110,-109,-110,-110,-109,-107,-109,-107,  
-106,-105,-103,-100,-97,-90,-84,-80  
Use ASCII to obtain more human readable and easier to format output than  
binary. However, it may require more bytes to send the same values with ASCII  
than it does with binary. This may reduce transmission speeds.  
Binary data — can be represented by signed integer or positive integer values.  
The range of the values depends on the byte width specified. When the byte  
width is one, signed integer data ranges from –128 to 127, and positive integer  
2–38  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
values range from 0 to 255. When the byte width is two, the values range from  
–32768 to 32767.  
The defined binary formats also specify the order in which the bytes are  
transferred. The four binary formats are RIBinary, RPBinary, SRIbinary, and  
SRPbinary.  
RIBinary is signed integer where the most significant byte is transferred first,  
and RPBinary is positive integer where the most significant byte is transferred  
first. SRIbinary and SRPbinary correspond to RIBinary and RPBinary respec-  
tively but use a swapped byte order where the least significant byte is transferred  
first. The byte order is ignored when DATa:WIDth is set to 1.  
Waveform Data/Record  
Lengths  
You can transfer multiple points for each waveform record. You can transfer a  
portion of the waveform or you can transfer the entire record. The DATa:STARt  
and DATa:STOP commands let you specify the first and last data points of the  
waveform record.  
When transferring data into the digitizing oscilloscope, you must specify the  
location of the first data point within the waveform record. For example, when  
you set DATa:STARt to 1, data points will be stored starting with the first point  
in the record, and when you set DATa:STARt to 500, data will be stored starting  
at the 500th point in the record. The digitizing oscilloscope will ignore  
DATa:STOP when reading in data as it will stop reading data when it has no  
more data to read or when it has reached the specified record length.  
When transferring data from the digitizing oscilloscope, you must specify the  
first and last data points in the waveform record. Setting DATa:STARt to 1 and  
DATa:STOP to the record length will always return the entire waveform. You can  
also use the vertical bar cursors to delimit the portion of the waveform that you  
want to transfer. DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP can then be set to the current  
cursor positions by sending the command DATa SNAp.  
Waveform Data Locations  
and Memory Allocation  
The DATa:SOUrce command specifies the data location when transferring  
waveforms from the digitizing oscilloscope. You can transfer out multiple  
waveforms at one time by specifying more than one source.  
You can transfer in to the digitizing oscilloscope only one waveform at a time.  
Waveforms sent to the oscilloscope are always stored in one of the four reference  
memory locations. You can specify the reference memory location with the  
DATa:DESTination command. You must define the memory size for the  
specified location before you store the data. The ALLOcate:  
WAVEFORM:REF<x> command lets you specify the memory size for each  
reference location.  
2–39  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Waveform Preamble  
Each waveform that you transfer has an associated waveform preamble that  
contains information such as the horizontal scale, the vertical scale, and other  
settings in place when the waveform was created. Refer to the WFMPre  
commands starting on page 2–345 for more information about the waveform  
preamble.  
Scaling Waveform Data  
Once you transfer the waveform data to the controller, you can convert the data  
points into voltage values for analysis using information from the waveform  
preamble. The GETWFM program on the diskettes that come with this manual  
shows how you can scale data.  
Transferring Waveform  
Data from the TDS Family  
Oscilloscope  
You can transfer waveforms from the digitizing oscilloscope to an external  
controller using the following sequence:  
1. Select the waveform source(s) using the DATa:SOUrce command. If you  
want to transfer multiple waveforms, select more than one source.  
2. Specify the waveform data format using DATa:ENCdg.  
3. Specify the number of bytes per data point using DATa:WIDth.  
4. Specify the portion of the waveform that you want to transfer using  
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP.  
5. Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMPRe? query.  
6. Transfer waveform data from the digitizing oscilloscope using the CURVe?  
query.  
Transferring Waveform  
Data to the TDS Family  
Oscilloscope  
You can transfer waveform data to one of the four reference memory locations in  
the digitizing oscilloscope using the following sequence:  
1. Specify waveform reference memory using DATa:DESTination.  
2. Specify the memory size for the reference location specified in Step 1 using  
the ALLOcate:WAVEFORM:REF<x> command.  
3. Specify the waveform data format using DATa:ENCdg.  
4. Specify the number of bytes per data point using DATa:WIDth.  
5. Specify first data point in the waveform record using DATa:STARt.  
6. Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMPRe:<wfm>.  
7. Transfer waveform data to the digitizing oscilloscope using CURVe.  
2–40  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Extended-Acquisition-  
Length Mode  
Waveform commands also work with extended-acquisition-length mode. This  
mode lets the oscilloscope acquire extended acquisition lengths of 2M, 4M, and  
8M while maintaining waveform record lengths limited to 500K.  
(TDS 500C & 700C,  
Option 2M)  
In other words, the acquisition data for a channel may be bigger than a waveform  
you view. Then, after the data is acquired, you can move to and display any  
portion of the data.  
Figure 2–4 below shows conceptually how this mode lets you select a subsection  
of the larger acquisition data. You can select the starting and ending positions in  
the acquisition data and the waveform record.  
NOTE. To function properly, extended acquisition mode forces some oscilloscope  
modes and settings to new values. Also, measurements, gating, and cursors are  
restricted to the current waveform record.  
Move to any portion of the acquisition data  
Extended-acquisition-length data  
Waveform  
Record  
Display  
Figure 2–4: Displaying Extended Acquisition Length Data  
2–41  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–23 below shows the correlation between the number of channels in use  
and the waveform record length.  
Table 2–23: Extended-Acquisition-Length Mode Channels and Record Lengths  
# of Channels in Use  
Extended Acquisition Length  
Waveform Record Length  
1 of 4  
8 M samples  
500 K samples  
(not on the TDS 520C and 724C)  
2 of 4  
4 M samples  
2 M samples  
250 K samples  
100 K samples  
(or on the TDS 520C and 724C: 1 of 2)  
3 or 4 of 4  
(or on the TDS 520C and 724C: 2 of 2)  
From a software development viewpoint, to define how much of the extended  
acquisition length data to include, you can use the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP  
commands.  
To define the waveform record within the extended acquisition data, you can use  
the HORizontal:RECORDSTART or the HORizontal:POSition command.  
The CURVe? query will return the extended acquisition data as you defined it  
with DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP. With extended-acquisition-mode set to on,  
this can be much larger than the waveform record. With extended-acquisition-  
mode set to off, this is equal to the waveform record.  
Also, DATa RECORDSNAp will force DATa:STARt and DATA:STOP to become the  
boundaries of the waveform record.  
Commands related to extended-acquisition-length mode operations include:  
CURVe, DATa RECORDSNAp, DATa SOUrce, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP,  
HORizontal:ACQDURATION?, HORizontal:ACQLENGTH, HORizontal:EXTĆ  
DACQ, HORizontal:POSition, HORizontal:RECORDSTART, RECAll:ACQDAĆ  
TA, SAVe:ACQDATA, and WFMPre:<wfm>?.  
NOTE. Extended-acquisition-length mode CURVe? queries can easily return  
more data than will fit on a 1.44 Mbyte floppy. For example, to return an entire  
8 M extended acquistion mode record in ASCII format can require over  
26.8 Mbytes of hard disk space. It can also take over 25 minutes to do this on  
some models.  
2–42  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–24: Waveform Commands  
Header  
CURVe  
DATa  
Description  
Transfer waveform data  
The format and location of the waveform  
data that is transferred with the CURVe  
command  
DATa:DESTination  
Destination for waveforms sent to digitizing  
oscilloscope  
DATa:ENCdg  
Waveform data encoding method  
Source of CURVe? data  
DATa:SOUrce  
DATa:STARt  
Starting point in waveform transfer  
Ending point in waveform transfer  
Same as DATa:DESTination  
Byte width of waveform points  
Return waveform preamble and data  
Return waveform format data  
Preamble bit width of waveform points.  
Preamble binary encoding type  
Preamble byte width of waveform points  
Preamble byte order of waveform points  
Preamble checksum of waveform points  
Preamble encoding method  
Number of points in the curve  
Format of curve points  
DATa:STOP  
DATa:TARget  
DATa:WIDth  
WAVFrm?  
WAVPre?  
WFMPre:BIT_Nr  
WFMPre:BN_Fmt  
WFMPre:BYT_Nr  
WFMPre:BYT_Or  
WFMPre:CRVchk  
WFMPre:ENCdg  
WFMPre:NR_Pt  
WFMPre:PT_Fmt  
WFMPre:PT_Off  
WFMPre:WFId  
WFMPre:XINcr  
WFMPre:XMUlt  
WFMPre:XOFf  
WFMPre:XUNit  
WFMPre:XZEro  
WFMPre:YMUlt  
WFMPre:YOFf  
WFMPre:YUNit  
WFMPre:YZEro  
Trigger position  
Curve identifier  
Horizontal sampling interval  
Horizontal scale factor  
Horizontal offset  
Horizontal units  
Horizontal origin offset  
Vertical scale factor  
Vertical offset  
Vertical units  
Offset voltage  
2–43  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Table 2–24: Waveform Commands (Cont.)  
Header  
Description  
WFMPre:ZMUlt  
Z-axis scale factor  
Z-axis offset  
WFMPre:ZOFf  
WFMPre:ZUNit  
Z-axis units  
WFMPre:ZZEro  
Z-axis origin offset  
Number of points in the curve  
Format of curve points  
Trigger position  
WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt  
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Fmt  
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Off  
WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId  
WFMPre:<wfm>:XINcr  
WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit  
Curve identifier  
Horizontal sampling interval  
Horizontal units  
WFMPre:<wfm>:XZEro  
(TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C)  
Horizontal units  
WFMPre:<wfm>:YMUlt  
WFMPre:<wfm>:YOFf  
WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit  
WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro  
Vertical scale factor  
Vertical offset  
Vertical units  
Offset voltage  
2–44  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Groups  
Zoom Commands  
Zoom commands let you expand and position the waveform display horizontally  
and vertically without changing the time base or vertical settings. Table 2–25  
lists these commands.  
Table 2–25: Zoom Commands  
Header  
Description  
ZOOm  
Reset zoom parameters to defaults  
Turn dual zoom mode on and off  
ZOOm:DUAl (Not on TDS 510A)  
ZOOm:DUAl:OFFSet  
(Not on TDS 510A)  
Adjust the requested horizontal offset between  
the centers of the main and second zoom  
boxes  
ZOOm:GRAticle  
(Not on TDS 510A)  
Select between the upper and lower graticule  
for use by the zoom preview state  
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk  
ZOOm:HORizontal:POSition  
ZOOm:HORizontal:SCAle  
ZOOm:STATE  
Horizontal zoom lock  
Horizontal zoom position  
Horizontal zoom scale  
Turn zoom mode on or off  
(you can also turn on the preview mode  
– not on the TDS 510A)  
ZOOm:VERTical:POSition  
ZOOm:VERTical:SCAle  
Vertical zoom position  
Vertical zoom scale  
2–45  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
You can use commands to either set instrument features or query instrument  
values. You can use some commands to do both, some to only set, and some to  
only query. This manual marks set only commands with the words “No Query  
Form” included with the command name. It marks query only commands with a  
question mark appended to the header, and includes the words “Query Only” in  
the command name.  
This manual spells out headers, mnemonics, and arguments with the minimal  
spelling shown in upper case. For example, to use the abbreviated form of the  
ACQuire:MODe command just type ACQ:MOD.  
ACQuire? (Query Only)  
Returns all the current acquisition parameters.  
Group  
Syntax  
Acquisition  
ACQuire?  
ACQuire  
?
Examples  
ACQUIRE?  
might return the string :ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE  
SAMPLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG 16;REPET 1 for the current acquisition parameters.  
ACQuire:AUTOSAve  
TDS 500C, 600B & 700C Only  
Saves waveforms in reference memory when acquisition completes. This is  
equivalent to setting Autosave Single Seq in the Acquire menu and the  
corresponding side menu Off or On items.  
When you start a Single Sequence with Autosave set to ON, the oscilloscope  
nulls out all existing reference waveforms. At the end of Single Sequence, the  
oscilloscope saves all displayed live channels to reference waveform memory. It  
saves references in the order Ch1 –> Ref1, Ch2 –> Ref2, Ch3 –> Ref3, Ch4 –>  
Ref4. The exact number of references saved may depend on the record length  
used.  
2–47  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
When extended-acquisition-length mode is on, this command can still set and  
return values. However, this acquire:autosave feature will not actually work  
while extended-acquisition-length mode is on.  
Group  
Acquisition  
Syntax  
ACQuire:AUTOSAve { OFF | ON | <NR1> }  
ACQuire:AUTOSAve?  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
AUTOSAve  
ACQuire  
:
?
Arguments  
Examples  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns autosave off.  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 turns autosave on.  
ACQUIRE:AUTOSAVE 1  
turns autosave mode on.  
ACQUIRE:AUTOSAVE OFF  
turns autosave mode off.  
ACQUIRE:AUTOSAVE?  
might return 1, indicating that autosave mode is on.  
ACQuire:MODe  
Sets or queries the acquisition mode of the digitizing oscilloscope. This affects  
all live waveforms. This command is equivalent to setting Mode in the Acquire  
menu.  
Waveforms are the displayed data point values taken from acquisition intervals.  
Each acquisition interval represents a time duration set by the horizontal scale  
(time per division). The digitizing oscilloscope sampling system always samples  
at the maximum rate, and so an acquisition interval may include more than one  
sample.  
The acquisition mode, which you set using this ACQuire:MODe command,  
determines how the final value of the acquisition interval is generated from the  
many data samples.  
2–48  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
When extended-acquisition-length mode is on, this command can still set and  
return values. However, the oscilloscope will treat all modes, except Peak Detect,  
as the Sample mode.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Acquisition  
ACQuire:NUMAVg, ACQuire:NUMENv, CURVe?, DATa:WIDth  
For the TDS 400A, 510A, 500C & 700C:  
ACQuire:MODe { SAMple | PEAKdetect | HIRes | AVErage |  
ENVelope }  
For the TDS 600B:  
ACQuire:MODe { SAMple | PEAKdetect | AVErage | ENVelope }  
For all TDS:  
ACQuire:MODe?  
For the TDS 400A, 510A, 500C, & 700C:  
SAMple  
PEAKdetect  
HIRes  
<Space>  
AVErage  
ENVelope  
ACQuire  
:
MODe  
?
For the TDS 600B:  
SAMple  
PEAKdetect  
AVErage  
<Space>  
ENVelope  
ACQuire  
:
MODe  
?
Arguments  
SAMple specifies that the displayed data point value is simply the first sampled  
value that was taken during the acquisition interval. In sample mode, all  
waveform data has 8 bits of precision. You can request 16 bit data with a  
2–49  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
CURVe? query, but the lower-order 8 bits of data will be zero. SAMple is the  
default mode.  
PEAKdetect specifies the display of the high-low range of the samples taken  
from a single waveform acquisition. The high-low range is displayed as a  
vertical column that extends from the highest to the lowest value sampled during  
the acquisition interval. PEAKdetect mode can reveal the presence of aliasing or  
narrow spikes.  
HIRes (for the TDS 400A, 510A, 500C, & 700C) specifies Hi Res mode, where  
the displayed data point value is the average of all the samples taken during the  
acquisition interval. This is a form of averaging, where the average comes from a  
single waveform acquisition. The number of samples taken during the acquisi-  
tion interval determines the number of data values that compose the average.  
AVErage specifies averaging mode, where the resulting waveform shows an  
average of SAMple data points from several separate waveform acquisitions. The  
number of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the average waveform  
is set or queried using the ACQuire:NUMAVg command.  
ENVelope specifies envelope mode, where the resulting waveform shows the  
PEAKdetect range of data points from several separate waveform acquisitions.  
The number of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the envelope  
waveform is set or queried using the ACQuire:NUMENv command.  
Examples  
ACQUIRE:MODE ENVELOPE  
sets the acquisition mode to display a waveform that is an envelope of many  
individual waveform acquisitions.  
ACQUIRE:MODE?  
might return ENVELOPE.  
ACQuire:NUMACq? (Query Only)  
Indicates the number of acquisitions that have taken place since starting  
acquisition. This value is reset to zero when any Acquisition, Horizontal, or  
Vertical arguments that affect the waveform are modified. The maximum number  
of acquisitions that can be counted is 230–1. Counting stops when this number is  
reached. This is the same value that is displayed in the upper center of the screen  
when the acquisition system is stopped.  
Group  
Acquisition  
Related Commands  
ACQuire:STATE  
2–50  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
ACQuire:NUMACq?  
ACQuire  
:
?
NUMACq  
Related Commands  
Examples  
<NR1>  
ACQUIRE:NUMACQ?  
might return 350, indicating that 350 acquisitions took place since an AC-  
QUIRE:STATE RUN command was executed.  
ACQuire:NUMAVg  
Sets the number of waveform acquisitions that make up an averaged waveform.  
This is equivalent to setting the Average count in the Acquisition Mode side  
menu.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Acquisition  
ACQuire:MODe  
ACQuire:NUMAVg <NR1>  
ACQuire:NUMAVg?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
ACQuire  
:
NUMAVg  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> is the number of waveform acquisitions, from 2 to 10,000.  
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 10  
specifies that an averaged waveform will show the result of combining 10  
separately acquired waveforms.  
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG?  
might return 75, indicating that there are 75 acquisitions specified for averaging.  
2–51  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ACQuire:NUMEnv  
Sets the number of waveform acquisitions that make up an envelope waveform.  
This is equivalent to setting the Envelope count in the Acquisition Mode side  
menu.  
Group  
Acquisition  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
ACQuire:MODe  
ACQuire:NUMEnv { <NR1> | INFInite }  
ACQuire:NUMEnv?  
<NR1>  
<Space>  
INFInite  
ACQuire  
:
NUMEnv  
?
Arguments  
<NR1> ꢀ 0 is the number of waveform acquisitions, from 1 to 2000. The  
envelope will restart after the specified number of envelopes have been acquired  
or when the ACQuire:STATE RUN command is sent.  
INFInite or <NR1> = 0 specifies continuous enveloping.  
NOTE. If you set the acquisition system to single sequence, envelope mode, and  
set the number of envelopes to infinity, the digitizing oscilloscope will envelope a  
maximum of 2001 acquisitions.  
Examples  
ACQUIRE:NUMENV 10  
specifies that an enveloped waveform will show the result of combining 10  
separately acquired waveforms.  
ACQUIRE:NUMENV?  
might return 0, indicating that acquisitions are acquired infinitely for enveloped  
waveforms.  
2–52  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ACQuire:REPEt  
TDS 400A, 510A, 500C, & 700C Only  
Controls repetitive signal acquisition. This is equivalent to setting Repetitive  
Signal in the Acquire menu. When the digitizing oscilloscope is in real-time  
operation, this setting has no effect.  
The ACQuire:REPEt command specifies the behavior of the acquisition system  
during equivalent-time (ET) operation. When repetitive mode is on, the  
acquisition system will continue to acquire waveform data until the waveform  
record is filled with acquired data. When repetitive mode is off and you specify  
single acquisition operation, only some of the waveform data points will be set  
with acquired data, and the displayed waveform shows interpolated values for  
the unsampled data points.  
When extended-acquisition-length mode is on, this command can still set and  
return values. However, this acquire:repet feature will not actually work while  
extended-acquisition-length mode is on.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Acquisition  
ACQuire:STATE, ACQuire:STOPAfter  
ACQuire:REPEt { OFF | ON | <NR1> }  
ACQuire:REPEt?  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
REPEt  
ACQuire  
:
?
Arguments  
Examples  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns repetitive mode off.  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 turns repetitive mode on.  
ACQUIRE:REPET 1  
turns repetitive mode on.  
ACQUIRE:REPET OFF  
turns repetitive mode off.  
2–53  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ACQUIRE:REPET?  
might return 1, indicating that repetitive signal acquisition mode is on.  
ACQuire:STATE  
Starts or stops acquisitions. This is the equivalent of pressing the front-panel  
RUN/STOP button. If ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to SEQuence, other signal  
events may also stop acquisition.  
Group  
Acquisition  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
ACQuire:NUMACq?, ACQuire:REPEt, ACQuire:STOPAfter  
ACQuire:STATE { OFF | ON | RUN | STOP | <NR1> }  
ACQuire:STATE?  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
RUN  
STOP  
<NR1>  
ACQuire  
:
STATE  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
OFF or STOP or <NR1> = 0 stops acquisitions.  
ON or RUN or <NR1> ꢀ 0 starts acquisition and display of waveforms. If the  
command was issued in the middle of an acquisition sequence (for instance  
averaging or enveloping), RUN restarts the sequence, discarding any data  
accumulated prior to the STOP. It also resets the number of acquisitions.  
ACQUIRE:STATE RUN  
starts acquisition of waveform data and resets the number of acquisitions count  
(NUMACQ) to zero.  
ACQUIRE:STATE?  
returns either 0 or 1, depending on whether the acquisition system is running.  
2–54  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ACQuire:STOPAfter  
Tells the digitizing oscilloscope when to stop taking acquisitions. This is  
equivalent to setting Stop After in the Acquire menu.  
When extended-acquisition-length mode is on, this command can still set and  
return values. However, this acquire:stopafter feature will not actually work  
while extended-acquisition-length mode is on.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Acquisition  
ACQuire:MODe, ACQuire:STATE, ACQuire:REPEt  
ACQuire:STOPAfter { RUNSTop |SEQuence |LIMit }  
ACQuire:STOPAfter?  
RUNSTop  
<Space>  
SEQuence  
LIMit  
ACQuire  
:
STOPAfter  
?
Arguments  
RUNSTop specifies that the run and stop state should be determined by the user  
pressing the front-panel RUN/STOP button.  
SEQuence specifies “single sequence” operation, where the digitizing oscillo-  
scope stops after it has acquired enough waveforms to satisfy the conditions of  
the acquisition mode. For example, if the acquisition mode is set to sample, and  
the horizontal scale is set to a speed that allows real-time operation, then the  
digitizing oscilloscope will stop after digitizing a waveform from a single trigger  
event. However, if the acquisition mode is set to average 100 waveforms, then  
the digitizing oscilloscope will stop only after all 100 waveforms have been  
acquired. The ACQuire: STATE command and the front-panel RUN/STOP  
button will also stop acquisition when the digitizing oscilloscope is in single  
sequence mode.  
LIMit specifies the digitizing oscilloscope stops after the limit test condition is  
met.  
2–55  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
NOTE. If you set the acquisition system to single sequence, envelope mode, and  
set the number of envelopes to infinity, the digitizing oscilloscope will envelope a  
maximum of 2001 acquisitions.  
Examples  
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTop  
sets the oscilloscope to stop acquisition when the user presses the front-panel  
RUN/STOP button.  
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER?  
might return SEQUENCE.  
ALIas  
Turns command aliases on or off. This command is identical to the  
ALIas:STATE command.  
Group  
Syntax  
Alias  
ALIas { OFF | ON | <NR1> }  
ALIas?  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
ALIas  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns alias expansion off. If a defined alias label is sent when  
ALIas is OFF, an execution error (110, “Command header error”) will be  
generated.  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 turns alias expansion on. When a defined alias is received, the  
specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.  
ALIAS ON  
turns the alias feature on.  
ALIAS?  
returns 1 when aliases are on.  
2–56  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ALIas:CATalog? (Query Only)  
Returns a list of the currently defined alias labels, separated by commas. If no  
aliases are defined, the query returns the string "".  
Group  
Syntax  
Alias  
ALIas:CATalog?  
?
ALIas  
:
CATalog  
Returns  
<QString>[,<QString>...]  
ALIAS:CATALOG?  
Examples  
might return the string "SETUP1","TESTMENU1","DEFAULT", showing there are  
3 aliases named SETUP1, TESTMENU1, and DEFAULT.  
ALIas:DEFIne  
Assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label. These messages are  
then substituted for the alias whenever it is received as a command or query  
provided ALIas:STATE has been turned ON. The ALIas:DEFIne? query returns  
the definition of a selected alias.  
Up to 10 aliases can be defined at one time. Aliases can be recursive. That is,  
aliases can include other aliases with up to 10 levels of recursion.  
Group  
Syntax  
Alias  
ALIas:DEFIne <QString><Comma>{ <QString> | <Block> }  
ALIas:DEFIne? <QString>  
<QString>  
<Space>  
<QString>  
<Comma>  
<Block>  
ALIas  
:
DEFIne  
?
<Space>  
<QString>  
2–57  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Arguments  
The first <QString> is the alias label. This label cannot be a command name.  
Labels must start with a letter, and can contain only letters, numbers, and  
underscores; other characters are not allowed. The label must be ≤12 characters.  
The second <QString> or <Block> is a complete sequence of program messages.  
The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by  
semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands (see page  
2–4). The sequence must be ≤80 characters.  
NOTE. Attempting to give two aliases the same name causes an execution error.  
To give a new alias the name of an existing alias, you must first delete the  
existing alias.  
Examples  
ALIAS:DEFINE "ST1",":RECALL:SETUP 5;:AUTOSET EXECUTE;:SELECT:CH1  
ON"  
defines an alias named “ST1” that sets up the digitizing oscilloscope.  
ALIAS:DEFINE? "ST1"  
might return :ALIAS:DEFINE "ST1",#239:RECALL:SETUP 5;:AUTOSET  
EXECUTE;:SELECT:CH1 ON  
ALIas:DELEte (No Query Form)  
Removes a specified alias. This command is identical to ALIas:DELEte:NAMe.  
Group  
Syntax  
Alias  
ALIas:DELEte <QString>  
ALIas  
:
DELEte  
<QString>  
<Space>  
Arguments  
Examples  
<QString> is the name of the alias you want to remove. Using ALIas:DELEte  
without specifying an alias causes an execution error. <QString> must be a  
previously defined alias.  
ALIAS:DELETE "SETUP1"  
deletes the alias named SETUP1.  
2–58  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ALIas:DELEte:ALL (No Query Form)  
Deletes all existing aliases.  
Group  
Syntax  
Alias  
ALIas:DELEte:ALL  
ALIas  
:
:
DELEte  
ALL  
Examples  
ALIAS:DELETE:ALL  
deletes all aliases.  
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe (No Query Form)  
Removes a specified alias. This command is identical to ALIas:DELEte.  
Group  
Syntax  
Alias  
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe <QString>  
ALIas  
:
:
<QString>  
DELEte  
NAMe  
<Space>  
Arguments  
Examples  
<QString> is the name of the alias to remove. Using ALIas:DELEte:NAMe  
without specifying an alias causes an execution error. <QString> must be a  
previously defined alias.  
ALIAS:DELETE:NAME "STARTUP"  
deletes the alias named STARTUP.  
ALIas:STATE  
Turns aliases on or off. This command is identical to the ALIas command.  
Group  
Syntax  
Alias  
ALIas:STATE {OFF | ON | <NR1> }  
2–59  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ALIas:STATE?  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
ALIas  
:
STATE  
?
Arguments  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns alias expansion off. If a defined alias is sent when  
ALIas:STATE is OFF, a command error (102) will be generated.  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 turns alias expansion on. When a defined alias is received, the  
specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.  
Examples  
ALIAS:STATE OFF  
turns the command alias feature off.  
ALIAS:STATE?  
returns 0 when alias mode is off.  
ALLEv? (Query Only)  
Causes the digitizing oscilloscope to return all events and their messages, and  
removes the returned events from the Event Queue. The messages are separated  
by commas. Use the *ESR? query to enable the events to be returned. For a  
complete discussion of the use of these registers, see page 3–1. This command is  
similar to repeatedly sending *EVMsg? queries to the instrument.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Status and error  
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, EVQTY, *SRE, *STB?  
ALLEv?  
ALLEv  
?
Returns  
The event code and message in the following format:  
<Event Code><Comma><QString>[<Comma><Event Code><Comma>  
<QString>...]  
<QString>::= <Message>;[<Command>]  
2–60  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
<Command> is the command that caused the error and may be returned when a  
command error is detected by the digitizing oscilloscope. As much of the  
command will be returned as possible without exceeding the 60 character limit  
of the <Message> and <Command> strings combined. The command string is  
right-justified.  
Examples  
ALLEV?  
might return the string :ALLEV 2225,"Measurement error, No waveform to  
measure; ",420,"Query UNTERMINATED; ".  
ALLOcate? (Query Only)  
Returns the number of data points allocated for all four reference memory  
locations.  
Group  
Syntax  
Save and Recall  
ALLOcate?  
ALLOcate  
?
Examples  
ALLOCATE?  
might return :ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:REF1 50000;REF2 0;REF3 0; REF4 0;,  
indicating that all 50000 data points are allocated to reference memory loca-  
tion 1.  
ALLOcate:WAVEform? (Query Only)  
Returns the number of data points allocated for all four reference memory  
locations.  
Group  
Syntax  
Save and Recall  
ALLOcate:WAVEform?  
ALLOcate  
:
WAVEform  
?
Examples  
ALLOCATE?  
might return :ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:REF1 500;REF2 500;REF3 500; REF4 0;,  
2–61  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
indicating that 500 data points are allocated to each of the first three reference  
memory locations.  
ALLOcate:WAVEform:FREE? (Query Only)  
Returns the approximate number of data points that have not been allocated.  
Group  
Syntax  
Save and Recall  
ALLOcate:WAVEform:FREE?  
ALLOcate  
:
WAVEform  
:
FREE  
?
Returns  
<NR1> is the approximate number of data points available.  
Examples  
ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:FREE?  
might return 520 indicating that there are approximately 500 data points  
available for allocation. The extra 20 are used for administration purposes.  
ALLOcate:WAVEform:REF<x>  
Sets or queries the number of waveform data points for the specified reference  
location. If an attempt is made to allocate memory when it is not available, an  
execution error is generated and the memory is not allocated.  
Group  
Syntax  
Save and Recall  
ALLOcate:WAVEform:REF<x> <NR1>  
ALLOcate:WAVEform:REF<x>?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
ALLOcate  
:
WAVEform  
:
REF  
<x>  
Arguments  
<NR1> = 0 is returned when the reference location is empty.  
2–62  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
<NR1> ꢀ 0 specifies the number of data points. Table 2–26 shows the number of  
data points supported for reference locations by TDS model. In the TDS 500C  
and 600B all invalid values less than the maximum will be forced to the next  
highest valid value, and those higher than the maximum will be forced to the  
maximum. For example, 15002 points on a TDS 520C with option 1M will  
allocate 50000 points of data for the reference. No complete references are stored  
for 500000 data points in the TDS 500C and TDS 700C.  
Table 2–26: Waveform Data Points Supported for Reference Locations  
TDS 420A,  
TDS 430A,  
TDS 460A  
TDS 510A,  
TDS 520C,  
TDS 724C,  
TDS 540C,  
TDS 754C,  
TDS 784C  
Configuration  
TDS 600B  
Standard  
500,  
500,  
500,  
500,  
1000,  
2500,  
5000,  
1000,  
2500,  
5000,  
15000,  
1000,  
2500,  
5000,  
15000  
1000,  
2500,  
5000,  
15000  
15000,  
30000 (4 refs) 50000  
50000 (4 refs)  
Option 1M  
60000 (2 refs), TDS 520C &  
75000 (3 refs),  
100000 (2 refs),  
130000 (2 refs),  
250000 (1 ref)  
500000 (no  
(not on the TDS 120000 (1 ref) 724C only:  
510A)  
or 2M  
(TDS 500C &  
75000 (3 refs),  
100000 (2 refs),  
130000 (2 refs),  
250000 (1 ref)  
700C only)  
complete refs)  
Examples  
ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:REF2 1000  
reserves 1,000 data points for REF2.  
ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:REF1?  
might return 500  
APPMenu  
Displays the user-definable Application menu, and the query returns the current  
Application menu labels and title. This is equivalent to pressing the front-panel  
APPLICATION button.  
Group  
Application Menu  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
CLEARMenu, *ESR, EVENT?  
APPMenu ACTivate  
2–63  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
APPMenu?  
ACTivate  
<Space>  
APPMenu  
?
Arguments  
ACTivate displays the Application menu. Use the CLEARMenu command to  
deactivate the Application menu.  
Once the Application menu is activated, whenever a front-panel menu button is  
pressed an event is generated that tells which button was pressed. See page 3–17  
for event codes.  
Menu button presses will also generate Service Requests when the URQ bit is  
enabled in DESER and ESER and the ESB bit is enabled in SRER. See page 3–1  
for a complete discussion of the use of these registers.  
Examples  
APPMENU ACTIVATE  
displays the application menu.  
APPMenu:LABel  
Removes all user-defined Application menu button labels from the display. The  
APPMenu:LABel? query returns all the current label settings.  
Group  
Syntax  
Application Menu  
APPMenu:LABel CLEar  
APPMenu:LABel?  
CLEar  
?
<Space>  
:
APPMenu  
LABel  
Arguments  
Examples  
CLEar removes the main and side menu button labels from the display. Front-pa-  
nel bezel button presses will continue to generate events.  
APPMENU:LABEL CLEAR  
clears the user-defined menu labels from the display.  
2–64  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x>  
Defines a label for the main menu button that is specified by <x>. Main menu  
buttons are located along the bottom of the display, and are numbered from 1 to  
7 starting with the left-most button.  
Group  
Syntax  
Application Menu  
APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x> <QString>  
APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x>?  
<Space>  
<QString>  
BOTTOM  
APPMenu  
:
LABel  
:
<x>  
?
Arguments  
<QString> is the menu button label and can include any of the characters shown  
in the TDS Character Chart in Appendix A. The maximum length of the label is  
1000 characters. The TDS displays the label in the area above the specified main  
menu button.  
The TDS displays the label on a single line and centers it, both vertically and  
horizontally, within the label area. You can embed a line feed character in the  
string to position the label on multiple lines. You can also use white space tab  
characters to position the label within a line.  
You can send a tab by transmitting a tab character (decimal 9) followed by two  
characters representing the most significant eight bits followed by the least  
significant eight bits of a 16-bit number. The number specifies the pixel column  
relative to the left margin of the label area. For example, to tab to pixel 13, send  
TAB (decimal 9), NUL (decimal 0), and CR (decimal 13).  
The ESC @ character turns reverse video on and off, and can be embedded in the  
label string. The first ESC @ character displays all text following the ESC @ in  
reverse video until another ESC @ character is found in the string.  
NOTE. The use of any undocumented codes may produce unpredictable results.  
The label area is 45 pixels high and 90 pixels wide. The length of the label that  
fits in the label area depends on the contents of the label, because the width of  
characters varies. The label area is about 10 characters wide and 3 lines high. For  
a complete list of character widths in pixels, see Table A–1 on page A–1.  
If the label exceeds the limits of the label area, either horizontally or vertically,  
the portion of the label that exceeds the limits will not be displayed. The label  
2–65  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
itself is not altered. The entire label can be returned as a query response  
regardless of what is displayed.  
Examples  
APPMENU:LABEL:BOTTOM3 "SETUP1"  
assigns the label “SETUP1” to the third main menu button.  
APPMenu:LABel:RIGHT<x>  
Defines a label for the side menu button that is specified by <x>. Side menu  
buttons are located on the right side of the display, and are numbered from 1 to 5  
starting with the top-most button.  
Group  
Syntax  
Application Menu  
APPMenu:LABel:RIGHT<x> <QString>  
APPMenu:LABel:RIGHT<x>?  
<Space>  
<QString>  
APPMenu  
:
LABel  
:
RIGHT  
<x>  
?
Arguments  
<QString> is the menu button label and can include any of the characters shown  
in the TDS Character Chart in Appendix A. The maximum length of the label is  
1000 characters. The label is displayed in the area to the left of the specified side  
menu button. Refer to the APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x> command on page  
2–65 for more information on defining menu labels.  
The label area is 72 pixels high and 112 pixels wide. The length of the label that  
fits in the label area depends on the contents of the label, because the width of  
characters varies. The label area is about 12 characters wide and 4 lines high. For  
a complete list of character widths in pixels, see Table A–1 on page A–1.  
Examples  
APPMENU:LABEL:RIGHT1 TEST ON"  
displays the label “TEST ON” next to the top side menu button.  
APPMenu:TITLe  
Sets or queries the user-defined application menu title. The title is displayed  
above the side menu.  
2–66  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Application Menu  
APPMenu, APPMenu:LABel  
APPMenu:TITLe <QString>  
APPMenu:TITLe?  
<Space>  
<QString>  
?
APPMenu  
:
TITLe  
Arguments  
<QString> is the side menu title and can include any of the characters shown in  
the TDS Character Chart in Appendix A. The maximum length of the title is  
1000 characters. The APPMenu:LABel:BOTTOM<x> command on page 2–65  
provides information on defining menu labels.  
The label area is 40 pixels high and 112 pixels wide. The length of the label that  
fits in the label area depends on the contents of the label, because the width of  
characters varies. The label area is about 12 characters wide and 4 lines high. For  
a complete list of character widths in pixels, see Table A–1 on page A–1.  
Examples  
APPMENU:TITLE "Custom Menu"  
displays the title “Custom Menu” on the screen.  
APPMENU:TITLE?  
might return "TestSetup" for the current application menu title.  
AUTOSet (No Query Form)  
Causes the digitizing oscilloscope to adjust its vertical, horizontal, and trigger  
controls to provide a stable display of the selected waveform. This is equivalent  
to pressing the front-panel AUTOSET button. For a detailed description of the  
autoset function, see Autoset in the Reference section of the User Manual for  
your instrument.  
This command will turn the extended-acquisition-length mode to off.  
Group  
Syntax  
Miscellaneous  
AUTOSetEXECute  
2–67  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
AUTOSet  
<space>  
EXECute  
Arguments  
EXECute autosets the displayed waveform.  
BELl (No Query Form)  
Beeps the audio indicator of the digitizing oscilloscope.  
Miscellaneous  
Group  
Syntax  
BELl  
BELl  
Examples  
BELL  
rings the bell.  
BUSY? (Query Only)  
Returns the status of the digitizing oscilloscope. This command allows you to  
synchronize the operation of the digitizing oscilloscope with your application  
program. Synchronization methods are described on page 3–7.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Status and error  
*OPC, *WAI  
BUSY?  
BUSY  
?
Returns  
<NR1> = 0 means that the digitizing oscilloscope is not busy processing a  
command whose execution time is extensive. These commands are listed in  
Table 2–27.  
<NR1> = 1 means that the digitizing oscilloscope is busy processing one of the  
commands listed in Table 2–27.  
2–68  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Table 2–27: Commands that Affect BUSY? Response  
Operation  
Command  
Single sequence acquisition  
ACQuire:STATE ON or  
ACQuire:STATE RUN  
(when ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to SEQuence)  
Hardcopy output  
HARDCopy STARt  
Examples  
BUSY?  
might return 1, indicating that the instrument is busy.  
*CAL? (Query Only)  
Instructs the digitizing oscilloscope to perform an internal self-calibration and  
return its calibration status.  
NOTE. The self-calibration can take several minutes to respond. No other  
commands will be executed until calibration is complete.  
Group  
Syntax  
Calibration and Diagnostic  
*CAL?  
*CAL  
?
Returns  
<NR1> = 0 indicates that the calibration completed without any errors detected.  
<NR1> ꢀ 0 indicates that the calibration did not complete successfully.  
Examples  
*CAL?  
performs an internal self-calibration and might return 0 to indicate that the  
calibration was successful.  
CH<x>? (Query Only)  
Returns the vertical parameters. Because CH<x>:SCAle and CH<x>:VOLts are  
identical, only CH<x>:SCAle is returned.  
2–69  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Vertical  
Syntax  
CH<x>?  
CH  
<x>  
?
Examples  
CH1?  
might return the string :CH1:SCALE 10.0E-3;POSITION 0.0E+0;  
OFFSET 0.0E+0;COUPLING DC;IMPEDANCE MEG;BANDWIDTH FULL for chan-  
nel 1.  
CH<x>:BANdwidth  
Sets or queries the bandwidth setting of the specified channel. This is equivalent  
to setting Bandwidth in the Vertical menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Vertical  
CH<x>:BANdwidth { TWEnty | HUNdred (TDS 400A, 510A) | TWOfifty  
(TDS 500C, 600B & 700C) | FULl }  
CH<x>:BANdwidth?  
TWEnty  
HUNdred  
<Space>  
TWOfifty  
FULl  
CH  
<X>  
:
BANdwidth  
?
Arguments  
TWEnty sets the channel bandwidth to 20 MHz.  
HUNdred sets the channel bandwidth to 100 MHz (TDS 400A, 510A).  
TWOfifty sets the channel bandwidth to 250 MHz (TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C).  
FULl sets the channel bandwidth to the full bandwidth of the digitizing oscillo-  
scope.  
Examples  
CH2:BANDWIDTH TWENTY  
sets the bandwidth of channel 2 to 20 MHz.  
2–70  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
CH1:BANDWIDTH?  
might return FULL, which indicates that there is no bandwidth limiting on  
channel 1.  
CH<x>:COUPling  
Sets or queries the input attenuator coupling setting of the specified channel.  
This is equivalent to setting Coupling in the Vertical menu.  
Group  
Vertical  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
CH<x>:IMPedance  
CH<x>:COUPling { AC | DC | GND }  
CH<x>:COUPling?  
AC  
<Space>  
DC  
GND  
CH  
<x>  
:
COUPling  
?
Arguments  
AC sets the specified channel to AC coupling.  
DC sets the specified channel to DC coupling.  
GND sets the specified channel to ground. Only a flat ground-level waveform will  
be displayed.  
Examples  
CH1:COUPLING AC  
establishes AC coupling on channel 1.  
CH3:COUPLING?  
might return DC, indicating that channel 3 is set to DC coupling.  
2–71  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
CH<x>:DESKew  
TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the deskew time for this channel. This is equivalent to setting  
Deskew in the Vertical menu and entering a value with the keypad or general  
purpose knob.  
Deskew allows you to compensate for time delay differences caused by signals  
coming in from cables of different length.  
When extended-acquisition-length mode is on, this command can still set and  
return values. However, this deskew feature will not actually work while  
extended-acquisition-length mode is on.  
Group  
Syntax  
Vertical  
CH<x>:DESKew <NR3>  
CH<x>:DESKew?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
CH  
<x>  
:
DESKew  
Arguments  
<NR3> is the deskew time for this channel. The range is –25.0 ns to +25.0 ns  
with a resolution of 1 ps. Out of range values are clipped.  
CH<x>:IMPedance  
Sets or queries the impedance setting at the specified input channel. This is  
equivalent to setting Impedance in the Ch<x> Coupling Impedance side menu.  
TDS 500C, 600B and 700C: When you attach an active 50 W probe to an input  
channel of the TDS 500C, 600B or 700C, the oscilloscope reduces the maximum  
vertical scale from 10 V to 1 V per division. For example, an active 10X probe  
would provide 10 V per division and a passive 10X probe would provide 100 V  
per division.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Vertical  
CH<x>:COUPling  
2–72  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
CH<x>:IMPedance {FIFty | MEG }  
CH<x>:IMPedance?  
FIFty  
<Space>  
MEG  
?
CH  
<X>  
:
IMPedance  
Arguments  
FIFty sets the specified channel to 50 W impedance.  
MEG sets the specified channel to 1 MW impedance.  
Examples  
CH1:IMPEDANCE FIFty  
establishes 50 W impedance on channel 1.  
CH3:IMPEDANCE?  
might return MEG, indicating that channel 3 is set to 1 MW impedance.  
CH<x>:OFFSet  
Sets or queries the offset, in volts, that is subtracted from the specified input  
channel before it is acquired. The greater the offset, the lower on the display the  
waveform appears. This is equivalent to setting Offset in the Vertical menu.  
Group  
Vertical  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
CH<x>:POSition  
CH<x>:OFFSet <NR3>  
CH<x>:OFFSet?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
CH  
<x>  
:
OFFSet  
Arguments  
<NR3> is the desired offset in volts. The range is dependent on the scale and the  
probe attenuation factor. The offset ranges are shown below.  
2–73  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Table 2–28: Offset Ranges for the TDS 400A, 510A, 540C, 600B, 754C, & 784C (All  
Channels) and the TDS 520C & 724C (Channel 1 & Channel 2) using a 1x  
Probe  
CH<x>:SCAle  
OFFSet Range  
±1 V  
1 mV/div – 99.5 mV/div  
100 mV/div – 995 mV/div  
1 V/div – 10 V/div  
±10 V  
±100 V  
Table 2–29: Offset Ranges for the TDS 520C & 724C (Aux 1 & Aux 2) using a 1x  
Probe  
CH<x>:SCAle  
OFFSet Range  
±.5 V  
50 mV/div & 100 mV/div  
500 mV/div & 1 V/div  
5 V/div & 10 V/div  
±5.0 V  
±50 V  
Examples  
CH1:OFFSET 0.5E+00  
lowers the channel 1 displayed waveform by 0.5 volts.  
CH1:OFFSET?  
might return 500.0E-3, indicating that the current channel 1 offset is 0.5 volts.  
CH<x>:POSition  
Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified channel. The position value  
is applied to the signal before digitization. This is equivalent to setting Position  
in the Vertical menu or adjusting the front-panel Vertical Position knob.  
Group  
Vertical  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
CH<x>:OFFSet  
CH<x>:POSition <NR3>  
CH<x>:POSition?  
2–74  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
CH  
<x>  
:
POSition  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the desired position, in divisions from the center graticule. The range is  
±5 divisions.  
CH2:POSITION 1.3E+00  
positions the channel 2 input signal 1.3 divisions above the center of the display.  
CH1:POSITION?  
might return -1.3E+00, indicating that the current position of channel 1 is at  
–1.3 divisions.  
CH<x>:PROBE? (Query Only)  
Returns the attenuation factor of the probe that is attached to the specified  
channel.  
Vertical  
CH<x>:PROBE?  
CH  
Group  
Syntax  
<x>  
:
PROBE  
?
Returns  
<NR3>  
Examples  
CH4:PROBE?  
might return 100.0E-3 for a 10x probe.  
CH<x>:PROBECal? (Query Only)  
TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C  
Queries the probe cal status for the selected channel.  
Group  
Syntax  
Vertical  
CH<x>:PROBECal?  
2–75  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
CH  
<x>  
:
PROBECal  
?
Outputs  
FAIl signifies that probe cal has failed for the selected channel.  
INIT signifies the probe cal has not yet been run for the selected channel  
PASS signifies that probe cal has passed for the selected channel.  
Examples  
CH2:PROBECAL?  
might return PASS indicating that probe cal has passed for channel 2.  
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten:  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Sets and queries the external attenuation for the specified channel to the specified  
value. This command deals with the attenuation factor rather than the gain factor.  
This is unlike the CH<x>:PROBE? command.  
Group  
Syntax  
Vertical  
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten:<NR3>  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
:
CH  
<x>  
:
PROBEFunc  
EXTAtten  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the attenuation value specified as a multiplier in the range 1.00E–6 to  
1.00E+6. The default is 1.00.  
CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN 15.00E+0  
sets the external attenuation to 15X.  
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten:  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Sets and queries the external attenuation for the specified channel to the specified  
value in dB. Note that 1X = 0 dB, 10X = 20 dB, 100X = 40 dB, etc.  
Group  
Vertical  
2–76  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten:<NR3>  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
:
CH  
<x>  
:
PROBEFunc  
EXTDBatten  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the attenuation value specified in the range –120.00 dB to 120.00 dB.  
The default is 0.00 dB.  
CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTDB 2.5  
sets the external attenuation to 2.5 dB.  
CH<x>:SCAle  
Sets or queries the vertical gain of the specified channel. This is equivalent to  
setting Fine Scale in the Vertical menu or adjusting the front-panel Vertical  
SCALE knob.  
Group  
Vertical  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
CH1:VOLts  
CH<x>:SCAle <NR3>  
CH<x>:SCAle?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
CH  
<x>  
:
SCAle  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the gain, in volts per division. The range is 100 mV per division to  
1 mV per division when using a 1x probe.  
CH4:SCALE 100E-03  
sets the channel 4 gain to 100 mV per division.  
CH2:SCALE?  
might return 1.00E+0, indicating that the current V per division setting of  
channel 2 is 1 V per division.  
2–77  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
CH<x>:VOLts  
Sets or queries the vertical gain of the specified channel. This command is  
identical to the CH<x>:SCAle command and is included for compatibility  
purposes. Only CH<x>:SCAle is returned in response to a CH<x>? query.  
Group  
Vertical  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
CH1:SCAle  
CH<x>:VOLts<NR3>  
CH<x>:VOLts?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
CH  
<x>  
:
VOLts  
Examples  
CH4:VOLTS 100E-03  
sets the channel 4 gain to 100 mV per division.  
CH2:VOLTS?  
might return 1.00E+0, indicating that the current V per division setting of  
channel 2 is 1 V per division.  
CLEARMenu (No Query Form)  
Clears the current menu from the display. This command is equivalent to  
pressing the CLEAR MENU button on the front panel.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
CLEARMenu  
CLEARMenu  
Examples  
CLEARMENU  
clears the menu from the display.  
2–78  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
*CLS (No Query Form)  
Clears the digitizing oscilloscope status data structures.  
Status and Error  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?  
*CLS  
*CLS  
The *CLS command clears the following:  
H
H
H
the Event Queue  
the Standard Event Status Register (SESR)  
the Status Byte Register (except the MAV bit; see below)  
If the *CLS command immediately follows an <EOI>, the Output Queue and  
MAV bit (Status Byte Register bit 4) are also cleared. MAV indicates informa-  
tion is in the output queue. The device clear (DCL) GPIB control message will  
clear the output queue and thus MAV. *CLS does not clear the output queue or  
MAV. (A complete discussion of these registers and bits, and of event handling  
in general, begins on page 3–1.)  
*CLS can suppress a Service Request that is to be generated by an *OPC. This  
will happen if a hardcopy output or single sequence acquisition operation is still  
being processed when the *CLS command is executed.  
CURSor? (Query Only)  
Returns all current cursor settings.  
Group  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor?  
CURSor  
?
2–79  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
CURSOR?  
might return :CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF;VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;  
POSITION1 500.0E-6;POSITION2 4.50E-3;SELECT CURSOR1;  
:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 3.20E+0;POSITION2 -3.20E+0;  
SELECT CURSOR1 as the current cursor settings.  
CURSor:FUNCtion  
Selects and displays the cursor type. Cursors are attached to the selected  
waveform. This command is equivalent to setting Function in the Cursor menu.  
Group  
Cursor  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
SELect:CONTROl  
CURSor:FUNCtion { HBArs | OFF | VBArs | PAIred }  
CURSor:FUNCtion?  
HBArs  
OFF  
<Space>  
VBArs  
PAIred  
CURSor  
:
FUNCtion  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
HBArs specifies horizontal bar cursors that measure volts.  
OFF removes the cursors from the display.  
VBArs specifies vertical bar cursors that measure time.  
PAIred specifies paired cursors that measure both time and volts.  
CURSOR:FUNCtion VBARS  
selects vertical bar type cursors.  
CURSor:HBArs? (Query Only)  
Returns the current settings for the horizontal bar cursors.  
2–80  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor:HBArs?  
CURSor  
:
HBArs  
?
Examples  
CURSOR:HBARS?  
might return :CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 0;POSITION2 0;SELECT CURSOR1.  
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)  
Returns the voltage difference between the two horizontal bar cursors.  
Group  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?  
CURSor  
:
HBArs  
:
DELTa  
?
Returns  
<NR3>  
Examples  
CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA?  
might return 5.08E+0 for the voltage difference between the two cursors.  
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>  
Positions a horizontal bar cursor.  
Group  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x> <NR3>  
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
CURSor  
:
HBArs  
:
POSITION  
<x>  
2–81  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> specifies the cursor position relative to ground, in volts.  
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 25.0E-3  
positions one of the horizontal cursors at 25.0 mV.  
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2?  
might return -64.0E-3, indicating that one of the horizontal bar cursors is at  
–64.0 mV.  
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt  
TDS 400A Only  
Sets or queries the position of the horizontal bar cursors (x is either 1 or 2) in  
units of % of vertical range.  
Group  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt <NR3>  
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt?  
CURSor  
:
HBArs  
:
POSITION  
<x>  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
Pcnt  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> has a range of 0 to 100 (%). It specifies the cursor position relative to the  
vertical range of the selected waveform.  
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1PCNT?  
might return 4.50 E+1, indicating cursor 1 is positioned at 45% of the vertical  
range of the selected waveform.  
2–82  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
CURSor:HBArs:SELect  
Selects which horizontal bar cursor is active for front-panel control. The active  
cursor will be displayed as a solid horizontal line and can be moved using the  
front-panel general purpose knob when the cursor menu is active. The unselected  
cursor will be displayed as a dashed horizontal line. This command is equivalent  
to pressing the SELECT button on the front panel when the Cursor menu is  
displayed.  
Group  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor:HBArs:SELect { CURSOR1 | CURSOR2 }  
CURSor:HBArs:SELect?  
CURSOR1  
<Space>  
CURSOR2  
:
:
CURSor  
HBArs  
SELect  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
CURSOR1 selects the first horizontal bar cursor.  
CURSOR2 selects the second horizontal bar cursor.  
CURSOR:HBARS:SELECT CURSOR1  
selects the first horizontal bar cursor as the active cursor.  
CURSOR:HBARS:SELECT?  
returns CURSOR1 when the first cursor is the active cursor.  
CURSor:HBArs:UNITS  
Sets or queries the units for the horizontal bar cursors. This command is  
equivalent to setting Amplitude in the Cursor menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts { BASe | IRE }  
CURSor:HBArs:UNITS?  
2–83  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
BASe  
IRE  
<Space>  
CURSor  
:
HBArs  
:
UNIts  
?
Arguments  
BASe specifies base as the unit of measure.  
IRE specifies IRE as the unit of measure. These units are typically used with  
video signals.  
Examples  
CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS BASE  
sets the units for the horizontal bar cursors to base.  
CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS?  
returns IRE when the horizontal bar cursor units are IRE.  
CURSor:MODe  
Selects whether the two cursors move together in unison or separately.  
Group  
Cursor  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
CURSor:FUNCtion  
CURSor:MODe { TRACk |INDependent }  
CURSor:MODe?  
TRACk  
<Space>  
INDependent  
CURSor  
:
MODe  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
TRACk ties the two cursors together as you move the general purpose knob.  
INDependent frees the two cursors to move separately.  
CURSOR:MODE TRACK  
specifies that the cursors positions move in unison.  
2–84  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
CURSOR:MODE?  
might return :TRACK showing the two cursors move in unison.  
CURSor:PAIred  
Positions the paired cursors. Also, returns the current paired cursor settings.  
In extended-acquisition-length mode, the cursors are limited to the waveform  
record section of the acquisition data (see Figure 2–4 on page 2–41).  
Group  
Cursor  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP  
CURSor:PAIred SNAp  
CURSor:PAIred?  
<Space>  
SNAp  
?
CURSor  
:
PAIred  
Arguments  
Examples  
SNAp positions the paired cursors at DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP.  
CURSOR:PAIRED SNAP  
specifies the positions of the cursors are at the current DATA:START and  
DATA:STOP values.  
CURSOR:PAIRED?  
might return :CURSOR:PAIRED:UNITS BASE;POSITION1 -2.00E-3;POSITION2  
2.00E-3;SELECT CURSOR2.  
CURSor:PAIred:HDELTA (Query Only)  
Queries the hbar (voltage) distance between the first and second paired cursor.  
This is the absolute value of the vertical position of the first cursor minus the  
vertical position of the second cursor.  
Group  
Cursor  
Related Commands  
CURSor:FUNCtion  
2–85  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
CURSor:PAIred:HDELTA?  
CURSor  
:
PAIred  
:
?
HDELTA  
Examples  
CURSOR:PAIRED:HDELTA?  
might return 5.08E+0 for the voltage difference between the two cursors.  
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS1 (Query Only)  
Queries the horizontal bar (voltage) position of the first paired cursor.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor:FUNCtion  
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS1?  
CURSor  
:
PAIred  
:
?
HPOS1  
Examples  
CURSOR:PAIRED:HPOS1?  
might return -64.0E-3, indicating that the first cursor is at –64.0 mV.  
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS2 (Query Only)  
Queries the horizontal bar (voltage) position of the second paired cursor.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor:FUNCtion  
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS2?  
CURSor  
:
PAIred  
:
?
HPOS2  
Examples  
CURSOR:PAIRED:HPOS2?  
might return -64.0E-3, indicating the second cursor is at –64.0 mV.  
2–86  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>  
Sets or queries the vertical bar (time) position of the first or second paired cursor.  
x is either 1 or 2 and refers to the first or second cursor.  
The CURSor:VBArs:UNITS command specifies the units for these cursors.  
In extended-acquisition-length mode, the paired cursor position must be within  
the waveform record (as opposed to the entire extended acquisition length) for  
any change to happen.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor:FUNCtion, CURSor:VBArs:UNITS  
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION <NR3>  
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
CURSor  
:
PAIred  
:
POSITION  
<x>  
Arguments  
<NR3> specifies the cursor position in the units specified by the  
CURSor:VBArs:UNITS command.  
The position can appear in units of seconds, 1/seconds (hertz), or video line  
numbers (with option 05). On the TDS 400A, position can also appear in units of  
clocks or 1/clocks.  
Examples  
CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION1 9.00E-6  
specifies the first paired cursor is at 9 ms.  
CURSOR:POSITION2?  
might return 1.00E-6, indicating that the second paired cursor is at 1 ms.  
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>Pcnt  
TDS 400A Only  
Sets or queries the horizontal position of the paired cursors (x is either 1 or 2) in  
units of % of record length.  
2–87  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>Pcnt <NR3>  
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>Pcnt?  
CURSor  
:
PAIred  
:
POSITION  
<x>  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
Pcnt  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> has a range of 0 to 100 (%). It specifies the cursor position relative to the  
record length of the selected waveform.  
CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION1PCNT?  
might return 4.50 E+1, indicating cursor 1 is positioned at 45% of the record  
length of the selected waveform.  
CURSor:PAIred:SELect  
Selects the active paired cursor. The active cursor appears as a solid vertical line.  
The unselected cursor appears as a dashed vertical line. This command is  
equivalent to pressing the SELECT button on the front panel when the Cursor  
menu is displayed.  
Group  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor:PAIred:SELect { CURSOR1 | CURSOR2 }  
CURSor:PAIred:SELect?  
CURSOR1  
<Space>  
CURSOR2  
CURSor  
:
PAIred  
:
SELect  
?
Arguments  
CURSOR1 specifies the first paired cursor.  
CURSOR2 specifies the second paired cursor.  
2–88  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
CURSOR:PAIRED:SELECT CURSOR2  
selects the second paired cursor as the active cursor.  
CURSOR:PAIRED:SELECT?  
returns CURSOR1 when the first paired cursor is the active cursor.  
CURSor:PAIred:UNITS  
Sets or queries the units for the paired cursors. This is equivalent to setting  
Amplitude in the Cursor menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor:PAIred:UNITS { BASe | IRE }  
CURSor:PAIred:UNITS?  
BASe  
<Space>  
IRE  
CURSor  
:
PAIred  
:
UNITS  
?
Arguments  
BASe specifies base as the unit of measure.  
IRE specifies IRE as the unit of measure. These units are typically used with  
video signals.  
Examples  
CURSOR:PAIRED:UNITS BASE  
sets the units for the paired cursors to base.  
CURSOR:PAIRED:UNITS?  
returns IRE when the paired cursor units are IRE.  
CURSor:PAIred:VDELTA (Query Only)  
Queries the vbar (time) distance between paired cursors. It returns the absolute  
value of the first cursor less the second cursor horizontal positions.  
The position can appear in units of seconds, 1/seconds (hertz), or video line  
numbers (with option 05). On the TDS 400A, position can also appear in units of  
clocks or 1/clocks.  
2–89  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Cursor  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
CURSor:FUNCtion  
CURSor:PAIred:VDELTA?  
CURSor  
:
PAIred  
:
?
VDELTA  
Examples  
CURSOR:PAIRED:VDELTA?  
might return 1.064E+00, indicating that the time between the paired cursors is  
1.064 seconds.  
CURSor:VBArs  
Positions the vertical bar cursors and the CURSor:VBArs? query returns the  
current vertical bar cursor settings for horizontal position, delta, cursor selection,  
and units.  
The position can appear in units of seconds, 1/seconds (hertz), or video line  
numbers (with option 05). On the TDS 400A, position can also appear in units of  
clocks or 1/clocks.  
In extended-acquisition-length mode, the cursors are limited to the waveform  
record section of the acquisition data (see Figure 2–4 on page 2–41).  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Cursor  
DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, MEASUrement:GATing  
CURSor:VBArs SNAp  
CURSor:VBArs?  
<Space>  
SNAp  
?
CURSor  
:
VBArs  
Arguments  
SNAp positions the vertical bar cursors at DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP.  
2–90  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
CURSOR:VBARS SNAP  
specifies that the cursors positions are the same as the current DATA:START and  
DATA:STOP values.  
CURSOR:VBARS?  
might return :CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 1.00E-6;POSIĆ  
TION2 9.00E-6;SELECT CURSOR2.  
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? (Query Only)  
Returns the time or frequency between the two vertical bar cursors. The units,  
seconds or Hertz, are specified by the CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command.  
The position can appear in units of seconds, 1/seconds (hertz), or video line  
numbers (with option 05). On the TDS 400A, position can also appear in units of  
clocks or 1/clocks.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts  
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?  
CURSor  
:
VBArs  
:
DELTa  
?
Returns  
<NR3>  
Examples  
CURSOR:VBARS:DELTa?  
might return 1.064E+00, indicating that the time between the vertical bar cursors  
is 1.064 seconds.  
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>  
Positions a vertical bar cursor for both vertical bar and paired cursors. The  
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command specifies units.  
The position can appear in units of seconds, 1/seconds (hertz), or video line  
numbers (with option 05). On the TDS 400A, position can also appear in units of  
clocks or 1/clocks.  
2–91  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
In extended-acquisition-length mode, the cursors are limited to the waveform  
record section of the acquisition data (see Figure 2–4 on page 2–41).  
Group  
Cursor  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts  
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> <NR3>  
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
CURSor  
:
VBArs  
:
POSITION  
<x>  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> specifies the cursor position in the units specified by the CUR-  
Sor:VBArs:UNIts command. The position is relative to the trigger position.  
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION2 9.00E-6  
positions one of the vertical bar cursors at 9 ms.  
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION1?  
might return 1.00E-6, indicating a vertical bar cursors is at 1 ms.  
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt  
TDS 400A Only  
Sets or queries the position of the vertical bar cursors (x is either 1 or 2) in units  
of % of record length.  
Group  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt <NR3>  
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>Pcnt?  
2–92  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
CURSor  
:
VBArs  
:
POSITION  
<x>  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
Pcnt  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> has a range of 0 to 100 (%). It specifies the cursor position relative to the  
record length of the selected waveform.  
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION1PCNT?  
might return 4.50 E+1, indicating cursor 1 is positioned at 45% of the record  
length of the selected waveform.  
CURSor:VBArs:SELect  
Selects which vertical bar cursor is active. The active cursor will be displayed as  
a solid vertical line and can be moved using the front-panel general purpose knob  
when the cursor menu is active. The unselected cursor will be displayed as a  
dashed vertical line. This command is equivalent to pressing the SELECT  
button on the front panel when the Cursor menu is displayed.  
Group  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor:VBArs:SELect { CURSOR1 | CURSOR2 }  
CURSor:VBArs:SELect?  
CURSOR1  
<Space>  
CURSOR2  
CURSor  
:
VBArs  
:
SELect  
?
Arguments  
CURSOR1 specifies the first vertical bar cursor.  
CURSOR2 specifies the second vertical bar cursor.  
Examples  
CURSOR:VBARS:SELECT CURSOR2  
selects the second vertical bar cursor as the active cursor.  
CURSOR:VBARS:SELECT?  
returns CURSOR1 when the first vertical bar cursor is the active cursor.  
2–93  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
CURSor:VBArs:UNITS  
Sets or queries the units for the vertical bar cursors. This command is equivalent  
to setting Time Units (Horiz Units in the TDS 400A) in the Cursor menu.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?, CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>  
CURSor:VBArs:UNITS { SECOnds | HERtz | LINE (with option 05)  
| BASe (TDS 400A only) | INVert (TDS 400A only)}  
CURSor:VBArs:UNITS?  
For the TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C:  
SECOnds  
HERtz  
<Space>  
LINE  
CURSor  
:
VBArs  
:
UNITS  
?
For the TDS 400A:  
BASe  
INVert  
SECOnds  
HERtz  
LINE  
<Space>  
CURSor  
:
VBArs  
:
UNITS  
?
Arguments  
SEConds specifies seconds as the unit of measure. For the TDS 400A, this  
argument is available only for backward compatibility. If a TDS 400A receives  
this argument, it will convert it to BASE or INVERT depending on the selected  
waveform. The TDS 400A will not output this argument in response to a query.  
HERtz specifies hertz as the unit of measure. For the TDS 400A, this argument is  
available only for backward compatibility. If a TDS 400A receives this argu-  
2–94  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ment, it will convert it to BASE or INVERT depending on the selected wave-  
form. The TDS 400A will not output this argument in response to a query.  
LINE specifies a video line as the unit of measure. This is most useful if you  
have option 05 video trigger installed. On some models, if you do not have  
option 05, use of this argument will generate an error message. On the TDS  
400A, if you do not have option 05, the TDS 400A will use the NTSC standard  
for converting from time to lines. In order for the measurement to be accurate in  
the TDS 400A when TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SYSTEM is set to custom, you  
must set TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SCANPERIOD.  
BASe (TDS 400A only) specifies the base (or natural) units of the waveform as  
the unit of measurement. If internal clock is enabled, the base units are seconds.  
If external clock is enabled, the base units are clocks.  
INVert (TDS 400A only) specifies 1/ base (or natural) units of the waveform as  
the unit of measurement. If internal clock is enabled, the base units are 1/seconds  
(hertz). If external clock is enabled, the base units are 1/clocks.  
Examples  
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS  
sets the units for the vertical bar cursors to seconds.  
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS?  
returns HERTZ when the vertical bar cursor units are hertz.  
CURSor:VBArs:UNITSTring? (Query Only)  
TDS 400A Only  
Queries the unit string as shown on screen for the vertical bar cursor readout.  
Group  
Syntax  
Cursor  
CURSor:VBArs:UNITSTring?  
CURSor  
:
VBArs  
:
UNITSTring  
?
Examples  
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITSTRING?  
might return "ms", indicating the units are milliseconds.  
2–95  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
CURVe  
Transfers waveform data to and from the digitizing oscilloscope in binary or  
ASCII format. Each waveform that is transferred has an associated waveform  
preamble which contains information such as data format and scale. Refer to the  
WFMPre command starting on page 2–345 for information about the waveform  
preamble. The data format is specified by the DATa:ENCdg and DATa:WIDTH  
commands.  
In extended-acquisition-length mode, the query form of this command can  
transfer acquisition record (as opposed to waveform) data from the oscilloscope  
in binary or ASCII format. Of course, to do this, you must specify a valid  
channel with the DATa:SOUrce command.  
The CURVe? query transfers data from the instrument. The data source is  
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. If more than one source is specified, a  
comma separated list of data blocks is returned. The first and last data points that  
are transferred are specified by the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.  
The CURVe command transfers waveform data to the instrument. The data is  
stored in the reference memory location specified by DATa:DESTination starting  
with the data point specified by DATa:STARt. Only one waveform can be  
transferred at a time. The waveform will only be displayed if the reference is  
displayed.  
A description of the waveform transfer process starts on page 2–38.  
Group  
Waveform  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
DATa, WFMPre  
CURVe { <Block> | <asc curve> }  
CURVe?  
<Block>  
<Space>  
<asc curve>  
CURVe  
?
Arguments  
<Block> is the waveform data in binary format. The waveform is formatted as:  
#<x><yyy><data><newline> where <x> is the number of y bytes. For example,  
if <yyy> = 500, then <x> = 3. <yyy> is the number of bytes to transfer. If width  
is 1 then all bytes on the bus are single data points. If width is 2 then all bytes on  
the bus are 2-byte pairs. Use the DATa:WIDth command to set the width. <data>  
2–96  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
is the curve data. <newline> is a single byte newline character at the end of the  
data. See the GETWFM.C or GETWFM.BAS examples in the accompanying disk for  
more specifics.  
<asc curve> is the waveform data in ASCII format. The format for ASCII data  
is <NR1>[,<NR1>...] where each <NR1> represents a data point.  
Examples  
CURVE?  
might return, for ASCII data: CURVE  
0,0,0,0,-1,1,0,-1,0,0,-1,0,0,-1,0,-1,  
-1,1,0,0,0,-1,0,0,-1,0,1,1,0,-1,0,0,-1,0,0,-1,0,0  
DATa  
Sets or queries the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred  
with the CURVe command. Since DATa:DESTination and DATa:TARget are  
equivalent, only DATa:DESTination is returned by the DATa? query.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Waveform  
CURVE, WAVFrm  
DATa { INIT | SNAp | RECORDSNAp (TDS 500C & 700C) }  
DATa?  
INIT  
SNAp  
<Space>  
RECORDSNAp  
DATa  
?
Arguments  
INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults.  
SNAp sets DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP to match the current vertical bar cursor  
positions.  
RECORDSNAp sets DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP for the first and last points of  
the selected channel’s waveform/extended acquisition. When extended acquisi-  
tion length (2M, 4M, and 8M) mode is on and the selected channel is a live  
2–97  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
channel, this is how to set up to get a waveform’s data over GPIB. It also works  
when extended acquisition length mode is off.  
Examples  
DATA SNAP  
assigns the current position of the vertical bar cursors to DATA:START and  
DATA:STOP.  
DATA?  
might return the string :DATA:ENCDG RPBINARY;DESTINATION REF4; SOURCE  
REF4;START 1;STOP 500;WIDTH 2  
2–98  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
DATa:DESTination  
Sets or queries the reference memory location for storing waveform data that is  
transferred into the digitizing oscilloscope by the CURVe command. This  
command is identical to the DATa:TARget command.  
Group  
Syntax  
Waveform  
DATa:DESTination REF<x>  
DATa:DESTination?  
<Space>  
REF  
<x>  
?
DATa  
:
DESTination  
Arguments  
Examples  
REF<x> (REF1, REF2, REF3 or REF4) is the reference memory location where the  
waveform will be stored.  
This means that you cannot have a channel as a destination. This is true even for  
extended-acquisition-length mode.  
DATA:DESTINATION REF3  
stores incoming waveform data in reference memory 3.  
DATA:DESTINATION?  
might return REF2 as the reference memory location that is currently selected.  
DATa:ENCdg  
Sets or queries the format of the waveform data. This command is equivalent to  
setting WFMPre:ENCdg, WFMPre:BN_Fmt, and WFMPre:BYT_Or as shown  
in Table 2–30. Setting the DATa:ENCdg value causes the corresponding  
WFMPre values to be updated and vice versa.  
Group  
Waveform  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
WFMPre:ENCdg, WFMPre:BN.FMT, WFMPre:BYT_Or  
DATa:ENCdg { ASCIi | RIBinary | RPBinary | SRIbinary | SRPbinary}  
DATa:ENCdg?  
2–99  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ASCIi  
RIBinary  
RPBinary  
SRIbinary  
SRPbinary  
<Space>  
DATa  
:
ENCdg  
?
Arguments  
ASCIi specifies the ASCII representation of signed integer (RIBinary) data. If  
this is the value at power-on, the WFMPre values for BN_Fmt, BYT_Or, and  
ENCdg are set as RP, MSB, and ASC respectively.  
RIBinary specifies signed integer data-point representation with the most  
significant byte transferred first. This format results in the fastest data transfer  
rate when DATa:WIDth is set to 2.  
The range is –128 to 127 when DATa:WIDth is 1. Zero is center screen. The  
range is –32768 to 32767 when DATa:WIDth is 2. The upper limit is one  
division above the top of the screen and the lower limit is one division below the  
bottom of the screen.  
RPBinary specifies positive integer data-point representation with the most  
significant byte transferred first.  
The range is 0 to 255 when DATa:WIDth is 1. Center screen is 127. The range is  
0 to 65,535 when DATa:WIDth is 2. The upper limit is one division above the  
top of the screen and the lower limit is one division below the bottom of the  
screen.  
SRIbinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped,  
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful  
when transferring data to IBM compatible PCs.  
SRPbinary is the same as RPBinary except that the byte order is swapped,  
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format is useful  
when transferring data to IBM compatible PCs.  
2–100  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Table 2–30: DATa and WFMPre Parameter Settings  
WFMPre Settings  
DATa:ENCdg Setting  
ASCIi  
:ENCdg  
ASC  
:BN_Fmt  
:BYT_Or  
N/A  
N/A  
RIBinary  
BIN  
RI  
RP  
RI  
RP  
MSB  
MSB  
LSB  
LSB  
RPBinary  
BIN  
SRIbinary  
SRIbinary  
BIN  
BIN  
Examples  
DATA:ENCDG RPBINARY  
sets the data encoding format to be positive integer where the most significant  
byte is transferred first.  
DATA:ENCDG?  
might return SRPBINARY for the format of the waveform data.  
DATa:SOUrce  
Sets or queries the location of the waveform data that is transferred from the  
instrument by the CURVe? query. The source data is always transferred in a  
predefined order regardless of the order they are specified using this command.  
The predefined order is CH1 through CH4, MATH1 through MATH3, and then  
REF1 through REF4.  
In extended-acquisition-length mode, the MATH1 through MATH3 sources can  
not be used. Also, in this mode, CH1 through CH4 refer to extended-acquisition-  
length data. In contrast, when not in extended-acquisition-length mode, CH1  
through CH4 refer only to the waveform record. For more details, see page 2–41.  
Group  
Syntax  
Waveform  
DATa:SOUrce <wfm>[<Comma><wfm>]...  
DATa:SOUrce?  
2–101  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
<Space>  
<wfm>  
?
<Comma>  
<wfm>  
DATa  
:
SOUrce  
Arguments  
<wfm> is the location of the waveform data that will be transferred from the  
digitizing oscilloscope to the controller.  
Examples  
DATA:SOURCE REF2, CH2, MATH1, CH1  
specifies that four waveforms will be transferred in the next CURVE? query. The  
order that the data will be transferred is CH1, CH2, MATH1, and then REF2.  
DATA:SOURCE?  
might return REF3, indicating the source for the waveform data that is transferred  
using a CURVE? query.  
DATa:STARt  
Sets or queries the starting data point for waveform transfer. This command  
allows for the transfer of partial waveforms to and from the oscilloscope.  
Group  
Waveform  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
CURVe?, DATa SNAp, DATa:STOP  
DATa:STARt <NR1>  
DATa:STARt?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
DATa  
:
STARt  
?
Arguments  
<NR1> ranges from 1 to the record length, and is the first data point that will be  
transferred. Data will be transferred from <NR1> to DATa:STOP or the record  
length, whichever is less. If <NR1> is greater than the record length then no data  
will be transferred.  
When DATa:STOP is less than DATa:STARt, the stop value will equal  
DATa:STARt + (DATA:STARt – DATa:STOP). For example, if DATa:STARt =  
30 and DATaSTOP = 20, then the range of data points for the waveform transfer  
will equal 30 through 40.  
2–102  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
In extended-acquisition-length mode, <NR1> ranges up to the extended  
acquisition length as opposed to the waveform record length.  
Examples  
DATA:START 10  
specifies that the waveform transfer will begin with data point 10.  
DATA:START?  
might return 214 as the first waveform data point that will be transferred.  
DATa:STOP  
Sets or queries the last data point that will be transferred when using the  
CURVe? query. This allows the transfer of partial waveforms to the controller.  
When using the CURVe command, the digitizing oscilloscope will stop reading  
data when there is no more data to read or when the specified record length has  
been reached so this command will be ignored.  
Group  
Waveform  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
CURVe?, DATa SNAp  
DATa:STOP <NR1>  
DATa:STOP?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
DATa  
:
STOP  
?
Arguments  
<NR1> ranges from 1 to the record length, and is the last data point that will be  
transferred. If <NR1> is greater than the record length then data will be transferred  
up to the record length. If both DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are greater than  
the record length, an execution error will be executed.  
If you always want to transfer complete waveforms, just set DATa:STARt to 1  
and DATa:STOP to the maximum record length.  
When DATa:STOP is less than DATa:STARt, the stop value will equal  
DATa:STARt + (DATA:STARt – DATa:STOP). For example, if DATa:STARt =  
30 and DATaSTOP = 20, then the range of data points for the waveform transfer  
will equal 30 through 40.  
2–103  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
In extended-acquisition-length mode, <NR1> ranges up to the extended  
acquisition length as opposed to the waveform record length.  
Examples  
DATA:STOP 15000  
specifies that the waveform transfer will stop at data point 15000.  
DATA:STOP?  
might return 14900 as the last data point that will be transferred.  
DATa:TARget  
Sets or queries the location for storing waveform data transferred to the  
instrument using the CURVe command. This command is equivalent to the  
DATa:DESTINATION command and is included for compatibility with older  
Tektronix instruments.  
Group  
Waveform  
CURVe  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
DATa:TARget REF<x>  
DATa:TARget?  
<Space>  
REF  
<x>  
?
DATa  
:
TARget  
DATa:WIDth  
Sets the number of bytes per data point in the waveform transferred using the  
CURVe command.  
Group  
Waveform  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
CURVe, WFMPre:BIT_Nr, WFMPre:BYT_Nr  
DATa:WIDth <NR1>  
DATa:WIDth?  
2–104  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
DATa  
:
WIDth  
Arguments  
<NR1> = 1 specifies that there is 1 byte (8 bits) per point. This format is useful  
when the acquisition mode is set to SAMple, ENVelope, or PEAKdetect (one  
byte per point). If used for AVErage or HIRes (two bytes per point), the low  
order byte is not transmitted.  
<NR1> = 2 specifies that there are 2 bytes (16 bits) per point. This format is  
useful for AVErage and HIRes (two bytes per point) waveforms. If used for  
ENVelope, PEAKdetect, or SAMple (one byte per point), the least significant  
byte is always zero.  
Examples  
DATA:WIDth 1  
sets the data width to 1 byte per data point for CURVe data.  
DATE  
Sets or queries the date that the digitizing oscilloscope can display.  
Miscellaneous  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
DISplay: CLOCk, TIMe  
DATE <QString>  
DATE?  
<Space>  
<QString>  
?
DATE  
Arguments  
Examples  
<QString> is a date in the form yyyy-mm-dd".  
mm refers to a two-digit month number from 01 to 12.  
dd refers to a two-digit day number in the month.  
yyyy refers to a four-digit year number.  
There must a dash (–) after the yyyy and after the mm.  
DATE "1993-01-24"  
specifies that the date is set to January 24th, 1993.  
2–105  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
*DDT  
Allows the user to specify a command or a list of commands that are executed  
when the instrument receives a *TRG command or the GET GPIB interface  
message. *DDT is just a special alias that *TRG uses.  
Group  
Miscellaneous  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
ALIAS:DEFINE, *TRG  
*DDT { <Block> | <QString> }  
*DDT?  
<Block>  
<Space>  
<QString>  
*DDT  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<Block> or <QString> is a complete sequence of program messages. The  
messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by semico-  
lons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands (see page 2–4). The  
sequence must be ≤80 characters. <Block> format is always returned as a query  
response.  
*DDT #0ACQUIRE:STATE RUN;BELL<EOI>  
specifies that the acquisition system will be started and the bell rings each time a  
*TRG command is sent.  
DELEte:SETUp (No Query Form)  
Removes stored setups from memory and initializes the location with the factory  
default setup.  
NOTE. The setup information cannot be recovered once it has been deleted.  
Group  
Save and Recall  
2–106  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
*RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp, TEKSecure  
DELEte:SETUp {<NR1> | ALL }  
<NR1>  
ALL  
DELEte  
:
SETUp  
<Space>  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> is a value in the range 1 to 10, and specifies a setup storage location.  
Using an out-of-range value causes an execution error.  
ALL specifies all the stored setups.  
DELETE:SETUP ALL  
removes all stored setups. All ten storage locations are initialized to the factory  
default setup.  
DELEte:WAVEform (No Query Form)  
Deletes one or all of the stored reference waveforms from memory. The memory  
allocated for the reference location is then available for reallocation. Memory  
must be reallocated for the deleted references before any waveform data can be  
stored in the reference location.  
NOTE. The waveform data is not actually cleared from the reference location.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Save and Recall  
RECAll:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform, TEKSecure  
DELEte:WAVEform {REF<x> | ALL }  
<x>  
REF  
ALL  
DELEte  
:
WAVEform  
<Space>  
Arguments  
REF<x> (REF1, REF2, REF3 or REF4) specifies one of the reference memory  
locations.  
ALL specifies all the stored waveforms.  
2–107  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
DELETE:WAVEFORM ALL  
removes all the waveforms stored in reference memory.  
DELETE:WAVEFORM REF2  
removes the waveform stored at REF2.  
DESE  
Sets and queries the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER).  
The DESER is the mask that determines whether events are reported to the  
Standard Event Status Register (SESR), and entered into the Event Queue. For a  
more detailed discussion of the use of these registers, see page 3–1.  
Group  
Status and Error  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
*CLS, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?  
DESE <NR1>  
DESE?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
DESE  
Arguments  
<NR1> is a value in the range from 0 to 255. The binary bits of the DESER are  
set according to this value. For example, DESE 209 sets the DESER to the binary  
value 11010001 (that is, the most significant bit in the register is set to 1, the  
next most significant bit to 1, the next bit to 0, etc.).  
The power-on default for DESER is all bits set if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the  
DESER maintains its value through a power cycle.  
NOTE. Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same value allows only those  
codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5)  
of the Status Byte Register. Use the *ESE command to set the ESER. A discussion  
of event handling begins on page 3–1.  
Examples  
DESE 209  
sets the DESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ, EXE, and  
OPC bits.  
2–108  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
DESE?  
might return the string :DESE 186, showing that the DESER contains the binary  
value 10111010.  
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg? (Query Only)  
Returns the pass/fail status from the last diagnostic test sequence execution. The  
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? query can be used to determine which test(s) has failed.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Calibration and Diagnostic  
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?  
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?  
DIAg  
:
:
RESUlt  
FLAg  
?
Returns  
PASS indicating that all of the selected diagnostic tests have passed.  
FAIl indicating that at least one of the selected diagnostic tests has failed.  
Examples  
DIAG:RESULT:FLAG?  
returns either PASS or FAIl.  
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? (Query Only)  
Returns the internal results log from the last diagnostic test sequence execution.  
The list contains all modules and module interfaces that were tested along with  
the pass/fail status of each.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Calibration and Diagnostic  
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg?  
DIAg:RESUlt:LOG?  
2–109  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
DIAg  
:
:
RESUlt  
LOG  
?
Returns  
<QString> in the following format:  
<Status>,<Modulename>[,<Status>,<Modulename>...]  
Examples  
DIAG:RESULT:LOG?  
might return :DIAG:RESULT:LOG "pass--Processor,pass--Display,  
pass--FP/Proc Interface,FAIL--Front Panel"  
DIAg:SELect:ACQUISition (No Query Form)  
Selects the acquisition system test sequence that will be run when the  
DIAg:STATE EXECUte command is sent. This command is equivalent to setting  
Area in the Utility menu when System is set to Diag/Err.  
Group  
Syntax  
Calibration and Diagnostic  
DIAg:SELect:ACQUISition ALL  
DIAg  
:
:
<Space>  
SELect  
ACQUISition  
ALL  
Arguments  
ALL selects functional, memory, and register tests.  
DIAg:SELect:ALL (No Query Form)  
Specifies that all system test sequences will be run when the DIAg:STATE  
EXECUte command is sent. This command is equivalent to setting Area in the  
Utility menu when System is set to Diag/Err.  
Group  
Syntax  
Calibration and Diagnostic  
DIAg:SELect:ALL ALL  
DIAg  
:
:
<Space>  
SELect  
ALL  
ALL  
Arguments  
ALL selects functional, memory, and register tests for the acquisition, processor  
and display systems, and self diagnostics for the front panel.  
2–110  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
DIAg:SELect:CPU (No Query Form)  
Selects the processor system test sequence that will be run when the  
DIAg:STATE EXECUte command is sent. This command is equivalent to setting  
Area in the Utility menu when System is set to Diag/Err.  
Group  
Syntax  
Calibration and Diagnostic  
DIAg:SELect:CPU ALL  
DIAg  
:
:
<Space>  
SELect  
CPU  
ALL  
Arguments  
ALL selects functional, memory, and register tests.  
DIAg:SELect:DISplay (No Query Form)  
Selects the display system test sequence that will be run when the DIAg:STATE  
EXECUte command is sent. This command is equivalent to setting Area in the  
Utility menu when System is set to Diag/Err.  
Group  
Syntax  
Calibration and Diagnostic  
DIAg:SELect:DISplay ALL  
DIAg  
:
SELect  
:
DISplay  
<Space>  
ALL  
Arguments  
ALL selects functional, memory, and register tests.  
DIAg:SELect:FPAnel (No Query Form)  
Selects the front-panel test sequence that will be run when the DIAg:STATE  
EXECUte command is sent. This command is equivalent to setting Area in the  
Utility menu when System is set to Diag/Err.  
Group  
Syntax  
Calibration and Diagnostic  
DIAg:SELect:FPAnel ALL  
2–111  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ALL  
DIAg  
:
SELect  
:
FPAnel  
<Space>  
Arguments  
ALL selects self diagnostic tests.  
DIAg:STATE (No Query Form)  
Executes the diagnostic tests that have been specified with the DIAg:SELect  
commands.  
When the test sequence has completed, any of the modules or module interfaces  
that failed diagnostics are displayed on the screen and stored in an internal log  
file. The pass/fail status will be returned by the DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg? query, and  
the internal log will be returned by the DIAg:RESUlt:LOG? query. This  
command is equivalent to running Extended Diagnostics by selecting Execute in  
the Utility menu when System is set to Diag/Err.  
NOTE. The DIAg:STATE EXECute command can take 30 seconds or more to  
respond. This command performs a warm boot and does not return control to the  
instrument controller until diagnostics are complete.  
Group  
Syntax  
Calibration and Diagnostic  
DIAg:STATE EXECute  
DIAg  
:
STATE  
<Space>  
EXECute  
Arguments  
EXECute runs the diagnostic test sequences specified by the DIAg:SELect  
commands. When complete, the digitizing oscilloscope will return to the state it  
was in just prior to the test. If the PON event was enabled before running the  
tests, a Service Request will be generated. When the Service Request has been  
received, the pass/fail status of the tests can be returned by executing the  
DIAg:RESUlt:FLAg? query.  
The DIAg:STATE EXECute command clears the following locations:  
H
H
H
the Event Queue  
the Input Queue  
the Status Registers (SESR and SBR)  
To enable a power-on event to generate a Service Request, send the following  
commands before running diagnostics:  
2–112  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
H
H
H
H
DESE 128  
*ESE 128  
*SRE 32  
*PSC 0  
Examples  
DIAg:STATE EXECUTE  
executes all the diagnostic tests that have been selected.  
DISplay? (Query Only)  
Returns the current display settings.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay?  
DISplay  
?
Examples  
DISPLAY?  
might return :DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;FILTER SINX;PERSISTĆ  
ENCE 500.0E-3;GRATICULE FULL;TRIGT 1;INTENSITY:OVERALL 85;  
WAVEFORM 70;TEXT 60;CONTRAST 150  
DISplay:CLOCk  
Controls the display of the date and time. This is equivalent to setting Display  
Date/Time in the Readout Options side menu. The query form returns an ON (1)  
or an OFF (0).  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:CLOCk { OFF | ON | <NR1> }  
DISplay:CLOCk?  
2–113  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
CLOCk  
DISplay  
:
?
Arguments  
<OFF> or <NR1> = 0 removes the clock from the display.  
<ON> or <NR1> ꢀ 0 displays the clock on the display.  
Examples  
DISPLAY:CLOCK ON  
sets the display to show time and date.  
DISPLAY:CLOCK?  
might return 1 indicating that the display shows time and date.  
DISplay:COLOr:CONTRast  
TDS 6X4B & 700C Only  
Turns on or off the collision contrast option. The TDS will display overlapping  
lines in a special collision color when this item is turned on. This is equivalent to  
selecting Options from the main Color menu and toggling Collision Contrast in  
the resulting side menu to ON or OFF.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:COLOr:CONTRast { OFF |ON |<NR1> }  
DISplay:COLOr:CONTRast?  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
DISplay  
:
COLOr  
:
CONTRast  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<OFF> or <NR1> = 0 turns off collision contrast.  
<ON> or <NR1> ꢀ 0 turns on collision contrast.  
DISPLAY:COLOR:CONTRAST ON  
turns on the contrast option.  
2–114  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:<item name>: BYCONTents  
TDS 6X4B & 700C Only  
Determines if the color for a math or reference waveform is set to the color  
assigned to the waveform contents (the constituent waveform) or to a specific  
color index. This is equivalent to pressing Map Math Colors or Map Reference  
Colors on the Color main menu and Color Matches Contents (to select the on  
state) or Color (to select the off state) on the resulting side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:{ MATH1 | MATH2 | MATH3 | REF1 | REF2 | REF3 |  
REF4 }:BYCONTents { OFF | ON | <NR1> }  
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:{ MATH1 | MATH2 | MATH3 | REF1 | REF2 | REF3 |  
REF4 }:BYCONTents?  
DISplay  
:
COLOr  
:
MAP  
:
MATH1  
MATH2  
MATH3  
REF1  
REF2  
REF3  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
BYCONTents  
REF4  
:
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<OFF> or <NR1> = 0 means set the color by index (NOT by contents).  
<ON> or <NR1> ꢀ 0 means set the color by contents (NOT by index).  
DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:MATH1:BYCONTENTS ON  
sets the display of math waveform # 1 to the color of the waveform used to  
define math waveform # 1. If two waveforms were used to defined math  
waveform # 1, then the color of the first mentioned waveform is used.  
DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:MATH1:BYCONTENTS?  
might return ON.  
2–115  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:<item name>: TO  
TDS 6X4B & 700C Only  
Defines the color index to use if setting the color for a math or reference  
waveform to the color assigned to a specific index. This is similar, but not  
identical, to pressing Map Math Colors or Map Reference Colors on the Color  
main menu, pressing Color on the resulting side menu, and entering an index  
with the general purpose knob or the keypad. The difference is that, when you  
press Color on the front panel, you not only select a color index but also state  
that you wish to select by index rather than by contents. In contrast, when you  
use this command you only select the index to use. To state you want to select by  
index, use the DISplay:COLOr:MAP:...:BYCONTents command with the OFF  
argument.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:{ MATH1 | MATH2 | MATH3 | REF1 | REF2 | REF3 |  
REF4 }:TO { CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | MATH | REF }  
DISplay:COLOr:MAP:TO?  
DISplay  
:
COLOr  
:
MAP  
:
MATH1  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
MATH2  
MATH3  
REF1  
REF2  
REF3  
MATH  
REF  
<Space>  
TO  
REF4  
:
?
Examples  
DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:MATH1:TO CH3  
sets the color of math waveform # 1 to that assigned to channel 3. Note: this  
assumes that Color Matches Contents is set to OFF.  
DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:MATH1:TO?  
might return CH3.  
2–116  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:PERSistence  
TDS 6X4B & 700C Only  
Sets the current persistence palette to one of the preset persistence palettes. This  
is equivalent to selecting Palette from the main Color menu, Persistence  
Palettes from the resulting side menu, and Temperature, Spectral, or Gray  
Scale from the next side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:PERSistence { TEMPErature |ąSPECTral |  
GRAYscale }  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:PERSistence?  
TEMPErature  
DISplay  
:
COLOr  
:
PALEtte  
:
SPECTral  
<Space>  
?
GRAYscale  
PERSistence  
Examples  
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:PERSISTENCE TEMPERATURE  
sets temperature palette as the current persistence palette.  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:REGular  
TDS 6X4B, & 700C Only  
Sets the current palette to one of the preset palettes. This is equivalent to  
selecting Palette from the main Color menu and Normal, Bold, Hardcopy, or  
Monochrome from the resulting side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:REGular { NORMal | BOLd | HARDCopy | MONo }  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:REGular?  
2–117  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
NORMal  
BOLd  
COLOr  
PALEtte  
REGular  
<Space>  
?
HARDCopy  
MONo  
DISplay  
:
:
:
Examples  
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:REGULAR HARDCOPY  
sets the current palette to the hardcopy palette.  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RESETALL (No Query Form)  
TDS 6X4B & 700C Only  
Restores all palettes to their factory default settings. This is equivalent to  
selecting Restore Colors from the main Color menu and Reset All Palettes to  
Factory from the resulting side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RESETALL  
COLOr  
PALEtte  
RESETALL  
DISplay  
:
:
:
Examples  
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:RESETALL  
resets the palette to the factory default setting.  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:<palette name>:RESET (No Query Form)  
TDS 6X4B & 700C Only  
Restores the given palette to its factory defaults. This is useful if you have edited  
the colors in a palette. This is equivalent to selecting Restore Colors from the  
main Color menu and Reset Current Palette to Factory from the resulting side  
menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:{ NORMal | BOLd | HARDCopy | MONo }:RESET  
2–118  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
NORMal  
BOLd  
COLOr  
PALEtte  
HARDCopy  
MONo  
RESET  
DISplay  
:
:
:
:
Examples  
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:HARDCOPY:RESET  
resets the hardcopy palette to its initial, factory-default settings.  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:<palette name>:<item name>  
TDS 6X4B & 700C Only  
Sets the color of a selected item in a selected palette.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:{ NORMal | MONo | BOLd | HARDCopy }:  
{ BACKGround | CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | MATH | REF | TEXt |  
SCROLLTEXT | ZONe | COLLision | GRAticule | SCROLLBAR | HISTOMASK  
(TDS 700C) } { <NR1>, <NR1>, <NR1> }  
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:{ NORMal | MONo | BOLd | HARDCopy }:  
{ BACKGround | CH1 | CH2 | CH3 | CH4 | MATH | REF | TEXt | SCROLL  
TEXT | ZONe | COLLision | GRAticule | SCROLLBAR | HISTOMask (TDS  
700C) }?  
2–119  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
BACKGround  
CH1  
DISplay  
:
COLOr  
:
CH2  
<NR1>  
,
CH3  
NORMal  
MONo  
CH4  
<NR1>  
,
MATH  
REF  
BOLd  
PALEtte  
:
:
<Space>  
<NR1>  
HARDCopy  
TEXt  
SCROLLTEXT  
ZONe  
?
COLLision  
GRAticule  
SCROLLBAR  
HISTOMask  
Arguments  
BACKGround specifies the display background color.  
CH1 specifies the channel 1 waveform and associated text color.  
CH2 specifies the channel 2 waveform and associated text color.  
CH3 specifies the channel 3 waveform and associated text color.  
CH4 specifies the channel 4 waveform and associated text color.  
MATH specifies the default math waveforms and associated text color.  
REF specifies the default reference waveforms and associated text color.  
TEXt specifies the text color in all menus and all readouts not associated with a  
waveform.  
SCROLLTEXT specifies text in the scroll bar. For example, this covers the scroll  
bars used in the file system.  
ZONe specifies the color of the intensified zone on the waveform when the time  
base is intensified and the color of the real samples when the display style is  
Intensified Samples.  
COLLision specifies the color of the areas where waveforms overlap each other.  
You can turn collision marking on or off with the Items, Waveforms, Options,  
Collision Contrast menu item.  
GRAticule specifies the color of the graticule. Use the Settings, Display,  
Graticule option to select the graticule type.  
2–120  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
SCROLLBAR specifies the color of the scrollbar. For example, you will find a  
scrollbar in various file system menus.  
HISTOMask (TDS 700C) specifies the color of the histogram’s box, the histogram  
itself, and masks, in the different palettes.  
<NR1>, <NR1>, <NR1> specifies the desired colors in terms of hue, lightness  
and saturation values.  
Hue is the wavelength of light reflected from the surface. It varies continuously  
along the color spectrum as produced by a rainbow. Values range from 0 to 359.  
Sample values are: 0 = blue, 60 = magenta, 120 = red, 180 = yellow, 240 =  
green, 360 = cyan.  
Lightness refers to the amount of light reflected from the surface. It varies from  
black, to the nominal color, to white. Values range from 0 to100. A value of 0  
results in black. A value of 50 provides the nominal color. A value of 100 results  
in white.  
Saturation is the intensity of color. Completely desaturated color is gray.  
Completely saturated color of any hue is that color at its most intense. Values  
range from 0 to 100. A value of 100 provides a pure color. A value of 0 provides  
gray.  
Examples  
DISPLAY:COLOr:PALEtte:HARDCOPY:CH1 120,50,100  
sets the CH1 color of the hardcopy palette to 120 hue, 50 lightness, and  
100 saturation. This provides a pure red.  
DISplay:FILTer  
Sets or queries the type of interpolation to use for the display. This command is  
equivalent to setting Filter in the Display menu.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:STYle  
DISplay:FILTer { LINEAr | SINX }  
DISplay:FILTer?  
2–121  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
LINEAr  
SINX  
<Space>  
FILTer  
DISplay  
:
?
Arguments  
LINEAr specifies linear interpolation where acquired points are connected with  
straight lines.  
SINX specifies sin(x)/x interpolation where acquired points are fit to a curve.  
Examples  
DISPLAY:FILTER LINEAR  
sets the interpolation filter type to linear.  
DISPLAY:FILTER?  
returns either LINEAR or SINX, indicating the type of interpolation filter.  
DISplay:FORMat  
Sets or queries the display format. This command is equivalent to setting  
Format in the Display menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:FORMat { XY | YT }  
DISplay:FORMat?  
XY  
<Space>  
YT  
FORMat  
DISplay  
:
?
Arguments  
XY displays one waveform against another. The source pairs that make up an XY  
trace are predefined and are listed in Table 2–31. Displaying one source causes  
its corresponding source to be displayed.  
2–122  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Table 2–31: XY Format Pairs  
X-Axis Source  
Y-Axis Source  
Ch 2  
Ch 1  
Ch 3 (or AUX 1)  
(All models except TDS 430A)  
Ch 4 (or AUX 2)  
(All models except TDS 430A)  
Ref 1  
Ref 3  
Ref 2  
Ref 4  
YT sets the display to a voltage versus time format and is the normal mode.  
Examples  
DISPLAY:FORMAT YT  
selects a voltage versus time format for the display.  
DISPLAY:FORMAT?  
might return XY for the display format.  
DISplay:GRAticule  
Selects the type of graticule that will be displayed. This command is equivalent  
to setting Graticule in the Display menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:GRAticule { CROSSHair| FRAme | FULl | GRId | NTSc | PAL}  
DISplay:GRAticule?  
CROSSHair  
FRAme  
FULl  
GRId  
<Space>  
NTSc  
PAL  
DISplay  
:
GRAticule  
?
Arguments  
CROSSHair specifies a frame and cross hairs.  
FRAme specifies just a frame.  
2–123  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
FULl specifies a frame, a grid, and cross hairs.  
GRId specifies a frame and a grid.  
NTSc specifies a special NTSC frame.  
PAL specifies a special PAL frame.  
Examples  
DISPLAY:GRATICULE GRID  
sets the graticule type to display a frame and a grid.  
DISPLAY:GRATICULE?  
returns FULL when all graticule elements (grid, frame, and cross hairs) are  
selected.  
DISplay:INStavu:PERSistence  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Selects the persistence mode to use with InstaVu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:INStavu:PERSistence { INFPersist | VARpersist }  
DISplay:INStavu:PERSistence?  
INFPersist  
<Space>  
VARpersist  
:
PERSistence  
DISplay  
:
INStavu  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
INFPersist accumulates data points on the display indefinitely.  
VARpersist leaves acquired data points on the display for a period of time  
specified by DISplay:INStavu:VARpersist.  
DISPLAY:INSTAVU:PERSISTENCE?  
might return INFPERSIST indicating the infinite persistence mode is on.  
2–124  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
DISplay:INStavu:STYle  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Selects how the data is displayed with InstaVu.  
Display  
Group  
Syntax  
DISplay:INStavu:STYle { DOTs | VECtors }  
DISplay:INStavu:STYle?  
DOTs  
<Space>  
VECtors  
?
:
DISplay  
:
INStavu  
STYle  
Arguments  
DOTs displays individual data points.  
VECtors connects adjacent data points. Old points are immediately replaced by  
new ones.  
Examples  
DISPLAY:INSTAVU:STYLE?  
might return DOTS indicating that the display shows individual waveform data  
points.  
DISplay:INStavu:VARpersist  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Sets the length of time that data points are displayed when DISplay:INSta-  
vu:PERSistence is set to VARpersist. This affects the display only.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:INStavu:PERSistence  
DISplay:INStavu:VARpersist <NR3>  
DISplay:INStavu:VARpersist?  
2–125  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
:
DISplay  
:
VARpersist  
INStavu  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> specifies the time, in seconds, that the waveform points are displayed on  
the screen. The range is 250 ms to 10 s.  
DISPLAY:INSTAVU:VARPERSIST 3  
specifies that the waveform points are displayed on the screen for 3 seconds  
before they disappear.  
DISplay:INTENSITy? (Query Only)  
Returns the current intensity settings for different parts of the display.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:INTENSITy?  
DISplay  
:
INTENSITy  
?
Examples  
DISPLAY:INTENSITY?  
might return :DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM 70;TEXT 60  
or :DISPLAY:INTENSITY:OVERALL 85;WAVEFORM 70;TEXT 60;CONTRAST 175  
DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast  
TDS 4X0A, 510A, 500C & 6X0B Only  
Sets the relative intensity of the intensified zone on a waveform. This command  
is equivalent to setting Contrast in the Display Intensity side menu.  
The command has no effect on limit test templates or intensified samples. They  
are displayed at a fixed contrast ratio.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Display  
HORizontal:MODe  
DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast <NR1>  
2–126  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
DISplay:  
:
INTENSITy  
CONTRast  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> ranges from 100 to 250 percent.  
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:CONTRAST 140  
sets the intensity of the intensified portion of a waveform.  
DISplay:INTENSITy:OVERAll  
TDS 4X0A, 510A, 5X0C, & 6X0B Only  
Sets the intensity of the entire display. This command is equivalent to setting  
Overall in the Display Intensity side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:INTENSITy:OVERAll <NR1>  
DISplay:INTENSITy:OVERAll?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
DISplay:  
:
INTENSITy  
OVERAll  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> ranges from 20 to 100 percent.  
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:OVERALL 50  
sets the intensity of the display to the middle of the range.  
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:OVERALL?  
might return 75 as the overall display intensity.  
2–127  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
DISplay:INTENSITy:TEXt  
Sets the intensity of the text and the graticule. This command is equivalent to  
setting Text/Grat in the Display Intensity side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:INTENSITy:TEXt <NR1>  
DISplay:INTENSITy:TEXt?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
DISplay  
:
INTENSITy  
:
TEXt  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> ranges from 20 to 100 percent.  
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:TEXT 100  
sets the intensity of the text to the brightest level.  
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform  
Sets the intensity of the waveforms. This command is equivalent to setting  
Waveform in the Display Intensity side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform <NR1>  
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
DISplay  
:
INTENSITy  
:
WAVEform  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> ranges from 20 to 100 percent.  
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM?  
might return 60 as the intensity of the waveform.  
2–128  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
DISplay:MODe  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Selects whether or not to turn on InstaVu.  
Display  
Group  
Syntax  
DISplay:MODe { INStavu | NORMal }  
DISplay:MODe?  
INStavu  
<Space>  
NORMal  
?
DISplay  
:
MODe  
Arguments  
INStavu turns on InstaVu. This mode can help you view infrequent deviations in  
a signal. It only uses a 500 point record length, no averaging, and no enveloping.  
When you turn on InstaVu, the TDS turns off any active zoom, autosave, limit  
test, waveform math, FastFrame, and XY display. The TDS reactivates these  
features when you turn off InstaVu.  
NORMal turns on the normal (non–InstaVu) mode.  
Examples  
DISPLAY:MODE INSTAVU  
turns on InstaVu.  
DISPLAY:MODE?  
might return INSTAVU indicating that the InstaVu mode is on.  
DISplay:PERSistence  
Sets the length of time that data points are displayed when DISplay:STYle is set  
to VARpersist while in normal mode (not InstaVu). This affects the display only  
and is equivalent to setting Variable Persistence in the Display Style side menu.  
Group  
Display  
Related Commands  
DISplay:STYle  
2–129  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
DISplay:PERSistence <NR3>  
DISplay:PERSistence?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
PERSistence  
DISplay  
:
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> specifies the length, in seconds, that the waveform points are displayed on  
the screen. The range is 250 ms to 10 s.  
DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE 3  
specifies that the waveform points are displayed fading for 3 seconds before they  
completely disappear.  
DISplay:STYle  
Selects how the data is displayed for normal (not InstaVu) mode. This command  
is equivalent to setting Style in the Display menu.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:PERSistence  
DISplay:STYle { DOTs | INFPersist | INTENSIFied | VARpersist |  
VECtors}  
DISplay:STYle?  
DOTs  
INFPersist  
INTENSIFied  
VARpersist  
VECtors  
<Space>  
DISplay  
:
STYle  
?
Arguments  
DOTs displays individual data points. New points immediately replace old ones.  
INFPersist accumulates data points on the display indefinitely. The display is  
reset when the style or acquisition is reset.  
2–130  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
VARpersist leaves acquired data points on the display for a period of time  
specified by DISplay:PERSistence.  
VECtors connects adjacent data points. New points immediately replace old  
ones.  
INTENSIFied causes the display to show acquired (non-interpolated) samples  
with brighter or different colored dots than the rest of the waveform.  
Examples  
DISPLAY:STYLE INFPERSIST  
sets the display to indefinitely accumulate data points on the screen.  
DISPLAY:STYLE?  
might return DOTS indicating that the display shows individual waveform data  
points with no history.  
DISplay:TRIGBar  
Controls the display of the trigger level indicator bar/s. The indicator bar shows  
where the trigger will occur, in voltage.  
The digitizing oscilloscope will only display the bar if the trigger source is also  
displayed. If both a main and a delayed trigger are displayed, then two bars will  
appear. One will accompany each source. If a logic trigger is selected, then  
multiple bars may appear. If a runt pulse trigger is selected, then two bars may  
appear. One will show the upper threshold and one the lower threshold.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:TRIGBar{ OFF | SHORt | LONG }  
DISplay:TRIGBar?  
OFF  
SHORt  
LONG  
<Space>  
TRIGBar  
DISplay  
:
?
Arguments  
OFF removes the trigger indicator bar from the display.  
SHORt displays, as the indicator, a short arrow at the right side of the graticule for  
each displayed trigger signal.  
2–131  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
LONG displays, as the indicator, a horizontal line in the center of the graticule for  
each displayed trigger signal.  
Examples  
DISPLAY:TRIGBAR LONG  
sets the display to show a long trigger indicator bar (or bars).  
DISplay:TRIGT  
Controls the display of the trigger point indicator. This is equivalent to setting  
the Display ‘T’ @ Trigger Point in the Readout Options side menu. The query  
form returns an ON (1) or an OFF (0).  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
DISplay:TRIGT { ON | OFF | <NR1> }  
DISplay:TRIGT?  
ON  
OFF  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
TRIGT  
DISplay  
:
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<OFF> or <NR1> = 0 removes the trigger indicator from the display.  
<ON> or <NR1> ꢀ 0 displays a trigger indicator on each of the displayed  
waveforms. The trigger indicator is in reverse video for the selected waveform.  
DISPLAY:TRIGT ON  
sets the display to show trigger indicators.  
DISPLAY:TRIGT?  
might return 1 indicating that the display shows trigger indicators.  
*ESE  
Sets and queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register (ESER). The ESER  
prevents events from being reported to the Status Byte Register (STB). For a  
more detailed discussion of the use of these registers, see page 3–1.  
2–132  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Status and Error  
*CLS, DESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg? *SRE, *STB?  
*ESE <NR1>  
*ESE?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
*ESE  
Arguments  
<NR1> is a value in the range from 0 through 255. The binary bits of the ESER  
are set according to this value.  
The power-on default for ESER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the ESER  
maintains its value through a power cycle.  
NOTE. Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same value allows only those  
codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5)  
of the Status Byte Register. Use the DESE command to set the DESER. A  
discussion of event handling begins on page 3–1.  
Examples  
*ESE 209  
sets the ESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON, URQ, EXE, and  
OPC bits.  
*ESE?  
might return the string *ESE 186, showing that the ESER contains the binary  
value 10111010.  
*ESR? (Query Only)  
Returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register (SESR). *ESR? also  
clears the SESR (since reading the SESR clears it). For a more detailed  
discussion of the use of these registers, see page 3–1.  
Group  
Status and Error  
Related Commands  
ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?  
2–133  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
*ESR?  
*ESR?  
*ESR  
?
Examples  
might return the value 213, showing that the SESR contains binary 11010101.  
EVENT? (Query Only)  
Returns from the Event Queue an event code that provides information about the  
results of the last *ESR? read. EVENT? also removes the returned value from  
the Event Queue. A discussion of event handling begins on page 3–1.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Status and Error  
ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?  
EVENT?  
EVENT  
?
Examples  
EVENT?  
might return the response :EVENT 110, showing that there was an error in a  
command header.  
EVMsg? (Query Only)  
Removes from the Event Queue a single event code associated with the results of  
the last *ESR? read, and returns the event code along with an explanatory  
message. A more detailed discussion of event handling begins on page 3–1.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Status and Error  
ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, *SRE, *STB?  
EVMsg?  
2–134  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
EVMsg  
?
Returns  
The event code and message in the following format:  
<Event Code><Comma><QString>[<Event Code><Comma><QString>...]  
<QString>::= <Message>;[<Command>]  
where <Command> is the command that caused the error and may be returned  
when a command error is detected by the digitizing oscilloscope. As much of the  
command will be returned as possible without exceeding the 60 character limit  
of the <Message> and <Command> strings combined. The command string is  
right-justified.  
Examples  
EVMSG?  
might return the message :EVMSG 110,"Command header error".  
EVQty? (Query Only)  
Returns the number of event codes that are in the Event Queue. This is useful  
when using the ALLEv? query since it lets you know exactly how many events  
will be returned.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Status and Error  
ALLEv?, EVENT?, EVMsg?  
EVQty?  
EVQty  
?
Returns  
<NR1>  
Examples  
EVQTY?  
might return 3 as the number of event codes in the Event Queue.  
2–135  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
FACtory (No Query Form)  
Resets the digitizing oscilloscope to its factory default settings. This command is  
equivalent to selecting Recall Factory Setup in the Waveform Save/Recall  
menu.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Miscellaneous  
*PSC, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp  
FACtory  
FACtory  
Setting the digitizing oscilloscope to factory default includes:  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Clears the Event Status Enable Register.  
Clears the Service Request Enable Register.  
Sets the Device Event Status Enable Register to 255.  
Sets the Power On Status Clear Flag to TRUE  
Purges all defined aliases.  
Enables all Command Headers (HEADer ON).  
Sets the macro defined by *DDT to a “zero-length field.”  
Clears the pending operation flag and associated operations.  
The FACtory command does not alter the following:  
H
H
H
H
H
H
The state of the GPIB (IEEE Std 488.1-1987) interface.  
The selected GPIB address.  
Calibration data that affects device specifications.  
Protected user data.  
Stored settings.  
The current password (if implemented).  
2–136  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
FILESystem:COPy (No query form)  
File System Only  
Copies a named file or files to a new file. The new file may be in a totally  
separate directory than the old file. Also, you can use wild card characters (*.*)  
to copy multiple files with one command.  
Group  
Syntax  
File system  
FILESystem:COPy { <source file path>,<destination file path> |  
<source directory path>,<destination file path> | <source  
directory path>,<destination directory path> }  
<source file  
path>  
<destination  
file path>  
,
,
,
<source  
directory path>  
<destination  
file path>  
FILESystem  
:
COPy  
<Space>  
<source  
directory path>  
<destination  
directory path>  
Arguments  
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file  
path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more  
<dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will copy the file in the  
current directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8 characters and can  
be followed by a period (“.”) and a 3-character extension. You can also use the  
inclusive filename *.* in the source file path to copy all files.  
<directory path> is a quoted string that defines the directory. Input the  
directory using the form <drive>/<dir>/<directory name>. <drive> and one  
or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will copy the  
directory in the current directory. <directory name> stands for a directory name  
of up to 8 characters and can be followed by a period (“.”) and a 3-character  
extension.  
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the  
FILESystem:CWD query.  
Examples  
FILESYSTEM:COPY TEK00001.SET",fd0:/TEK00001.SET"  
copies the file named TEK00001.SET on the current drive to a file named  
TEK00001.SET on the drive fd0: in the root directory.  
2–137  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
FILESYSTEM:COPY fd0:/YOURDIR/TEK00001.SET",fd0:/MYDIR"  
copies the file named TEK00001.SET on the fd0: drive and the YOURDIR  
directory to the MYDIR directory on the same drive.  
FILESYSTEM:COPY YOURDIR",fd0:/MYDIR"  
copies the files in the YOURDIR directory in the current directory to the MYDIR  
directory on the fd0: drive.  
FILESYSTEM:COPY YOURDIR",hd0:/MYDIR"  
copies the files in the YOURDIR directory in the current directory to the MYDIR  
directory on the hd0: drive.  
FILESystem:CWD  
File System Only  
Sets or returns the current working directory (CWD) path.  
File system  
Group  
Syntax  
FILESystem:CWD <directory path>  
FILESystem:CWD?  
<Space>  
<directory path>  
?
FILESystem  
:
CWD  
Arguments  
Examples  
<directory path> is a quoted string that defines the directory name and path.  
FILESYSTEM:CWD fd0:/MYDIR"  
will define fd0:/MYDIR as the current directory.  
FILESYSTEM:CWD?  
might return fd0:/MYDIR if that is the current directory.  
FILESystem:DELEte (No query form)  
File System Only  
Deletes a named file.  
Group  
File system  
2–138  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
FILESystem:DELEte <file path>  
FILESystem  
:
DELEte  
<Space>  
<file path>  
Arguments  
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file  
path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more  
<dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will delete the file in  
the current directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8 characters and  
can be followed by a period (“.”) and a 3-character extension. You can also use  
the inclusive filename *.* to delete all files.  
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the  
FILESystem:CWD query.  
Examples  
FILESYSTEM:DELETE NOT-MINE.SET"  
deletes the file named NOT-MINE.SET on the default drive and directory.  
FILESYSTEM:DELETE *.*"  
deletes all the files in the default directory on the default drive.  
FILESystem:DELWarn  
File System Only  
Turns on or off the front-panel file-delete warning. No warning is returned via  
the GPIB.  
Group  
Syntax  
File system  
FILESystem:DELWarn { ON | OFF | <NR1> }  
FILESystem:DELWarn?  
ON  
OFF  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
FILESystem  
:
DELWarn  
?
Arguments  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 turns on the front-panel delete warning.  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the front-panel delete warning.  
2–139  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
FILESYSTEM:DELWARN OFF  
disables the front-panel delete warning.  
FILESYSTEM:DELWARN?  
might return 0 indicating the front-panel warning is disabled.  
FILESystem:DIR (Query only)  
File System Only  
Returns a list of quoted strings. Each string contains the name of a file or  
directory in the current directory.  
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the  
FILESystem:CWD query.  
Group  
Syntax  
File system  
FILESystem:DIR?  
FILESystem  
:
DIR  
?
Examples  
FILESYSTEM:DIR?  
returns a list of files and directories in the current directory.  
FILESystem:FORMat (No query form)  
File System Only  
Formats a named drive.  
Group  
Syntax  
File system  
FILESystem:FORMat <drive name>  
<Space>  
FILESystem  
:
FORMat  
<drive name>  
Arguments  
<drive name> is a quoted string that defines the disk drive to format. fd0:  
refers to the floppy-disk drive built into the digitizing oscilloscope.  
2–140  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
FILESYSTEM:FORMAT fd0:"  
formats the media on drive fd0:.  
FILESystem:FREESpace (Query only)  
File System Only  
Returns the amount of freespace (in bytes) on the current drive.  
Group  
Syntax  
File system  
FILESystem:FREESpace?  
FILESystem  
:
FREESpace  
?
Examples  
FILESYSTEM:FREESpace?  
might return 0 as the amount of freespace available if the drive was full.  
FILESystem:MKDir (No query form)  
File System Only  
Make a new directory.  
Group  
File system  
Syntax  
FILESystem:MKDir <directory path>  
<Space>  
FILESystem  
:
MKDir  
<directory path>  
Arguments  
<directory path> is a quoted string that defines the directory. Input the  
directory using the form <drive>/<dir>/<directory name>. <drive> and one  
or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will create the  
directory in the current directory. <directory name> stands for a directory name  
of up to 8 characters and can be followed by a period (“.”) and a 3-char  
extension.  
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the  
FILESystem:CWD query.  
2–141  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
FILESYSTEM:MKDIR NEATPICS"  
creates the directory named NEATPICS on the current drive.  
FILESystem:OVERWrite  
File System Only  
Turns on or off the file-overwrite protection. Turning on file-overwrite protection  
prevents writing over existing files.  
Group  
Syntax  
File system  
FILESystem:OVERWrite { ON | OFF | <NR1> }  
FILESystem:OVERWrite?  
ON  
<Space>  
OFF  
<NR1>  
FILESystem  
:
OVERWrite  
?
Arguments  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 turns on the file-overwrite protection.  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the file-overwrite protection.  
Examples  
FILESYSTEM:OVERWRITE OFF  
lets you overwrite existing files.  
FILESYSTEM:OVERWRITE?  
might return 0 indicating you cannot overwrite existing files.  
FILESystem:PRInt (No query form)  
File System Only  
Prints a named file to the named port.  
Group  
Syntax  
File system  
FILESystem:PRInt <filepath>,{ GPIb | RS232 | CENtronics }  
2–142  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
GPIb  
CENtronics  
RS232  
FILESystem  
:
PRInt  
,
<file path>  
Arguments  
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file  
path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more  
<dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will print the file in the  
current directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8 characters and can  
be followed by a period (“.”) and a 3-character extension.  
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the  
FILESystem:CWD command.  
GPIb specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the GPIB port.  
CENtronics specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the Centronics port (Option  
13 RS232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface only).  
RS232 specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the RS232 port (Option 13  
RS232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface only).  
Examples  
FILESYSTEM:PRINT TEK00000.IBM",CENTRONICS  
sends the file named TEK00000.IBM out the Centronics port.  
FILESystem:READFile  
TDS 500C and 700C Only  
Copies a named file to the GPIB port.  
File system  
Group  
Syntax  
FILESystem:READFile <file path>  
READFile  
<Space>  
FILESystem  
:
<file path>  
Arguments  
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file to read. Input the file path  
using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s  
are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will look for the filename in  
the current directory.  
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the  
FILESystem:CWD query.  
2–143  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Example  
FILESYSTEM:READFILE hd0:/TEK00000.IBM"  
sends a hard–disk-based file named TEK00000.IBM out the GPIB port.  
FILESystem:REName (No query form)  
File System Only  
Assigns a new name to a file.  
Group  
File system  
Syntax  
FILESystem:REName <old file path>,<new file path>  
<Space>  
FILESystem  
:
REName  
,
<old file path>  
<new file path>  
Arguments  
<old file path> is a quoted string that defines the file to rename. Input the file  
path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more  
<dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will look for the  
filename in the current directory.  
<new file path> is a quoted string that defines the new name of the file. Input  
the file path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or  
more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will place the  
newly named file in the current directory.  
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the  
FILESystem:CWD query.  
Examples  
FILESYSTEM:RENAME TEK00000.SET",MYSETTING.SET"  
gives the file named TEK00000.SET the new name of MYSETTING.SET. The file  
remains on the current directory.  
FILESystem:RMDir (No query form)  
File System Only  
Deletes a named directory.  
Group  
Syntax  
File system  
FILESystem:RMDir <directory path>  
2–144  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
<Space>  
FILESystem  
:
RMDir  
<directory path>  
Arguments  
<directory path> is a quoted string that defines the directory. Input the  
directory using the form <drive>/<dir>/<directory name>. <drive> and one  
or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will delete the  
directory in the current directory. <directory name> stands for a directory name  
of up to 8 characters and can be followed by a period (“.”) and a 3-character  
extension.  
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the  
FILESystem:CWD query.  
Examples  
FILESYSTEM:RMDIR NEATPICS"  
deletes the directory named NEATPICS in the current directory.  
FILESystem:WRITEFile  
TDS 500C and 700C Only  
Copies the GPIB port block data to a named file.  
File system  
Group  
Syntax  
FILESystem:WRITEFile <file path>,<Block>  
<Space>  
FILESystem  
:
,
<Block>  
WRITEFile  
<file path>  
Arguments  
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file to read. Input the file path  
using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s  
are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will look for the filename in  
the current directory.  
<Block> is a block of data bytes that uses the form shown below:  
Symbol  
<NZDig>  
<Dig>  
Meaning  
A nonzero digit character, in the range 1–9  
A digit character, in the range 0–9  
2–145  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Symbol  
Meaning  
<DChar>  
A character with the hex equivalent of 00 through FF  
hexadecimal (0 through 255 decimal)  
<Block>  
A block of data bytes, defined as:  
<Block> ::=  
{ #<NZDig><Dig>[<Dig>...][<DChar>...]  
| #0[<DChar>...]<terminator> }  
<NZDig> specifies the number of <Dig> elements that follow. Taken together, the  
<Dig> elements form a decimal integer that specifies how many <DChar>  
elements follow.  
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the  
FILESystem:CWD query.  
Examples  
FILESYSTEM:WRITEFILE hd0:/hello1.txt",#211hello world  
writes the text string “hello world” to a file named HELLO1.TXT on the  
oscilloscope’s hard disk. It uses a format that defines the number of characters to  
transfer.  
FILESYSTEM:WRITEFILE hd0:/HELLO2.TXT"#hello world writes the text  
string “hello world” to a file named HELLO2.TXT on the oscilloscope’s hard  
disk. It uses a format that does not define the number of characters to transfer.  
HARDCopy  
Sends a copy of the screen display followed by an EOI to the port specified by  
HARDCopy:PORT. The format and layout of the output is specified with the  
HARDCopy:FORMat and HARDCopy:LAYout commands. This command is  
equivalent to pressing the front-panel HARDCOPY button.  
The HARDCopy? query returns format, layout, and port information.  
NOTE. This command is NOT IEEE Std 488.2-1987 compatible.  
Group  
Syntax  
Hardcopy  
HARDCopy { ABOrt | CLEARSpool | STARt }  
HARDCopy?  
2–146  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ABOrt  
<Space>  
CLEARSpool  
STARt  
HARDCopy  
?
Arguments  
ABOrt terminates the hardcopy output in process.  
NOTE. DCL does NOT clear the output queue once a hardcopy is in process. The  
only way to abort the hardcopy process is to send the HARDCopy ABOrt  
command. The output queue can then be cleared using DCL.  
CLEARSpool clears the printer output spooler.  
STARt initiates a screen copy that is sent to the controller where it can be stored  
in a file or redirected to a printing device.  
NOTE. Use the *WAI command between HARDCopy STARt commands to ensure  
that the first hardcopy is complete before starting another.  
Examples  
HARDCOPY ABORT  
stops any hardcopy output that is in process.  
HARDCopy:FILEName  
File System Only  
Selects the file to send the hardcopy data to on the next hardcopy command  
(HARDCOPY START). This is equivalent to setting the target file name in the  
Hardcopy menu.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Hardcopy  
HARDCopy  
HARDCopy:FILEName <file path>  
HARDCopy:FILEName?  
2–147  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
<Space>  
<file path>  
HARDCopy  
:
FILEName  
?
<file path> specifies that the hardcopy is sent to the named file. <file path>  
is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the  
form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>.<drive> and one or more <dir>s are  
optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will write the file to the current  
directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8 characters followed by a  
period (“.”) and any 3-character extension.  
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the  
FILESystem:CWD query.  
You can automatically create different names for files. You do this by using the  
question mark (?) as a special wildcard character. These stand for numbers the  
TDS will insert sequentially in the filename. For example, if you placed two  
question marks at the end of the filename then the oscilloscope would append 00  
to the first file created, 01 to the next, and 02 to the next. This helps you  
automatically create different names for files. It is particularly useful in  
automated testing situations.  
Examples  
HARDCOPY:FILENAME TEK.IBM"  
selects TEK.IBM as the selected file name.  
HARDCOPY:FILENAME?  
might return TEK.IBM as the selected file name.  
HARDCOPY:FILENAME TEK??.IBM"  
selects TEK as the selected file name with a numeric, two-digit suffix. The TDS  
might return TEK00.IBM as the first file, TEK01.IBM as the second.  
HARDCopy:FORMat  
Selects the output data format for hardcopies. This is equivalent to setting  
Format in the Hardcopy menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Hardcopy  
HARDCopy:FORMat { BMP | BMPCOLOR (not on TDS 400A & 510A) |  
DESKJET | DESKJETC (not on TDS 400A & 510A) | DPU411 | DPU412 |  
EPSCOLImg (not on TDS 400A & 510A) | EPSColor | EPSImage | EPSMono  
| EPSOn | HPGl | INTERLeaf | LASERJet | PCX | PCXCOLOR (not on TDS  
400A & 510A) | RLE (not on TDS 400A & 510A) | THInkjet | TIFf }  
2–148  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
HARDCopy:FORMat?  
BMP  
BMPCOLOR  
DESKJET  
DESKJETC  
DPU411  
DPU412  
EPSCOLImg  
EPSColor  
EPSImage  
EPSMono  
EPSOn  
HPGl  
INTERLeaf  
LASERJet  
PCX  
<Space>  
PCXCOLOR  
RLE  
THInkjet  
TIFf  
:
FORMat  
HARDCopy  
?
Syntax  
HARDCopy:FORMat { BMP | BMPCOLOR | DESKJET| DESKJETC (not on  
400A & 510A) | DPU411 | DPU412 | EPSCOLImg (not on 400A & 510A) |  
EPSColor | EPSImage | EPSMono | EPSOn | HPGl | INTERLeaf |  
LASERJet | PCX | PCXCOLOR (not on 400A & 510A) | RLE (not on 400A  
& 510A) | THInkjet | TIFf }  
HARDCopy:FORMat?  
2–149  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
BMP  
BMPCOLOR  
DESKJET  
DESKJETC  
DPU411  
DPU412  
EPSCOLImg  
EPSColor  
EPSImage  
EPSMono  
EPSOn  
HPGl  
INTERLeaf  
LASERJet  
PCX  
<Space>  
PCXCOLOR  
RLE  
THInkjet  
TIFf  
:
FORMat  
HARDCopy  
?
On monochrome instruments, the following formats are mapped to a mono-  
chrome near equivalent:  
PCXCOLOR  
BMPCOLOR  
RLE  
!
!
!
!
!
PCX  
BMP  
BMP  
EPSIMAGE  
DESKJET  
EPSCOLIMG  
DESKJETC  
(The DESKJETC argument is not on the TDS 400A and 510A)  
For example: if HARDCOPY:FORMAT PCXCOLOR and HARDCOPY:FORMAT? are sent  
to the oscilloscope, PCX is returned.  
Examples  
HARDCOPY:FORMAT HPGL  
sets the hardcopy output format to HPGL.  
HARDCOPY:FORMAT?  
might return INTERLEAF as the final hardcopy output format.  
2–150  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
HARDCopy:LAYout  
Selects the printing orientation. This is equivalent to setting Layout in the  
Hardcopy menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Hardcopy  
HARDCopy:LAYout { LANdscape | PORTRait }  
HARDCopy:LAYout?  
LANdscape  
<Space>  
PORTRait  
HARDCopy  
:
LAYout  
?
Arguments  
LANDscape specifies that the bottom of the hardcopy is along the long side of the  
page.  
PORTRait specifies that the bottom of the hardcopy is along the short side of the  
page. This is the standard format.  
Examples  
HARDCOPY:LAYOUT?  
might return PORTRAIT as the hardcopy page-layout format.  
HARDCopy:PALEtte  
TDS 644B, 684B, & 700C Only  
Selects whether to create the hardcopy using the current color palette (as set in  
the Display menu and seen on the screen) or the hardcopy palette. For color  
hardcopies, the default hardcopy palette may be most appropriate, since it has a  
white background and requires less ink for printing onto white paper. For  
monochrome hardcopies, the TDS ignores the palette and prints black (or the  
default color) objects on a blank background.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Hardcopy  
HARDCopy  
HARDCopy:PALEtte { CURRent | HARDCopy }  
2–151  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
HARDCopy:PALEtte  
CURRent  
<Space>  
HARDCopy  
HARDCopy  
:
PALEtte  
?
Examples  
HARDCOPY:PALETTE HARDCOPY  
would print each copy made using the hardcopy palette.  
HARDCopy:PORT  
Selects where to send the hardcopy data on the next hardcopy command (i.e.  
HARDCOPY START command). This is equivalent to setting Port in the  
Hardcopy menu.  
Group  
Hardcopy  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
HARDCopy, LIMit:HARDCopy  
HARDCopy:PORT { CENtronics | FILE (File System only) | GPIb |  
RS232 }  
HARDCopy:PORT?  
CENtronics  
FILE  
<Space>  
GPIb  
RS232  
HARDCopy  
:
PORT  
?
CENtronics specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the Centronics port (available  
with the RS232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface).  
FILE specifies that the hardcopy is stored in the file named in the HARDCO-  
PY:FILENAME command.  
GPIb specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the GPIB port.  
RS232 specifies that the hardcopy is sent out the RS232 port (Option 13  
RS232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface only).  
2–152  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
HARDCOPY:PORT?  
might return GPIB as the selected hardcopy output port.  
HDR  
This command is identical to the HEADer query and is included for compatibili-  
ty with older Tektronix instruments.  
Group  
Syntax  
Miscellaneous  
HDR { <NR1> | OFF | ON }  
HDR?  
<NR1>  
<Space>  
OFF  
ON  
HDR  
?
HEADer  
Sets and queries the Response Header Enable State that causes the digitizing  
oscilloscope to either include or omit headers on query responses. This command  
does not affect IEEE Std 488.2-1987 Common Commands (those starting with  
an asterisk); they never return headers.  
Group  
Miscellaneous  
VERBose  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
HEADer { <NR1> | OFF | ON }  
HEADer?  
2–153  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
<NR1>  
OFF  
<Space>  
ON  
HEADer  
?
Arguments  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to true. This causes the  
digitizing oscilloscope to include headers on applicable query responses. You can  
then use the query response as a command.  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false. This causes the  
digitizing oscilloscope to omit headers on query responses, so that only the  
argument is returned.  
Examples  
HEADER OFF  
causes the digitizing oscilloscope to omit headers from query responses.  
HEADER?  
might return the value 1, showing that the Response Header Enable State is true.  
HIStogram? (Query Only)  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Returns histogram parameters. In other words, it queries the state of all settable  
histogram parameters.  
Group  
Syntax  
Histogram  
HIStogram?  
HIStogram  
?
Example  
HISTOGRAM?  
might return  
:HISTOGRAM:SOURCE CH1;MODE VERTICAL;DISPLAY LOG;BOXPCNT  
30.0E+0,25.1E+0,70.0E+0,75.2E+0;SIZE 1.00E+0  
2–154  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
HIStogram:BOX  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Defines the left, top, right, and bottom positions of the histogram box, in source  
waveform coordinates.  
Group  
Histogram  
Syntax  
HIStogram:BOX <NR3> , <NR3> , <NR3> , <NR3>  
HORizontal:BOX?  
<NR1>  
,
<NR1>  
,
<NR1>  
,
HIStogram  
:
BOX  
<Space>  
?
<NR1>  
Arguments  
<NR3> is the left position of the histogram box, in source  
waveform coordinates  
<NR3> is the top position of the histogram box, in source  
waveform coordinates  
<NR3> is the right position of the histogram box, in source  
waveform coordinates  
<NR3> is the bottom position of the histogram box, in source  
waveform coordinates  
Examples  
HISTOGRM:BOX 1e-9, 0.250, 2e-9, 0.500  
would define the coordinates of the histogram box in source waveform coordi-  
nates.  
2–155  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
HIStogram:BOXPcnt  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Defines the left, top, right, and bottom positions of the histogram box, in  
percentage coordinates. The upper left has the value 0,0 and the lower right has  
the value 100, 100 when the horizontal trigger position is 50%.  
Group  
Syntax  
Histogram  
HIStogram:BOXPcnt <NR3> , <NR3> , <NR3> , <NR3>  
HORizontal:BOXPcnt?  
<NR1>  
,
<NR1>  
,
<NR1>  
,
HIStogram  
:
BOX  
<Space>  
?
<NR1>  
Arguments  
<NR3> The left position of the histogram box, in percentage  
coordinates. 30 is the default value.  
<NR3> The top position of the histogram box, in percentage  
coordinates. 75 is the default value.  
<NR3> The right position of the histogram box, in percentage  
coordinates. 70 is the default value.  
<NR3> The bottom position of the histogram box, in percentage  
coordinates. 25 is the default value.  
Examples  
HISTOGRM:BOXPCNT 50.2, 75.6, 50.8, 30.4  
would define the coordinates of the histogram box in percentage coordinates.  
2–156  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
HIStogram:COUNt  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Zeros the counts for histograms. If histograms are on then the counts start  
counting up again.  
Group  
Histogram  
Syntax  
HIStogram:COUNt RESET  
HIStogram  
:
COUNt  
<Space>  
RESET  
Arguments  
Examples  
RESET indicates the need to zero the count.  
HISTOGRAM:COUNT RESET  
would zero the count.  
HIStogram:DISplay  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Selects the way the histogram is displayed, if at all.  
Histogram  
Group  
Syntax  
HIStogram:DISplay { LINEAr | LOG | OFF }  
HORizontal:DISplay?  
LINEAr  
LOG  
OFF  
<Space>  
HIStogram  
:
DISplay  
?
Arguments  
LINEAr to display the count in each bin. This is the default value.  
LOG to display the log of the count in each bin. Log scaling provides better visual  
detail for bins with low count.  
2–157  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
OFF to turn off histogram displays. Histogram counting and measurements can  
continue. The histogram box is not turned off.  
Examples  
HISTOGRM:DISPLAY LINEAR  
would display the count in each bin.  
HIStogram:MODe  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Selects the type of histogram to create or turns the histogram off.  
Histogram  
Group  
Syntax  
HIStogram:MODe { OFF | HORizontal | VERTical }  
HORizontal:MODe?  
OFF  
<Space>  
HORizontal  
VERTical  
HIStogram  
:
MODe  
?
Arguments  
OFF means turn off. This is the default value.  
HORizontal means select a horizontally positioned histogram that shows time  
distribution.  
Sending this command with this argument will turn off the extended acquisition  
length and InstaVu modes.  
VERTical means select a vertically positioned histogram that shows voltage (or  
amps, etc.) distribution.  
Sending this command with this argument will turn off the extended acquisition  
length and InstaVu modes.  
Examples  
HISTOGRAM:MODE OFF  
would turn off the histogram mode.  
2–158  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
HIStogram:SIZe  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Controls the width or height of the histogram on the screen.  
Group  
Histogram  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
HIStogram:MODe  
HIStogram:SIZe <NR3>  
HIStogram:SIZe?  
<NR3>  
<Space>  
HIStogram  
:
SIZe  
?
Arguments  
<NR3> varies from 0.1 to 10.0 in div units. It varies from 0.1 to 8.0 in HORI-  
ZONTAL mode and from 0.1 to 10.0 in VERTICAL mode. Resolution is to the  
nearest pixel.  
Examples  
HISTOGRAM:SIZE 2.8  
would set the size of the histogram to 2.8 divs.  
HIStogram:SOUrce  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Selects which trace will be compared against the histogram box, when histo-  
grams are turned on. CH1–4 need not be ON for histograms to run. The user  
might want the CH OFF so he or she can see a full–screen histogram and not  
have waveform data confuse the display.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Histogram  
HIStogram:MODe  
HIStogram:SOUrce CH<x>  
HIStogram:SOUrce?  
2–159  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
CH<x>  
<Space>  
HIStogram  
:
SOUrce  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<x> indicates CH #. It may be 1, 2, 3, or 4.  
HISTOGRAM:SOURCE CH1  
would enable CH1 to be compared against the histogram box.  
HORizontal? (Query Only)  
Returns all settings for the horizontal commands. The commands HORizon-  
tal:MAIn:SCAle, HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv, HORizontal:SCAle, and HORi-  
zontal:SECdiv are equivalent so HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle is the only value that  
is returned.  
Group  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal?  
HORizontal  
?
Examples  
HORIZONTAL?  
might return the string :HORIZONTAL:MODE MAIN;RECORDLENGTH 500;  
POSITION 5.0E+0;TRIGGER:POSITION 50;:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE  
1.0E-6;:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE RUNSAFTER;SCALE 1.0E-6;TIME:  
16.0E-9  
HORizontal:ACQDURATION? (Query Only)  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Returns the overall time interval covered by the live channels. This works for  
both extended acquisition length mode on (acquisition length = # points) and off  
(record length = acquisition length = # points).  
Group  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:ACQDURATION?  
2–160  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ACQDURATION  
?
HORizontal  
:
Returns  
In seconds, # points * (time/point).  
The default is 5 ms.  
HORizontal:ACQLENGTH? (Query Only)  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Returns the acquisition length, either the extended one when the extended  
acquisition length mode is on or the record length when this mode is off.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:RECOrdlength  
HORizontal:ACQLENGTH?  
ACQLENGTH  
?
HORizontal  
:
Returns  
The acquisition length. 500 is the default value.  
Examples  
HORIZONTAL:ACQLENGTH? might return: 500  
HORizontal:CLOCk  
TDS 400A Only  
Enables either the internal or external clocks. The query returns whether the  
clock is set to internal or external.  
Group  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:CLOCk {INTernal | EXTernal }  
HORizontal:CLOCk?  
2–161  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
INTernal  
EXTernal  
<Space>  
HORizontal  
:
CLOCk  
?
Arguments  
INTernal enables the internal clock mode.  
EXTernal enables the external clock mode.  
Examples  
HORIZONTAL:CLOCK INTERNAL  
enables the internal clocks.  
HORizontal:CLOCk:MAXRate  
TDS 400A Only  
Sets the maximum external clock rate. It does not enable the external clock. The  
maximum external clock rate affects the decimation rate in Hi-Res mode.  
If set to less than or equal to 1000, this command enables roll mode when  
external clock is on and roll mode is set to auto.  
Group  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:CLOCk:MAXRate <NR3>  
HORizontal:CLOCk:MAXRate?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
HORizontal  
:
:
CLOCk  
MAXRate  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is rounded up to the nearest allowable external clock rate.  
HORIZONTAL:CLOCK:MAXRATE 50  
sets the maximum external clock rate to 50 clocks per second.  
2–162  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
HORizontal:DELay? (Query Only)  
Returns all horizontal delayed time base parameters. The commands HORizon-  
tal:DELay:SECdiv and HORizontal:DELay:SCAle are identical so only  
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle will be returned.  
Group  
Horizontal  
Related Commands  
HORizontal?, HORizontal:DELay:MODe?, HORizontal:DELay:SCAle?,  
HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv?, HORizontal:DELay:TIMe?  
Syntax  
HORizontal:DELay?  
HORizontal  
:
DELay  
?
Examples  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY?  
might return the delay parameters :HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE RUNSAFĆ  
TER;SCALE 1.0E-6;TIME: 16.0E-9  
HORizontal:DELay:MODe  
Selects the mode for the delayed time base. This is equivalent to setting Time  
Base in the Horizontal menu.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe  
HORizontal:DELay:MODe { RUNSAfter | TRIGAfter }  
HORizontal:DELay:MODe?  
RUNSAfter  
<Space>  
TRIGAfter  
?
HORizontal  
:
DELay  
:
MODe  
Arguments  
RUNSAfter specifies that the delayed time base runs a user-specified amount of  
delay time after the main trigger event.  
2–163  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGAfter specifies that the delayed time base is triggerable after the main time  
base triggers.  
Examples  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE?  
returns either RUNSAFTER or TRIGAFTER, indicating the delayed time base mode.  
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle  
Sets the time per division for the delayed time base. This is equivalent to setting  
Delayed Scale in the Horizontal Scale side menu.  
On the TDS 400A, changes made while the external clock is enabled do not take  
effect until the internal clock is enabled. Also, when the external clock is  
enabled, the query form of this command returns an <NR3> value representing  
‘50’.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv  
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle <NR3>  
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
HORizontal  
:
:
DELay  
SCAle  
Arguments  
<NR3> is the time per division. For the TDS 784C, the range is 10 s to 200 ps.  
For the other TDS 500C and 700C, the range is 10s to 500 ps. For the TDS  
600B, the range is 10 s to 200 ps. For the TDS 400A, the range is 20 s to 1 ns.  
These are values that are in a 1–2–5 sequence. Values that are not in a 1–2–5  
sequence (1–2.5–5 on the TDS 620B, 640B, & 644B) will be set to the closest  
valid value. If the delayed time base scale is set slower than the main time base  
scale, both the main and delayed time base scales will be set to the delay scale  
value.  
Examples  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 2.0E-6  
sets the delay scale to 2 ms per division.  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE 9.0E-6  
sets the delay scale to 10 ms per division. Since 9 ms is not a valid value within  
2–164  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
the 1–2–5 sequence (1–2.5–5 on the TDS 620B, 640B, & 644B), it is automati-  
cally set to the closest valid value.  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE?  
might return 1.0E-3, indicating that the delay time is 1 ms per division.  
HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv  
This command is identical to the HORizontal:DELay:SCAle command. It is  
provided to maintain program compatibility with some older models of  
Tektronix digitizing oscilloscopes.  
Group  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv <NR3>  
HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
HORizontal  
:
:
DELay  
SECdiv  
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe  
Sets or queries the delay time to wait after the main trigger before the delayed  
time base begins. This is equivalent to setting Delayed Runs After Main in the  
Time Base side menu of the Horizontal menu.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:DELay:MODe  
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe <NR3>  
HORizontal  
:
DELay  
:
TIMe  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
Arguments  
<NR3> is the time, in seconds, between the main trigger and the delayed trigger.  
The range on the TDS 510A, 500B, 600B, & 700A is from 16 ns to 250 seconds  
with a resolution of 4 ns. The range on the TDS 400A is from 10 ns to 20  
seconds with a resolution of 10 ns.  
2–165  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME 2.0E-3  
sets the delay time between the main and delayed time base to 2 ms.  
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe? (Query Only)  
Returns the delay time parameters.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter?, HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter?  
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe?  
HORizontal  
:
DELay  
:
TIMe  
?
Examples  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME?  
might return :HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:16.0E-9 for the delay time.  
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter  
Sets or queries the delay time to wait after the main trigger before the delayed  
time base begins. This is equivalent to setting Delayed Runs After Main in the  
Time Base side menu of the Horizontal menu.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:DELay:MODe  
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter <NR3>  
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:RUNSAfter?  
2–166  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
HORizontal  
:
DELay  
:
TIMe  
:
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
RUNSAfter  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the time, in seconds, between the main trigger and the delayed trigger.  
The range is from 16 ns (10 ns on the TDS 400A) to 250 seconds (20 s on the  
TDS 400A) with a resolution of 4 ns.  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:RUNSAFTER 2.0E-3  
sets the delay time between the main and delayed time base to 2 ms.  
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter  
Sets the delay time to wait in the trigger after delay mode. This is the time that  
must pass before a delayed trigger is accepted. This command is equivalent to  
setting Delay by Time time in the Delayed Trigger menu.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:DELay:MODe  
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter <NR3>  
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe:TRIGAfter?  
HORizontal  
:
DELay  
:
:
TIMe  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
TRIGAfter  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the delay time, in seconds. The range is from 16 ns (60 ns on the  
TDS 400A) to 250 seconds (20 s on the TDS 400A) with a resolution of 4 ns  
(10 ns down to 110 ns on the TDS 400A).  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:TRIGAFTER 4.0E-6  
sets the delay time to 4 ms.  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:TRIGAFTER?  
might return 1.000E-3, indicating that the delay time is 1 ms.  
2–167  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
HORizontal:EXTDACQ  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Enable or disable extended-acquisition-length mode. The InstaVu display mode  
must be off in order to turn the extended-acquisition-length mode on.  
Group  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:EXTDACQ { <NR1> | OFF | ON }  
HORizontal:EXTDACQ?  
<NR1>  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
HORizontal  
:
EXTDACQ  
?
Arguments  
<NR1> indicates OFF if it’s a 0 or ON if it’s a 1 (or any other nonzero value).  
ON means turn on.  
OFF means turn off.  
Returns  
The query form only returns 0 or 1. The default is 0.  
Examples  
HORIZONTAL:EXTDACQ ON would enable extended-acquisition-length mode  
(if InstaVu was not on).  
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt  
TDS 500C & 700A Only  
Sets or queries FastFrame frame count. This is equivalent to setting FastFrame  
Setup in the Horizontal menu and the Frame Count menu item in the side  
menu. FastFrame, also known as memory segmentation, captures a series of  
triggered acquisitions with minimal, intervening, time.  
Group  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt <NR1>  
2–168  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
HORizontal  
:
:
FASTframe  
COUNt  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> indicates the number of frames to acquire.  
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT 2  
Sets up FastFrame mode to acquire two frames (segments) of data.  
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth  
TDS 500C & 700A Only  
Setup length of each FastFrame frame. This is equivalent to setting FastFrame  
Setup in the Horizontal menu and the Frame Length menu item in the side  
menu. FastFrame, also known as memory segmentation, lets users capture a  
series of triggered acquisitions with minimal, intervening, time between them.  
Group  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth <NR1>  
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
HORizontal  
:
:
FASTframe  
LENgth  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> indicates the frame (segment) length.  
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:LENGTH 250  
Sets up the FastFrame mode to acquire frames of 250 samples each.  
HORizontal:FASTframe:POSition  
TDS 500C & 700A Only  
Display the selected FastFrame frame. This is equivalent to selecting Horiz Pos  
in the Horizontal menu, selecting the Frame menu item in the side menu, and  
entering a value with the keypad or the general purpose knob. FastFrame, also  
2–169  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
known as memory segmentation, lets users capture a series of triggered  
acquisitions with minimal, intervening, time between them.  
Group  
Horizontal  
Syntax  
HORizontal:FASTframe:POSition <NR1>  
HORizontal:FASTframe:POSition?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
HORizontal  
:
:
FASTframe  
POSition  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> indicates the selected frame to display.  
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:POSITION 25  
Selects the 25th FastFrame frame to display.  
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE  
TDS 500C & 700A Only  
Setup FastFrame acquisition. This is equivalent to setting FastFrame Setup in  
the Horizontal menu and the FastFrame menu item in the side menu. Fast-  
Frame, also known as memory segmentation, lets users capture a series of  
triggered acquisitions with minimal time between them.  
The digitizing oscilloscope in FastFrame mode is ready to accept a continuous  
burst of triggers 400 ms after the controller sends the acquire:state run  
command.  
When extended-acquisition-length mode or InstaVu mode is on, this command  
can still set and return values. However, this feature will not actually function.  
Group  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE { <NR1> | OFF | ON }  
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE?  
2–170  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
<NR1>  
OFF  
<Space>  
HORizontal  
:
:
FASTframe  
STATE  
ON  
?
Arguments  
<NR1> indicates OFF if it’s a 0 or ON if it’s a 1 (or any other nonzero value).  
ON means turn on FastFrame.  
OFF means turn off FastFrame.  
The query form only returns 0 or 1.  
Examples  
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE ON  
turns on FastFrame.  
HORizontal:FITtoscreen  
Setup horizontal waveform compress operation. This command is equivalent to  
setting Record Length in the Horizontal menu and the Fit to screen menu item  
in the side menu. Waveform compress lets you fit a captured waveform to the  
visible screen. It provides the same functionality as if you were in zoom mode  
and changed the time per division until the waveform fit the screen.  
In extended-acquisition-length mode, entering the zoom preview state causes  
fit-to-screen to be on. If the oscilloscope exits the extended-acquisition-length  
mode or the zoom preview state, the fit-to-screen mode returns back to its prior  
setting.  
Group  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:FITtoscreen { <NR1> | OFF | ON }  
HORizontal:FITtoscreen?  
<NR1>  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
HORizontal  
:
FITtoscreen  
?
Arguments  
<NR1> indicates OFF if it’s a 0. It indicates ON if it’s a non-zero value.  
2–171  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ON means turn on waveform compress.  
OFF means turn off waveform compress.  
Examples  
HORIZONTAL:FITTOSCREEN ON  
turns on waveform compress.  
HORizontal:MAIn? (Query Only)  
Returns the time per division of the main time base. The commands HORizon-  
tal:MAIn:SECdiv and HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle are identical so only HORizon-  
tal:MAIn:SCAle will be returned.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:SCAle, HORizontal:SECdiv, HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv  
HORizontal:MAIn?  
HORizontal  
:
?
MAIn  
Examples  
HORIZONTAL:MAIN?  
might return :HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE 1.0E-6.  
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle  
Sets the time per division for the main time base. This command is equivalent to  
setting Main Scale in the Horizontal Scale side menu.  
On the TDS 400A, changes made while the external clock is enabled do not take  
effect until the internal clock is enabled. Also, when the external clock is  
enabled, the query form of this command returns an <NR3> value representing  
‘50’.  
Group  
Horizontal  
Related Commands  
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle, HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv, HORizon-  
tal:MAIn:SECdiv  
2–172  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle <NR3>  
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
HORizontal  
:
:
MAIn  
SCAle  
Arguments  
<NR3> is the time per division. For the TDS 400A series, the range is 20 s to  
1 ns. For the TDS 510A, 500B, 600B, and 700A, the range is 10 s to 500 ps (or  
200 ps on the TDS 784A), in a 1–2–5 sequence.  
In extended-acquisition-length mode, no matter what value you set, the  
oscilloscope will only use the closest real-time, non-interpolated value.  
Examples  
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE 2E-6  
sets the main scale to 2 ms per division.  
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv  
Sets the time per division for the main time base. This command is identical to  
the HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle command. It is provided to maintain program  
compatibility with some older models of Tektronix digitizing oscilloscopes.  
Group  
Horizontal  
Related Commands  
HORizontal:DELay:SCAle, HORizontal:DELay:SECdiv, HORizon-  
tal:MAIn:SCAle  
Syntax  
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv <NR3>  
HORizontal:MAIn:SECdiv?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
HORizontal  
:
:
MAIn  
SECdiv  
HORizontal:MODe  
Selects whether the horizontal display uses the main or delayed time base or  
both. This command is equivalent to setting Time Base in the Horizontal menu.  
2–173  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Horizontal  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast  
HORizontal:MODe { DELAYEd | INTENSIFied | MAIn }  
HORizontal:MODe?  
DELAYEd  
<Space>  
INTENSIFied  
MAIn  
HORizontal  
:
MODe  
?
Arguments  
DELAYEd means that the selected waveform is horizontally scaled relative to the  
delayed time base.  
INTENSIFied uses both the main and delay scales to display the waveform. The  
portion of the waveform that would be displayed in DELAYEd mode is  
intensified. The level of intensity is set by the DISplay:INTENSITy:CONTRast  
command.  
MAIn means that the waveform is horizontally scaled relative to the main time  
base.  
Examples  
HORIZONTAL:MODE DELAYED  
uses the delayed horizontal scale to display the waveform.  
HORIZONTAL:MODE?  
might return INTENSIFIED, indicating that the waveform is displayed using both  
the main and delayed time base scale.  
HORizontal:POSition  
Positions the waveform horizontally on the display. This is used for both main  
and delayed time bases. This command is equivalent to adjusting the front-panel  
Horizontal Position knob or setting the position in the Horizontal Position side  
menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:POSition <NR3>  
2–174  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
HORizontal:POSition?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
HORizontal  
:
POSition  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is from 0 to 100, and is the percent of the waveform that is displayed left  
of the center graticule.  
In extended-acquisition-length mode, it is the percent of the acquisition that is  
displayed left of the center graticule.  
HORIZONTAL:POSITION 10  
sets the horizontal position of the waveform such that 10% of the waveform is to  
the left of screen center.  
HORizontal:RECORDLength  
Sets the number of data points that are acquired for each record. This is  
equivalent to setting Record Length in the Horizontal menu.  
When extended-acquisition-length mode is on, this command can still set and  
return values. However, this feature will not actually work while extended-ac-  
quisition-length mode is on.  
Group  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:RECORDLength <NR1>  
HORizontal:RECORDLength?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
:
RECORDLength  
HORizontal  
Arguments  
Table 2–32 shows supported values for <NR1>.  
2–175  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Table 2–32: Record Length Values (<NR1>)  
TDS 420A,  
TDS 430A,  
TDS 460A  
TDS 510A,  
TDS 520C,  
TDS 724C  
TDS 540C,  
TDS 754C,  
TDS 784C  
Configuration  
TDS 600B  
Standard  
500,  
500,  
500,  
500,  
1000,  
2500,  
5000,  
15000,  
30000  
1000,  
2500,  
5000,  
15000  
50000  
1000,  
2500,  
5000,  
15000  
1000,  
2500,  
5000,  
15000,  
50000  
Option 1M  
(not on the TDS 120000  
510A)  
or 2M  
(TDS 500C &  
700C only)  
60000,  
TDS 520C &  
724C:  
75000,  
100000,  
130000,  
250000  
75000,  
100000,  
130000,  
250000,  
500000  
Examples  
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 2500  
specifies that 2500 data points will be acquired for each record.  
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH?  
might return 15000 as the number of data points per record.  
HORizontal:RECORDSTART  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Set the selected live channel’s record start that is to be used in the extended-ac-  
quisition–length mode. In other words, it indicates where the waveform starts  
within the extended acquisition record (see Figure 2–4 on page 2–41).  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:POSition  
HORizontal:RECORDSTART <NR3>  
HORizontal:RECORDSTART?  
2–176  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
<NR3>  
<Space>  
HORizontal  
:
RECORDSTART  
?
Arguments  
<NR3> is the units of percent. It ranges from 0% to 93.75% (for 4M and 8M) or  
95% (for 2M).  
If fit-to-screen is on or extreme zoom factors are on, then the recordstart is  
automatically set to 0.  
Returns  
The query form returns a value from 0 to 93.75 (%) for 4M and 8M or 95 (%) for  
2M. This is the figure for a specific sample.  
Examples  
HORIZONTAL:RECORDSTART 23 would set the record to start at 23%.  
HORizontal:ROLL  
TDS 400A Only  
Sets roll mode to auto or off.  
Horizontal  
Group  
Syntax  
HORizontal:ROLL { ON | OFF | <NR1> }  
HORizontal:ROLL?  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
HORizontal  
:
ROLL  
?
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
HORizontal  
:
ROLL  
Arguments  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off roll mode.  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 turns on roll mode – if the time/division is set appropriately.  
2–177  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
HORizontal:SCAle  
Sets the time per division for the main time base and is identical to the HORi-  
zontal:MAIn:SCAle command. It is included here for compatibility purposes.  
Group  
Horizontal  
Syntax  
HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>  
HORizontal:SCAle?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
HORizontal  
:
SCAle  
HORizontal:SECdiv  
Sets the time per division for the main time base and is identical to the HORi-  
zontal:MAIn:SCAle command. It is included here for compatibility purposes.  
Group  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:SECdiv <NR3>  
HORizontal:SECdiv?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
HORizontal  
:
SECdiv  
HORizontal:TRIGger? (Query Only)  
Returns the horizontal trigger parameter.  
Group  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:TRIGger?  
:
?
TRIGger  
HORizontal  
2–178  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER?  
might return :HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER:POSITION 50.  
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition  
Sets or queries the position of the trigger. This is equivalent to setting Trigger  
Position in the Horizontal menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Horizontal  
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition <NR1>  
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
HORizontal  
:
TRIGger  
:
POSition  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> is from 0 to 100 % and is the amount of pretrigger information in the  
waveform (or extended acquisition length, if used).  
HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER:POSITION?  
might return 50.  
2–179  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ID? (Query Only)  
Returns identifying information about the instrument and its firmware.  
Group  
Status and Error  
*IDN?  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
ID?  
ID  
?
Returns  
Examples  
The instrument id in the following format:  
TEK/<model number>,CF:92.1CT,FV:<firmware version number>  
ID?  
might return ID TEK/TDS 784C,CF:91.1CT,FV:v5.0e  
*IDN? (Query Only)  
Returns the digitizing oscilloscope identification code.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Miscellaneous  
ID  
*IDN?  
*IDN  
?
Returns  
The instrument id in the following format:  
TEKTRONIX,<model number>,0,CF:92.1CT FV:<firmware version  
number>  
Examples  
*IDN?  
might return the response  
TEKTRONIX,TDS 544A,0,CF:92.1CT FV:2.0  
2–180  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
LIMit:BELl  
Rings the bell when the waveform data exceeds the limits set in the limit test, if  
the limit state is on.  
Group  
Limit Test  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>, LIMit:STATE  
LIMit:BELl { OFF | ON | <NR1> }  
LIMit:BELl?  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
LIMit  
:
BELl  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off ringing the bell when any waveform data exceeds the  
limits set by the limit test.  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 turns on ringing the bell.  
LIMit:BELl ON  
specifies that the bell is to ring when any waveform data exceeds the limits  
specified in the limit test.  
LIMit:BELl?  
returns either 0 or 1, indicating whether the bell is to ring when any waveform  
data exceeds the limits specified in the limit test.  
LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>  
Sets or queries the template against which to compare the waveform acquired  
through the specified channel. The template can be a waveform saved in any of  
the reference locations REF1 through REF4, or none.  
Group  
Limit Test  
2–181  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
CURve, LIMit:COMPARE:MATH<x>, LIMit:TEMPLate, LIMit:TEM-  
PLate:DESTination, LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce, WFMPre  
LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x> { NONe | REF<x> }  
LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>?  
NONe  
<Space>  
REF  
?
<x>  
LIMit  
:
COMPARE  
CH  
<x>  
:
Arguments  
Examples  
REF<x> is a reference waveform.  
NONe specifies that no template testing is to be done for the specified channel.  
LIMIT:COMPARE:CH1 REF1  
specifies REF1 as the template waveform against which to compare waveforms  
acquired using CH1.  
LIMIT:COMPARE:CH2?  
might return LIMIT:COMPARE:CH2 REF4, indicating that waveforms acquired  
using CH2 will be compared to the template waveform stored in REF4.  
LIMit:COMPARE:MATH<x>  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the template against which to compare a math waveform. The  
template can be a waveform saved in any of the reference locations REF1  
through REF4, or none.  
Group  
Limit Test  
Related Commands  
CURve,LIMit:TEMPLate, LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination, LIMit:TEM-  
PLate:SOUrce, WFMPre  
Syntax  
LIMit:COMPARE:MATH<x> { NONe | REF<x> }  
LIMit:COMPARE:MATH<x>?  
2–182  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
NONe  
<Space>  
REF  
?
<x>  
LIMit  
:
COMPARE  
MATH  
<x>  
:
Arguments  
Examples  
REF<x> is a reference waveform.  
NONe specifies that no template testing is to be done for the specified channel.  
MATH<x> is a math waveform.  
LIMIT:COMPARE:MATH1 REF1  
specifies REF1 as the template waveform against which to compare waveforms  
acquired using MATH1.  
LIMIT:COMPARE:MATH2?  
might return LIMIT:COMPARE:MATH2 REF4, indicating that waveforms acquired  
using MATH2 will be compared to the template waveform stored in REF4.  
LIMit:HARDCopy  
Executes a hardcopy operation on the waveform when any waveform data  
exceeds the limits set in the limit test, if the limit state is on. The hardcopy  
operation uses the port, and prints in the format and layout, specified using the  
HARDCopy commands.  
Group  
Limit Test  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>, LIMit:STATE, HARDCopy  
LIMit:HARDCopy{ OFF | ON | <NR1> }  
LIMit:HARDCopy?  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
LIMit  
:
HARDCopy  
?
2–183  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Arguments  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 turns on the hardcopy operation for the waveform when any  
waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test.  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the hardcopy operation.  
Examples  
LIMit:HARDCopy ON  
specifies that the hardcopy operation occurs for the waveform when any  
waveform data exceeds the limits specified in the limit test.  
LIMit:HARDCopy?  
returns either 0 or 1, indicating whether the hardcopy operation occurs for the  
waveform when any waveform data exceeds the limits specified in the limit test.  
LIMit:STATE  
Turns limit testing on or off, or queries whether limit testing is in effect.  
When extended–acquisition–length mode or InstaVu mode is on, this command  
can still set and return values. However, this feature will not actually function.  
You cannot turn limit:state to on when extended–acquisition-length mode is  
already on.  
Group  
Limit Test  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
CURve, LIMit:BELl, LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>, LIMit:HARDCopy, LIM-  
it:TEMPLate, WFMPre  
LIMit:STATE { OFF | ON | <NR1> }  
LIMit:STATE?  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
LIMit  
:
STATE  
?
Arguments  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off limit testing.  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 turns on limit testing.  
2–184  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
LIMit:STATE ON  
specifies that limit testing of waveforms is in effect.  
LIMit:STATE?  
returns either 0 or 1, indicating whether limit testing of waveforms is in effect.  
LIMit:TEMPLate (No Query Form)  
Creates a template which you can use for limit testing. You can compare the  
waveform acquired through the specified channel against this template. The  
template can be a waveform saved in any of the reference locations REF1  
through REF4, or none.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Limit Test  
LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination, LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce  
LIMit:TEMPLate STORe  
LIMit  
:
TEMPLate  
<Space>  
STORe  
Arguments  
Examples  
STORe creates a template with the specified source waveform and tolerances, and  
stores it in the destination reference waveform to be used in limit testing  
comparisons.  
LIMIT:TEMPLate STORe  
creates a template with the specified source waveform and tolerances, and stores  
it in the destination reference waveform to be used in limit testing comparisons.  
LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination  
Sets or queries the destination reference waveform that the LIMit:TEMPLate  
STORe command will use.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Limit Test  
LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>, LIMit:TEMPLate, LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce  
LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination REF<x>  
2–185  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination?  
<Space>  
<x>  
REF  
LIMit  
:
TEMPLate  
:
DESTination  
?
Arguments  
REF<x> specifies the reference waveform destination in which the template  
waveform is to be stored.  
Examples  
LIMIT:TEMPLate:DESTination REF2  
specifies that the template waveform referred to with the LIMit:TEMPLate  
STORe command is stored as the REF2 waveform.  
LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce  
Sets or queries the channel, math waveform, or reference waveform that the  
LIMit:TEMPLate STORe will use.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Limit Test  
LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>, LIMit:TEMPLate, LIMit:TEMPLate:DESTination  
LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce {CH<x> | MATH<x> | REF<x> }  
LIMit:TEMPLate:SOUrce?  
CH  
MATH  
REF  
<x>  
<Space>  
LIMIT  
:
TEMPLate  
:
SOUrce  
?
Arguments  
CH<x> specifies that the template waveform is the waveform currently being  
acquired using the specified channel.  
MATH<x> specifies that the template waveform is the waveform currently stored  
as the specified math waveform.  
REF<x> specifies that the template waveform is the waveform currently stored as  
the specified reference waveform.  
2–186  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
LIMIT:TEMPLate:SOUrce CH2  
specifies that the template waveform for limit tests is the waveform currently  
acquired using channel 2.  
LIMIT:TEMPLate:SOUrce?  
might return MATH3, specifying that the template waveform for limit tests is the  
waveform currently stored as the MATH3 waveform.  
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal  
Sets or queries the amount, in units of horizontal divisions, by which the source  
waveform is varied horizontally when creating the destination waveform.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Limit Test  
LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>  
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal <NR3>  
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal?  
LIMit  
:
TEMPLate  
:
TOLerance  
:
HORizontal  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the amount, in horizontal divisions, by which the current waveform is  
allowed to deviate from the template waveform without exceeding the limits set  
in the limit test. The range is 0 to 5 divisions.  
LIMIT:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal 1.0  
specifies that the current waveform is deemed to be close enough to the template  
waveform if it is within ±1.0 horizontal division.  
LIMIT:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal?  
might return 1.0, specifying that the current waveform is close enough to the  
template waveform if it is within ±1.0 horizontal division.  
2–187  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical  
Sets or queries the amount, in units of vertical divisions, by which the source  
waveform is varied vertically when creating the destination waveform.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Limit Test  
LIMit:COMPARE:CH<x>  
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical <NR3>  
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical?  
LIMit  
:
TEMPLate  
:
TOLerance  
:
VERTical  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the amount, in vertical divisions, by which the current waveform is  
allowed to deviate from the template waveform without exceeding the limits set  
in the limit test. The range is 0 to 5 divisions.  
LIMIT:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical 1.0  
specifies that the current waveform is close enough to the template waveform if  
it is within ±1.0 vertical division from the template waveform.  
LIMIT:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical?  
might return 1.0, specifying that the current waveform is close enough to the  
template waveform if it is within ±1.0 vertical division.  
LOCk  
Enables and disables all front panel buttons and knobs. There is no front-panel  
equivalent.  
Group  
Miscellaneous  
Related Commands  
UNLock, Remote Enable Group, Local Lockout Group  
2–188  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
LOCk { ALL | NONe }  
LOCk?  
ALL  
<Space>  
NONe  
LOCk  
?
Arguments  
ALL disables all front panel controls.  
NONe enables all front panel controls. This is equivalent to the UNLock ALL  
command.  
NOTE. If the digitizing oscilloscope is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS),  
the LOCk NONe command has no effect. For more information see the ANSI-  
IEEE Std. 488.1-1987 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumen-  
tation, section 2.8.3 on RL State Descriptions.  
Examples  
LOCK ALL  
locks the front panel controls.  
LOCK?  
returns NONe when the front panel controls are enabled by this command.  
*LRN? (Query Only)  
Returns a string listing the digitizing oscilloscope settings, except for configura-  
tion information for the calibration values. You can use this string to return the  
digitizing oscilloscope to the state it was in when you made the *LRN? query.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Miscellaneous  
HEADer, SET?, VERBose  
*LRN?  
*LRN  
?
2–189  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
NOTE. The *LRN? query always returns a string including command headers,  
regardless of the setting of the HEADer command. This is because the returned  
string is intended to be sent back to the digitizing oscilloscope as a command  
string. The VERBose command can still be used normally to specify whether the  
returned headers should be abbreviated.  
Examples  
*LRN?  
a partial response might look like this:  
:ACQUIRE:STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG 16;  
REPET 1;STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;:DIAG:LOOP:OPTION ONCE;  
COUNT 1;:DIAG:STATE HALT;:HEADER 1;:VERBOSE 1;  
:CURSOR:FUNCTION OFF;VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;  
POSITION1 1.00E-6;POSITION2 9.00E-6;SELECT CURSOR1;  
MASK? (Query Only)  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Returns the state of all settable mask parameters.  
Group  
Syntax  
Mask  
MASK?  
?
MASK  
Returns  
<NR3>  
Examples  
Mask?  
might return  
:MASK:MASK1:POINTSP  
11.400000000E+0,12.531328321E+0,8.820e+01,1.253e+01,8.840e+01,0.0  
E+0,1.120e+01,0.0E+0;:MASK:MASK2:POINTSP  
22.800000000E+0,50.125313283E+0,3.820e+01,6.617e+01,6.140e+01,6.6  
17e+01,7.680e+01,5.013e+01,6.140e+01,3.383e+01,3.820e+01,3.383e+0  
1;:MASK:MASK3:POINTSP  
11.400000000E+0,87.719298246E+0,8.820e+01,8.772e+01,8.840e+01,1.0  
03e+02,1.120e+01,1.003e+02;:MASK:MASK4:POINTSP  
0.0E+0,0.0E+0;:MASK:MASK5:POINTSP  
0.0E+0,0.0E+0;:MASK:MASK6:POINTSP  
0.0E+0,0.0E+0;:MASK:MASK7:POINTSP  
2–190  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
0.0E+0,0.0E+0;:MASK:MASK8:POINTSP 0.0E+0,0.0E+0;:MASK:STAN  
OC1;DIS 1;COUN:STATE 0;:MASK:FILT ENA;AUTOS:OFFSETA 1;MOD  
MAN;:MASK:SOU CH1;TBP 0.0E+0  
MASK:AUTOSet:MODe  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Controls whether or not an autoset will automatically be done after a standard  
mask is selected.  
Group  
Syntax  
Mask  
MASK:AUTOSet:MODe { AUTO | MANual }  
MASK:AUTOSet:MODe?  
AUTO  
<Space>  
MANual  
:
MASK  
:
AUTOSet  
MODe  
?
Arguments  
AUTO makes autoset run automatically when a standard mask is selected from the  
front panel. Autoset does not keep running. It runs once when a standard is  
selected.  
MANual means that the mask autoset algorithm for a standard mask will be run  
only if the user presses the autoset button or sends the AUTOSET START  
command. If a standard mask is not currently selected, the mask autoset  
algorithm will not run and the normal autoset will run when the user presses the  
autoset button. Manual is the default value.  
Examples  
MASK:AUTOSET:MODE AUTO  
makes autoset run automatically when a standard mask is selected from the front  
panel.  
MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Controls whether or not a standard mask autoset has the freedom to adjust  
vertical offset so the waveform matches the mask. This can be needed if ground  
(0 V) in the oscilloscope does not match ground for the user’s signal. For the  
2–191  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
following standards, offset will not be adjusted if this feature is OFF: T1.102,  
DS–0, E2, E2, and E3. For all other standards, offset will be adjusted regardless  
of how this feature is set.  
Group  
Syntax  
Mask  
MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj { ON | OFF | <NR1> }  
MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj?  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
:
MASK  
:
OFFSETAdj  
AUTOSet  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 takes away a standard mask autoset’s freedom to adjust vertical  
offset for standard masks. This is the default value.  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 gives a standard mask autoset the freedom to adjust vertical  
offset for standard masks.  
MASK:AUTOSET:OFFSETADJ ON  
gives a standard mask autoset the freedom to adjust vertical offset for standard  
masks.  
MASK:COUNt  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Zeros the counts for the masks.  
Mask  
Group  
Syntax  
MASK:COUNt RESET  
:
MASK  
RESET  
COUNt  
<Space>  
Arguments  
<RESET> zeros the mask counts.  
2–192  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
MASK:COUNT RESET  
clears the mask counts.  
MASK:COUNt:STATE  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Controls whether or not mask counting is being done.  
Mask  
Group  
Syntax  
MASK:COUNt:STATE { ON | OFF | <NR1> }  
MASK:COUNt:STATE?  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
:
MASK  
:
STATE  
COUNt  
?
Arguments  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off mask counting. This is the default state.  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 turns on mask counting.  
Examples  
MASK:COUNT:STATE ON  
turns on mask counting.  
MASK:COUNt:TOTal? (Query Only)  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Returns the sum of all the hits in all the defined masks. If masks overlap (no  
standard masks overlap) and a hit occurs in the overlap region, the total hits will  
count that hit multiple times. It returns the current value, which may be  
displayed if the correct mask menu is up, of this number.  
Group  
Syntax  
Mask  
MASK:COUNt:TOTal?  
2–193  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
:
?
MASK  
COUNt  
TOTal  
Returns  
<NR1>  
MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS? (Query Only)  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Returns the number of waveforms that have contributed to mask counting. This  
can be much smaller than the ACQUIRE:NUMACQ number since the acquire  
number just counts how many triggers have been processed. The time per div  
may be fast enough that 100 or more triggers are required to be processed to fill  
one waveform. Even then, it may not be completely filled.  
Group  
Syntax  
Mask  
MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS?  
:
?
MASK  
WAVEFORMS  
COUNt  
Returns  
<NR1>  
Examples  
MASK:COUNT:WAVEFORMS?  
might return: MASK:COUNT:WAVEFORMS 286568  
MASK:DISplay  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Controls whether or not defined masks are displayed on the screen. This is useful  
for temporarily turning off user-defined masks without deleting them.  
Group  
Syntax  
Mask  
MASK:DISplay {OFF | ON | <NR1> }  
MASK:DISplay?  
2–194  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
DISplay  
MASK  
:
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<OFF> or <NR1> = 0 removes the masks from the display.  
<ON> or <NR1> ꢀ 0 displays the masks on the display. This is the default value.  
MASK:DISPLAY ON  
sets the display to show the defined masks.  
MASK:DISPLAY?  
might return 1 indicating that the display shows masks.  
MASK:FILTer  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Controls whether or not a digital filter will be run on the waveform data. The  
filter simulates expensive optical hardware. Different hardware would be used  
for each of the optical standards. The digital filter will run only if ENABLE is  
the mode and one of the optical eye-pattern standard masks has been selected,  
and several other restrictions. These other restrictions are:  
H
One of the seven optical standards has been selected in the Measure/Masks/  
MaskType/Standard Mask menu. In other words, any of the three SONET  
SDH or any of the four fibre channel standards from the Fibre Chan menu  
are selected.  
H
H
The SONET/SDH MASK menu contains a provision for enabling or  
disabling the filter. This selection must be ENABLE  
The time per division setting is the correct value for the mask which has  
been selected  
H
H
The record length is equal to 500  
Only one channel is on. Mask autoset may force channels off in order to  
allow the mask to be turned on  
H
The oscilloscope bandwidth must be set to full  
Group  
Mask  
2–195  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
MASK:FILTer { ENAbled | DISAbled }  
MASK:FILTER?  
ENAbled  
<Space>  
DISAbled  
:
MASK  
FILTer  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
ENAbled enables the digital filter. This is the default value.  
DISAbled disables the digital filter.  
MASK:FILTER ENABLED  
enables the digital filter.  
MASK:MASK<n>? (Query Only)  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Returns the state of all settable parameters of the specified mask.  
Group  
Syntax  
Mask  
MASK:MASK<NR1>?  
:
?
MASK  
<NR1>  
MASK  
Returns  
<NR1> is 1 to 8.  
Examples  
MASK:MASK1?  
might return  
:MASK:MASK1:POINTSP  
11.400000000E+0,12.531328321E+0,8.820e+01,1.253e+01,8.840e+01,0.0  
E+0,1.120e+01,0.0E+0  
MASK:MASK<n>  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Deletes all points in the specified mask.  
2–196  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Syntax  
Mask  
MASK:MASK<NR1> DELEte  
:
MASK  
<NR1>  
MASK  
DELEte  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> is 1 to 8.  
MASK:MASK3 DELETE  
deletes the points in mask 3.  
MASK:MASK<n>:COUNt? (Query Only)  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Returns the number of hits in the specified mask. This will be zero unless the  
MASK:COUNT:STATE is ON (or was ON).  
Group  
Syntax  
MASK  
Mask  
MASK:MASK<NR1>:COUNt?  
:
?
MASK  
<NR1>  
:
COUNt  
Returns  
Examples  
<NR1> is 1 to 8. The default is 0.  
MASK:MASK3:COUNT?  
might return: MASK:MASK3:COUNT 1478  
MASK:MASK<n>:NR_Pt? (Query Only)  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Returns the number of points in the specified mask. One use of this query is to  
see how many pairs a MASK:MASK<n>:POINTSPCNT command will return.  
Group  
Syntax  
Mask  
MASK:MASK<NR1>:NR_Pt?  
2–197  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
:
?
MASK  
<NR1>  
:
MASK  
NR_Pt  
Returns  
<NR1> is 1 to 8. The default is 0.  
Examples  
MASK:MASK3:NR_PT?  
might return: MASK:MASK:NR_PT 5  
MASK:MASK<n>:POINTS  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Defines points in the specified mask, in user coordinates. Any currently existing  
points in the mask are deleted.  
Group  
Syntax  
Mask  
MASK:MASK<NR1>:POINTS <NR3>, <NR3> [, <NR3>, <NR3> ]  
MASK:MASK<NR1>:POINTS?  
<NR1>  
,
<NR1>  
,
<NR1>  
,
:
:
MASK  
<NR1>  
POINTS  
MASK  
<Space>  
?
<NR1>  
Arguments  
<NR1> is 1 to 8.  
NR3 refers to the coordinates of one of the vertexes in the mask. Each pair of  
<NR3> is the horizontal and vertical coordinates of a mask vertex. The order of  
the pairs has no effect on the mask created. If the vertical or horizontal scale or  
position is changed after this command and then the query form of this command  
is issued, then the <NR3> returned from the TDS oscilloscope will not be the  
same. The general rule for how the boundary of the mask is generated from the  
input pairs is that an imaginary line connects the top-left point with the  
bottom-right point. All points below this imaginary line are part of the bottom  
boundary curve. All other points are part of the top boundary curve. If just one  
2–198  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
pair is input then they are ignored and the mask is marked as undefined. The  
default is no points in the mask.  
Examples  
MASK:MASK7:POINTS -2.3e-9, 44e-3, -2.5e-9, 47e-3, 1.2e-9, 40e-3  
defines the points in mask 7.  
MASK:MASK<n>:POINTSPcnt  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Defines points in the specified mask, in percentage coordinates. The upper left is  
0,0 and the lower right is 100,100. Any currently existing points in the mask are  
deleted.  
Group  
Syntax  
Mask  
MASK:MASK<NR1>:POINTSPcnt <NR3>, <NR3> [, <NR3>, <NR3> ]  
MASK:MASK<NR1>:POINTSPcnt?  
<NR1>  
,
<NR1>  
,
<NR1>  
,
:
:
MASK  
<NR1>  
POINTSPcnt  
MASK  
<Space>  
?
<NR1>  
Arguments  
<NR1> is 1 to 8.  
NR3 refers to the coordinates of one of the vertexes in the mask. Each pair of  
<NR3> is the horizontal and vertical coordinates of a mask vertex. The order of  
the pairs has no effect on the mask created. Resolution of the <NR3> is to the  
nearest pixel. 500 pixels horizontal implies 0.2%. 200 pixels vertical implies  
0.5%. The general rule for how the boundary of the mask is generated from the  
input pairs is that an imaginary line connects the top-left point with the  
bottom-right point. All points below this imaginary line are part of the bottom  
boundary curve. All other points are part of the top boundary curve. If just one  
pair is input then they are ignored and the mask is marked as undefined. The  
default is no points in the mask.  
2–199  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
MASK:MASK7:POINTSPCNT 20.4, 10.5, 90, 10.5, 50, 80  
defines the points in mask 7.  
MASK:SOUrce  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Selects which trace will be compared against the mask(s) when counting is  
turned on.  
Group  
Mask  
Syntax  
MASK:SOUrce CH<x>  
MASK:SOUrce?  
CH  
<x>  
<Space>  
:
SOUrce  
MASK  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<x> indicates CH #. It may be 1, 2, 3, or 4. 1 is the default.  
MASK:SOURCE CH1 would enable CH1 to be compared against the mask.  
MASK:STANdard  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Deletes the existing mask and sets the standard mask. The query form queries the  
standard mask.  
Group  
Syntax  
Mask  
MASK:STANdard { OC1 | OC3 | OC12 | DS0Single | DS0Double |  
DS0Contra | DS0Timing | E1Symmetrical | E1Coax | E2 | E3 | E4_0 |  
E4_1 | E5 | STM1E_0 |STM1E_1 | DS1 | DS1A | DS1C | DS2 | DS3 |  
DS4NA |DS4NA_Max | STS1Eye | STS1Pulse | STS3 | STS3_Max | FC133  
| FC266 | FC531 | FC1063 | FC133E | FC266E | FC531E | FC1063E |  
D2 | D1 | FDDI | NONe | USERMask }  
MASK:STANdard?  
2–200  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
E5  
E4_1  
E4_0  
E3  
STM1E_0  
STM1E_1  
DS1  
DS1A  
E2  
DS1C  
E1Coax  
DS2  
DS3  
E1Symmetrical  
DS0Timing  
MS4NA  
DS0Contra  
DS0Double  
DS4NA_Max  
STS1Eye  
DS0Single  
OC12  
STS1Pulse  
STS3  
OC3  
OC1  
STS3_Max  
FC531  
FC1063  
FC133E  
FC266E  
FC531E  
FC1063E  
D2  
D1  
FDDI  
NONe  
<Space>  
USERMask  
STANdard  
MASK  
:
?
Arguments  
OC1 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as  
specified by OC1/STM0 standard (51.84 Mb/s).  
OC3 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as specfied  
by OC3/STM1 standard (155.52 Mb/s).  
OC12 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as  
specfied by OC12/STM4 standard (622.08 Mb/s).  
DS0Single means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as  
specified by the DS–0 Single Pulse standard (64 kb/s).  
2–201  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
DS0Double means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as  
specified by the DS–0 Double Pulse standard (64 kb/s).  
DS0Contra means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as  
specified by the DS–0 Data Pulse, Contradirectional standard (64 kb/s).  
DS0Timing means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as  
specified by the DS–0 Timing Pulse, Contradirectional standard (64 kb/s).  
E1Symmetrical means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 ..  
2 as specified by the E1 Symmetrical Pair standard (2.048 Mb/s).  
E1Coax means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as  
specified by the E1 Coaxial Pair standard (2.048 Mb/s).  
E2 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as specified  
by the E2 standard (8.448 Mb/s).  
E3 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as specified  
by the E3 standard (34.368 Mb/s).  
E4_0 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as  
specified by the E4 Binary 0 standard (139.26 Mb/s).  
E4_1 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as  
specified by the E4 Binary 1 standard (139.26 Mb/s).  
E5 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as specified  
by the E5 CEPT standard (565 Mb/s).  
STM1E_0 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as  
specified by the G.703 Binary 0 standard (155.52 Mb/s). The SONET standard  
GR–253–CORE calls this mask STS–3. ANSI standard T1.102 has STS–3 eye  
pattern standards.  
STM1E_1 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as  
specified by the G.703 Binary 1 standard (155.52 Mb/s). The SONET standard  
GR–253–CORE calls this mask STS–3. ANSI standard T1.102 has STS–3 eye  
pattern standards.  
DS1 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as  
specified by the DS1 standard (1.544 Mb/s).  
DS1A means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as  
specified by the DS1A standard (2.048 Mb/s).  
DS1C means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as  
specified by the DS1C standard (3.152 Mb/s).  
DS2 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as  
specified by the DS2 standard (6.312 Mb/s).  
2–202  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
DS3 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as  
specified by the DS3 standard (44.736 Mb/s).  
DS4NA means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 4 as  
specified by the DS4NA eye standard (139.26 Mb/s).  
DS4NA_Max means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 4 as  
specified by the DS4NA Maximum equipment output eye standard  
(139.26 Mb/s).  
STS1Eye means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 4 as  
specified by the STS–1 Eye standard (51.84 Mb/s).  
STS1Pulse means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as  
specified by the STS–1 Pulse standard (51.84 Mb/s).  
STS3 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 4 as  
specified by the STS–3 eye standard (155.52 Mb/s).  
STS3_Max means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 4 as  
specified by the STS–3 Maximum equipment output eye standard (155.52 Mb/s).  
FC133 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as  
specified by the Fibre Channel 133 Optical standard (132.7 Mb/s).  
FC266 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as  
specified by the Fibre Channel 266 Optical standard (265.6 Mb/s).  
FC531 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as  
specified by the Fibre Channel 531 Optical standard (531.2 Mb/s).  
FC1063 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as  
specified by the Fibre Channel 1063 Optical standard (1.0635 Gb/s).  
FC133E means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as  
specified by the Fibre Channel 133 Electrical standard (132.7 Mb/s).  
FC266E means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as  
specified by the Fibre Channel 266 Electrical standard (265.6 Mb/s).  
FC531E means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as  
specified by the Fibre Channel 531 Electrical standard (531.2 Mb/s).  
FC1063E means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as  
specified by the Fibre Channel 1063 Electrical standard (1.0635 Gb/s).  
D2 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as implied  
by the ANSI/SMPTE 259M 4fsc NTSC standard (143.1818 Mb/s).  
D1 means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 3 as implied  
by the ANSI/SMPTE 259M 4:2:2 component serial video standard (270 Mb/s).  
2–203  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
FDDI means delete any user defined masks and then create masks 1 .. 2 as  
implied by the FDDI standard (125 Mb/s).  
NONe causes all masks to be deleted. This even includes user masks.  
USERMask is a no-op when received by the SET form of this command. It is  
allowed because a SET? can get it.  
Examples  
MASK:STANDARD OC3  
selects the OC3 standard.  
MASK:TBPosition  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Set the time base position. Use this command to reposition the waveform against  
the mask.  
Group  
Mask  
Syntax  
MASK:TBPosition <NR3>  
:
MASK  
<NR3>  
TBPosition  
Arguments  
<NR3> is the time base position. Increasing the value moves the trigger position  
and waveform left on the screen. Decreasing it moves the trigger position and  
waveform right. Units of measure is seconds. Minimum resolution is 1 ps. The  
oscilloscope will round any number entered to the nearest 1 ps.  
Examples  
MASK:TBPOSITION 1.44e-9  
moves the waveform appropriately.  
MATH<x>? (Query Only)  
Returns the definition for the math waveform specified by <x>.  
Group  
Syntax  
Vertical  
MATH<x>?  
2–204  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MATH  
<x>  
?
MATH<x>:DEFINE  
Allows the user to define new waveforms using mathematical expressions. This  
is equivalent to selecting Change Math waveform definition in the Math<x>  
side menu.  
Group  
Vertical  
Syntax  
MATH<x>:DEFINE <QString>  
MATH<x>:DEFINE?  
Space  
<QString>  
?
MATH<x>  
:
DEFINE  
Arguments  
<QString> contains the mathematical expression. The expression can include  
any amount of white space. Expressions can be either single or dual waveform  
expressions. <src> and <function> elements are case independent.  
The format for a single waveform expression is:  
<function>(<source> [, <window>, <scaling>, <phase  
suppression>])  
The format for a dual waveform expression is:  
<source><operator><source>  
where:  
<function> ::= INV | DIF | FFT | INT  
H
H
INVert (for invert): inverts the defined waveform.  
DIFferentiate (available with Advanced DSP Math only): takes the  
derivative of the selected waveform.  
H
FFT (available with Advanced DSP Math only): provides an FFT of the  
selected waveform. It uses the format: “FFT(<source>, <window>,  
<scaling>, <phase suppression>)” where the window, scaling, and phase  
suppression arguments in the parentheses are optional. You can specify these  
arguments in any order.  
2–205  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
<source> refers to a signal channel. Valid choices are: CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4,  
REF1, REF2, REF3, or REF4.  
(The TDS 410A does not include CH3 and CH4.)  
<window> refers to an FFT window. Valid choices are: RECTangular,  
HAMming, HANning, or BLAckmanharris.  
<scaling> provides vertical scaling. Valid choices are: LOGrms, LINearrms,  
DEGreesphase, or RADiansphase.  
<Phase suppression> is of the range: –100 dB to 100 dB.  
H
INTegrate (available on instruments with the Option 2F Advanced DSP  
Math only): takes the integral of the selected waveform.  
<operator> ::= { + | - | * | / (not available on TDS 400A) }  
<source> ::= { CH<x> | REF<x> }  
Examples  
MATH2:DEFINE "Ch1 + cH2"  
adds channel 1 and channel 2, and stores the result in MATH2.  
MATH1:DEFINE "INV( ref4 )"  
inverts the waveform stored in reference memory location 4 storing the result in  
MATH1.  
MATH1:DEFINE "FFT( CH1 )"  
takes an FFT on the waveform from channel 1 and stores the result in MATH1.  
MATH1:DEFINE "FFT( CH1, HAMM, LINEARRMS, 20 )"  
takes an FFT from channel 1, using the HAMMING algorithm, with linear rms  
scaling, and 20 dB phase suppression. The result is stored in MATH1.  
MATH1:DEFINE?  
might return "Ch2*Ref2" as the expression that defines MATH1.  
MATH<x>:NUMAVg  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Only,  
some models require Option 2F  
Allows the user to declare at what acquisition number the averaging algorithm  
will begin exponential averaging. Prior to that acquisition number, the algorithm  
uses stable averaging. This is equivalent to selecting Average in the Math<x>  
side menu and entering a value with the general purpose knob or the keypad.  
Group  
Vertical  
2–206  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
MATH<x>:NUMAVg <NR1>  
MATH<x>:NUMAVg?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
MATH<x>  
:
NUMAVg  
Arguments  
Examples  
< NR1 > specifies the number of times to successively average the math  
waveform before completing an acquisition.  
MATH2:NUMAVG 10  
Successively averages math waveform 2 by 10 times.  
MATH2:NUMAVG?  
might return 10 indicating 10 math 2 waveforms are successively averaged  
before a single acquisition occurs.  
MATH<x>:PROCessing  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Only,  
some models require Option 2F  
Allows the user to turn on or off averaging for the math waveform specified by  
<x>. This is equivalent to selecting No Extended Process or Average in the  
Math<x> side menu.  
Math averaging allows the digitizing oscilloscope to successively average any  
acquisition-related math waveform. This can help reduce noise in a math  
waveform.  
Group  
Syntax  
Vertical  
MATH<x>:PROCessing { OFF | AVErage }  
MATH<x>:PROCessing?  
OFF  
<Space>  
AVErage  
MATH<x>  
:
PROCessing  
?
2–207  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Arguments  
OFF turns off waveform averaging.  
AVErage turns on waveform averaging.  
Examples  
MATH1:PROCESSING OFF  
ensures that waveform averaging is not in use on math waveform 1.  
MATH1:PROCESSING AVERAGE  
turns on waveform averaging on math waveform 1.  
MEASUrement? (Query Only)  
Returns all measurement parameters.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement?  
MEASUrement  
?
Example  
MEASUREMENT?  
might return  
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE PERIOD;UNITS "s";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2  
CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREĆ  
MENT:MEAS1:STATE 0;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:TYPE PERIOD;UNITS  
"s";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION  
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:STATE 0;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE  
PERIOD;UNITS "s";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2  
RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:STATE 0;:MEASUREĆ  
MENT:MEAS4:TYPE PERIOD;UNITS "s";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2  
CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREĆ  
MENT:MEAS4:STATE 0;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;UNITS  
"s";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION  
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:GATING 0;METHOD HISTOGRAM;REFLEVEL:METHOD  
PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0E+0;LOW 0.0E+0;MID 0.0E+0;MID2  
0.0E+0;:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0E+0;LOW 10.0E+0;MID  
50.0E+0;MID2 50.0E+0  
MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot  
Removes the measurement snapshot display.  
2–208  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:CLEARSNapshot  
:
MEASUrement  
CLEARSNapshot  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:CLEARSNAPSHOT  
MEASUrement:GATing  
Sets or queries measurement gating.  
Measurement  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
CURSor:VBArs  
MEASUrement:GATing { ON | OFF | <NR1> }  
MEASUrement:GATing?  
ON  
OFF  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
:
MEASUrement  
GATing  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
ON (or 1) turns on measurement gating.  
OFF (or 0) turns off measurement gating.  
MEASUREMENT:GATING ON  
MEASUREMENT:GATING?  
might return MEASUREMENT:GATING 1  
showing gating is turned on.  
It might also return MEASUREMENT:GATING 0  
showing gating is turned off.  
2–209  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement:IMMed? (Query Only)  
Returns all immediate measurement setup parameters.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:IMMed?  
MEASUrement  
:
IMMed  
?
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED?  
might return :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;UNITS "s";SOURCE1  
CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE; DIRECTION FORWARDS  
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay? (Query Only)  
Returns information about the immediate delay measurement.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?  
MEASUrement  
:
:
DELay  
?
IMMed  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY?  
might return :MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;  
DIRECTION FORWARDS  
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction  
Sets or queries the starting point and direction that determines the delay “to”  
edge when taking an immediate delay measurement. Use the MEASUre-  
ment:IMMed:SOURCE2 command to specify the delay “to” waveform.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction {BACKWards | FORWards}  
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction?  
2–210  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement  
:
IMMed  
DELay  
DIREction  
<Space>  
:
:
BACKWards  
FORWards  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
BACKWards means that the search starts at the end of the waveform and looks for  
the last rising or falling edge in the waveform. The slope of the edge is specified  
by MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2.  
FORWards means that the search starts at the beginning of the waveform and  
looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform. The slope of the edge is  
specified by MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2.  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION FORWARDS  
starts searching from the beginning of the waveform record.  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION?  
returns either BACKWARDS or FORWARDS.  
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE1  
Sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the delay “from” waveform  
when taking an immediate delay measurement. The waveform is specified by  
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE1.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE1  
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE1 { FALL | RISe }  
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE1?  
2–211  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement  
:
IMMed  
DELay  
EDGE1  
:
:
FALL  
RISe  
<Space>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
FALL specifies the falling edge.  
RISe specifies the rising edge.  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE  
specifies that the rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement.  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1?  
returns either RISE or FALL.  
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2  
Sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the delay “to” waveform  
when taking an immediate delay measurement. The waveform is specified by  
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2  
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2 {FALL | RISe }  
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2?  
MEASUrement  
:
IMMed  
:
DELay  
:
EDGE2  
FALL  
RISe  
<Space>  
?
Arguments  
FALL specifies the falling edge.  
2–212  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
RISe specifies the rising edge.  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE  
specifies that the rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement.  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE2?  
returns FALL showing that the falling or negative edge of the waveform is used  
for the immediate delay measurement.  
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]  
Sets or queries the source for all single channel immediate measurements and  
specifies the source to measure “from” when taking an immediate delay  
measurement or phase measurement.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1] { CH<x> | MATH<x> | REF<x> | HIStoĆ  
gram (TDS 500C and 700C) }  
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]?  
MEASUrement  
:
IMMed  
:
CH  
MATH  
REF  
<x>  
<Space>  
1
HIStogram  
SOURCE  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
CH<x> is an input channel.  
MATH<x> is a math waveform.  
REF<x> is a reference waveform.  
HIStogram is a histogram (TDS 500C and 700C only).  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE MATH1  
specifies MATH1 as the immediate measurement source.  
2–213  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2  
Specifies the source to measure “to” when taking an immediate delay measure-  
ment or phase measurement.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2 { CH<x> | MATH<x> | REF<x> | HIStogram  
(TDS 500C and 700C) }  
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2?  
MEASUrement  
:
IMMed  
:
CH  
MATH  
REF  
<x>  
<Space>  
HIStogram  
SOURCE2  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
CH<x> is an input channel.  
MATH<x> is a math waveform.  
REF<x> is a reference waveform.  
HIStogram is a histogram (TDS 500C and 700C only).  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2 REF3  
sets the waveform in reference memory location 3 as the delay “to” source when  
making delay measurements.  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2?  
might return MATH1.  
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe  
Specifies the immediate measurement.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe { AMPlitude | AREa | BURst | CARea | CMEan  
| CRMs | DELay | EXTINCTDB (TDS 500C and 700C) |EXTINCTPCT (TDS  
2–214  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
500C and 700C) | EXTINCTRATIO (TDS500C and 700C) | FALL |  
FREQuency | HIGH | HITs (TDS500C and 700C) | LOW | MAXimum |  
MEAN | MEANDBM (TDS500C and 700C) | MEDian (TDS500C and 700C) |  
MINImum | NDUty | NOVershoot | NWIdth | PDUty | PEAKHits (TDS  
500C and 700C) | PERIod | PHAse | PK2pk | POVershoot | PWIdth |  
RISe | RMS | SIGMA[1-3] (TDS 500C and 700C) | STDdev (TDS 500C  
and 700C) | WAVEFORMS(TDS500C and 700C) }  
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe?  
<Space>  
AMPlitude  
AREa  
MEDian  
BURst  
CARea  
MINImum  
NDUty  
NOVershoot  
NWIdth  
PDUty  
CMEan  
CRMs  
DELay  
EXTINCTDB  
PEAKHits  
EXTINCTPCT  
PERIod  
PHAse  
EXTINCTRATIO  
FALL  
PK2pk  
POVershoot  
PWIdth  
RISe  
FREQuency  
HIGH  
HITs  
RMS  
LOW  
STDdev  
MAXimum  
SIGMA[1-3]  
WAVEFORMS  
MEAN  
MEANDBM  
MEASUrement  
:
:
IMMed  
TYPe  
?
Arguments  
For more information on how measurements are derived, see Appendix B:  
Algorithms, in the related TDS Family User Manual.  
AMPlitude is the high value minus the low value.  
2–215  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
AREa is the area between the curve and ground over the entire waveform.  
BURst is the time from the first MidRef crossing to the last MidRef crossing.  
CARea (cycle area) is the area between the curve and ground over one cycle.  
CMEan is the arithmetic mean over one cycle.  
CRMs is the true Root Mean Square voltage over one cycle.  
DELay is the time between the MidRef crossings of two different waveforms.  
EXTINCTDB (TDS 500C and 700C) is 10.0 * log10(Extinction Ratio)  
EXTINCTPCT (TDS 500C and 700C) is 100/Extinction Ratio  
EXTINCTRATIO (TDS 500C and 700C) is High/Low  
FALL is the time that it takes for the falling edge of a pulse to fall from a HighRef  
value to a LowRef value of its final value.  
FREQuency is the reciprocal of the period measured in hertz.  
HIGH is the 100% reference level.  
HITs (TDS 500C and 700C) displays the number of acquired points within or on  
the histogram box.  
LOW is the 0% reference level.  
MAXimum is the highest amplitude (voltage).  
MEAN for general purpose measurements, is the arithmetic mean over the entire  
waveform. For histogram measurements, it is the average of all acquired points  
within or on the histogram box.  
MEANDBM (TDS 500C and 700C) is 10 * log10(MEAN/0.001) a value equal to  
MEDian (TDS 500C and 700C) is the median of all acquired points within or on  
the histogram box. Half of the acquired points are greater than and half less than  
this value.  
MINImum is the lowest amplitude (voltage).  
NDUty is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a  
percentage.  
NOVershoot is the negative overshoot, expressed as:  
(Low * Minimum)  
ǒ
Ǔ
NOVershoot + 100   
Amplitude  
2–216  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
NWIdth is the distance (time) between MidRef (usually 50%) amplitude points of  
a negative pulse.  
PDUty is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a  
percentage.  
PEAKHits (TDS 500C and 700C) displays the number of acquired points in  
the largest bin of the histogram.  
PERIod is the time, in seconds, it takes for one complete signal cycle to happen.  
PHAse is the amount of shift, expressed in degrees, from the selected waveform  
to the designated waveform.  
PK2pk is the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude.  
It can be used with both general purpose and histogram measurements. For  
histogram measurements, it is the value of the highest nonzero bin minus the  
value of the lowest nonzero bin.  
POVershoot is the positive overshoot, expressed as:  
(Maximum * High)  
ǒ
Ǔ
POVershoot + 100   
Amplitude  
PWIdth is the distance (time) between MidRef (usually 50%) amplitude points of  
a positive pulse.  
RISe is the time that it takes for the leading edge of a pulse to rise from a low  
reference value to a high reference value of its final value.  
RMS is the true Root Mean Square voltage.  
SIGMA[1-3] (TDS 500C and 700C) is the percentage of points in the histogram  
which are within 1, 2, or 3 standard deviations of the histogram mean. In a  
normal distribution, 66% of the points are within ꢀ1 standard deviation, 95% of  
the points are within ꢀ2 standard deviations, and 97.5% of the points are within  
ꢀ3 standard deviations of the histogram mean.  
STDdev (TDS 500C and 700C) is the standard deviation of all acquired points  
within or on the histogram box.  
WAVEFORMS (TDS 500C and 700C) is the number of waveforms that have  
contributed to the histogram. A waveform is counted even if no points were  
within the histogram box.  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE FREQUENCY  
defines the immediate measurement to be a frequency measurement.  
2–217  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNITS? (Query Only)  
Returns the units for the immediate measurement.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe  
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNITS?  
MEASUrement  
:
:
?
IMMed  
UNITS  
Returns  
<QString> returns "V" for volts, "s" for seconds, "Hz" for hertz, "VV" for  
volts2,or "%" for percent.  
On the TDS 400A, <QString> also returns "c" for clocks, "Vc" for volt-clocks,  
or "/c" for 1/clks.  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:UNITS?  
might return "s", indicating that the units for the immediate measurement are  
seconds.  
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue? (Query Only)  
Immediately executes the immediate measurement specified by the MEASUre-  
ment:IMMed:TYPe command. The measurement is taken on the source(s)  
specified by a MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE command.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?  
MEASUrement  
:
:
?
IMMed  
VALue  
Returns  
<NR3>  
2–218  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>? (Query Only)  
Returns all measurement parameters for the displayed measurement specified by  
<x>.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?  
<x>  
?
MEASUrement  
:
MEAS  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3?  
might return: :MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:STATE 0;TYPE PERIOD;  
UNITS "s";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH2;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;  
EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS.  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt? (Query Only)  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Returns the number of values accumulated for this measurement since the last  
statistical reset. Some values may have been ignored because they generated an  
error.  
Group  
Syntax  
:
Measurement  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?  
<x>  
?
MEASUrement  
:
MEAS  
COUNt  
Returns  
<NR3>  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:COUNT?  
might return: :MEASU:MEAS1:COUN 3.247000000E+3  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay? (Query Only)  
Returns the delay measurement parameters for the measurement specified by  
<x>.  
2–219  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Measurement  
Syntax  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?  
<x>  
?
MEASUrement  
:
:
MEAS  
DELay  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY?  
might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;  
EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS.  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction  
Sets or queries the starting point and direction that determines the delay “to”  
edge when taking a delay measurement. The waveform is specified by  
MEASUrement:MEAS<X>:SOURCE2. This command is equivalent to setting  
the direction in the Delay Edges & Direction side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction { BACKWards | FORWards }  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction?  
<x>  
MEASUrement  
:
:
MEAS  
DELay  
BACKWards  
FORWards  
<Space>  
:
DIREction  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
BACKWards means that the search starts at the end of the waveform and looks for  
the last rising or falling edge in the waveform. The slope of the edge is specified  
by MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2.  
FORWards means that the search starts at the beginning of the waveform and  
looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform. The slope of the edge is  
specified by MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2.  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:DIRECTION BACKWARDS  
starts searching from the end of the waveform record.  
2–220  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:DIRECTION?  
might return FORWARDS for the search direction.  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE1  
Sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the delay “from” waveform  
when taking a delay measurement. The waveform is specified by  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE1. This command is equivalent to selecting  
the edges in the Delay Edges & Direction side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE1 { FALL | RISe }  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE1?  
MEASUrement  
:
MEAS  
<x>  
:
DELay  
:
EDGE1  
FALL  
RISe  
<Space>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
FALL specifies the falling edge.  
RISe specifies the rising edge.  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE  
specifies that the rising edge be used for measurement 3.  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE1?  
returns either RISE or FALL for measurement 1.  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2  
Sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the delay “to” waveform  
when taking a delay measurement. The waveform is specified by  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2. This command is equivalent to selecting  
the edges in the Delay Edges & Direction side menu.  
Group  
Measurement  
2–221  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2 { FALL | RISe }  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2?  
MEASUrement  
:
MEAS  
<x>  
:
DELay  
:
EDGE2  
FALL  
RISe  
<Space>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
FALL specifies the falling edge.  
RISe specifies the rising edge.  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:DELAY:EDGE2 RISE  
specifies that the rising edge be used for the second delay measurement.  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:DELAY:EDGE2?  
might return FALL showing that the falling or negative edge of the waveform is  
used for the second measurement.  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum? (Query Only)  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Returns the maximum value found for this measurement since the last statistical  
reset.  
Group  
Syntax  
:
Measurement  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?  
<x>  
?
MEASUrement  
:
MEAS  
MAXimum  
Returns  
<NR3>  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:MAXIMUM?  
might return: :MEASU:MEAS3:MAX 4.18E-9  
2–222  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN? (Query Only)  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Returns the mean value accumulated for this measurement since the last  
statistical reset.  
Group  
Syntax  
:
Measurement  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?  
<x>  
?
MEASUrement  
:
MEAS  
MEAN  
Returns  
<NR3>  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MEAN?  
might return: :MEASU:MEAS1:MEAN 514.71E-9  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum? (Query Only)  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Returns the minimum value found for this measurement since the last statistical  
reset.  
Group  
Syntax  
:
Measurement  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum?  
<x>  
?
MEASUrement  
:
MEAS  
MINImum  
Returns  
<NR3>  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MIN?  
might return: :MEASU:MEAS1:MINI 1.75E-9  
2–223  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]  
Sets or queries the source for all single channel measurements and specifies the  
source to measure “from” when taking a delay measurement or phase measure-  
ment.  
Group  
Measurement  
Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1] { CH<x> | MATH<x> | REF<x> |  
HIStogram (TDS 500C and 700C) }  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]?  
MEASUrement  
:
MEAS  
<x>  
:
CH  
MATH  
REF  
<x>  
<Space>  
1
HIStogram  
SOURCE  
?
Arguments CH<x>is an input channel.  
MATH<x>is a math waveform.  
REF<x>is a reference waveform.  
HIStogramis a histogram (TDS 500C and 700C only).  
Examples MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE1 MATH1  
specifies MATH1 as the measurement 2 source.  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2  
Sets or queries the source to measure “to” when taking a delay measurement or  
phase measurement. This is equivalent to setting the source in the Delay from  
Selected Wfm side menu or the Phase from Selected Wfm side menu.  
Group  
Measurement  
Syntax MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2 { CH<x> | MATH<x> | REF<x> | HIStoĆ  
gram (TDS 500C and 700C) }  
2–224  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2?  
MEASUrement  
:
MEAS  
<x>  
:
CH  
MATH  
REF  
<x>  
<Space>  
HIStogram  
SOURCE2  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
CH<x> is an input channel.  
MATH<x> is a math waveform.  
REF<x> is a reference waveform.  
HIStogram is a histogram (TDS 500C and 700C only).  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:SOURCE2 CH<x>  
sets channel 1 as the delay “to” source when making delay measurements.  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE2?  
might return MATH1.  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE  
Controls the measurement system. The source specified by MEASUre-  
ment:MEAS<x>:SOURCE1 must be selected for the measurement to be  
displayed. The source can be selected using the SELect:CH<x> command.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE { OFF | ON | <NR1> }  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE?  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
MEASUrement  
:
MEAS  
<x>  
:
STATE  
?
2–225  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Arguments  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns measurements off. You can also turn the state off by  
deselecting the source.  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 turns measurements on.  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE ON  
turns measurement defined as MEAS1 on.  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:STATE?  
returns either 0 or 1, indicating the state of MEAS4.  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev? (Query Only)  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Returns the standard deviation of values accumulated for this measurement since  
the last statistical reset.  
Group  
Syntax  
:
Measurement  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?  
<x>  
?
MEASUrement  
:
MEAS  
STDdev  
Returns  
<NR3>  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STDDEV?  
might return: :MEASU:MEAS1:STD 21.0E-12  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe  
Sets or queries the measurement type for the measurement specified by  
MEAS<x>. This is equivalent to selecting the measurement in the Select  
Measurement side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe { AMPlitude | AREa | BURst | CARea |  
CMEan | CRMs | DELay | EXTINCTRATIO (TDS500C and 700C) |  
EXTINCTPCT (TDS500C and 700C) | EXTINCTDB (TDS500C and 700C)  
|FALL | FREQuency | HIGH | HITs (TDS500C and 700C) |LOW |  
2–226  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MAXimum | MEAN | MEANDBM (TDS500C and 700C) | MEDian (TDS500C  
and 700C) | MINImum | NDUty | NOVershoot | NWIdth | PDUty |  
PEAKHits (TDS500C and 700C) | PERIod |PHAse | PK2pk | POVershoot  
| PWIdth | RISe | RMS | SIGMA[1-3] (TDS 500C and 700C) | STDdev  
(TDS500C and 700C) | WAVEFORMS(TDS500C and 700C) }  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe?  
<Space>  
AMPlitude  
AREa  
MEDian  
BURst  
CARea  
MINImum  
NDUty  
NOVershoot  
NWIdth  
PDUty  
CMEan  
CRMs  
DELay  
EXTINCTDB  
PEAKHits  
EXTINCTPCT  
PERIod  
PHAse  
EXTINCTRATIO  
FALL  
PK2pk  
POVershoot  
PWIdth  
RISe  
FREQuency  
HIGH  
HITs  
RMS  
LOW  
STDdev  
MAXimum  
SIGMA[1-3]  
WAVEFORMS  
MEAN  
MEANDBM  
MEASUrement  
:
:
MEAS  
TYPe  
?
Arguments  
For more information on how measurements are derived, see Appendix B:  
Algorithms, in the related TDS Family User Manual.  
AMPlitude is the high value minus the low value or HIGH – LOW.  
AREa is the area between the curve and ground over the entire waveform.  
2–227  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
BURst is the time from the first MidRef crossing to the last MidRef crossing.  
CARea (cycle area) is the area between the curve and ground over one cycle.  
CMEan is the arithmetic mean over one cycle.  
CRMs is the true Root Mean Square voltage over one cycle.  
DELay is the time between the MidRef crossings of two different waveforms.  
EXTINCTDB (TDS 500C and 700C) is 10.0 * log10(Extinction Ratio)  
EXTINCTPCT (TDS 500C and 700C) is 100/Extinction Ratio  
EXTINCTRATIO (TDS 500C and 700C) is High/Low  
FALL is the time that it takes for the falling edge of a pulse to fall from a HighRef  
value to a LowRef value of its final value.  
FREQuency is the reciprocal of the period measured in hertz.  
HIGH is the 100% reference level.  
HITs (TDS 500C and 700C) displays the number of acquired point within or on  
the histogram box.  
LOW is the 0% reference level.  
MAXimum is the highest amplitude (voltage).  
MEAN for general purpose measurements, is the arithmetic mean over the entire  
waveform. For histogram measurements, it is the average of all acquired points  
within or on the histogram box.  
MEANDBM (TDS 500C and 700C) is 10 * log10(MEAN/0.001) a value equal to  
MEDian (TDS 500C and 700C) is the median of all acquired points within or on  
the histogram box. Half of the acquired points are greater than and half less than  
this value.  
MINImum is the lowest amplitude (voltage).  
NDUty is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a  
percentage.  
NOVershoot is the negative overshoot, expressed as:  
(Low * Minimum)  
ǒ
Ǔ
NOVershoot + 100   
Amplitude  
NWIdth is the distance (time) between MidRef (usually 50%) amplitude points of  
a negative pulse.  
2–228  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
PDUty is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a  
percentage.  
PEAKHits (TDS 500C and 700C) displays the number of points in the largest  
bin of the histogram.  
PERIod is the time, in seconds, it takes for one complete signal cycle to happen.  
PHAse is the amount of shift, expressed in degrees, from the selected waveform  
to the designated waveform.  
PK2pk is the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude.  
It can be used with both general purpose and histogram measurements. For  
histogram measurements, it is the value of the highest nonzero bin minus the  
value of the lowest nonzero bin.  
POVershoot is the positive overshoot, expressed as:  
(Maximum * High)  
ǒ
Ǔ
POVershoot + 100   
Amplitude  
PWIdth is the distance (time) between MidRef (usually 50%) amplitude points of  
a positive pulse.  
RISe is the time that it takes for the leading edge of a pulse to rise from a low  
reference value to a high reference value of its final value.  
RMS is the true Root Mean Square voltage.  
SIGMA[1-3] (TDS 500C and 700C) is the percentage of points in the histogram  
which are within 1, 2, or 3 standard deviations of the histogram mean. In a  
normal distribution, 66% of the points are within +–1 standard deviation, 95% of  
the points are within +–2 standard deviations, and 97.5% of the points are within  
+–3 standard deviations of the histogram mean.  
STDdev (TDS 500C and 700C) is the standard deviation of all acquired points  
within or on the histogram box.  
WAVEFORMS (TDS 500C and 700C) is the number of waveforms that have  
contributed to the histogram. A waveform is counted even if no points were  
within the histogram box.  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:TYPE RMS  
specifies MEAS3 to calculate the Root Mean Square voltage.  
2–229  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNITS? (Query Only)  
Returns the units for the measurement specified by MEASUre-  
ment:MEAS<x>:TYPe.  
Group  
Syntax  
:
Measurement  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNITS?  
MEASUrement  
MEAS  
<x>  
:
UNITS  
?
Returns  
<QString> returns "V" for volts, "s" for seconds, "HZ" for hertz, "VV" for  
volts2, or "%" for percent.  
On the TDS 400A, <QString> also returns "c" for clocks, "Vc" for volt-clocks,  
or "/c" for 1/clks.  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:UNITS?  
might return "%", indicating the units for Measurement 3 are percent.  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue? (Query Only)  
Returns the value that has been calculated for the measurement specified by <x>.  
NOTE. This value is a display value and will be updated perhaps every 1/3  
second. If you are acquiring a long acquisition record, the TDS may take longer  
than this time to update.  
Group  
Syntax  
:
Measurement  
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?  
MEASUrement  
<x>  
:
VALue  
?
MEAS  
Returns  
<NR3>  
2–230  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement:METHod  
Sets or queries the method used to calculate the 0% and 100% reference level.  
This is equivalent to setting the High-Low Setup in the Measure menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:METHod { HIStogram | MINMax }  
MEASUrement:METHod?  
HIStogram  
<Space>  
MINMax  
MEASUrement  
:
METHod  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
HIStogram sets the high and low waveform levels statistically using a histogram  
algorithm.  
MINMax sets the high and low waveform levels to MAX and MIN, respectively.  
MEASUREMENT:METHOD HISTOGRAM  
specifies that the high and low reference levels are set statistically.  
MEASUREMENT:METHOD?  
returns MINMAX when the reference levels are set to MIN and MAX.  
MEASUrement:REFLevel? (Query Only)  
Returns the reference levels.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:REFLevel?  
MEASUrement  
:
?
REFLevel  
2–231  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH  
Sets or queries the high reference level, and is the 100% reference level when  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to ABSolute. This command is  
equivalent to setting the Reference Levels in the Measure menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH <NR3>  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH?  
MEASUrement  
:
:
REFLevel  
:
HIGH  
ABSolute  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the high reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH 1.71  
sets the high reference level to 1.71 V.  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW  
Sets or queries the low reference level, and is the 0% reference level when  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to ABSolute. This command is  
equivalent to setting the Reference Levels in the Measure menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW <NR3>  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW?  
2–232  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement  
:
:
REFLevel  
:
LOW  
ABSolute  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the low reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW?  
might return 0.0E+0 as the low reference level.  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID  
Sets or queries the mid reference level, and is the 50% reference level when  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to ABSolute. This command is  
equivalent to setting the Reference Levels in the Measure menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID <NR3>  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID?  
MEASUrement  
:
:
REFLevel  
:
MID  
ABSolute  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID .71  
sets the mid reference level to .71 volts.  
2–233  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2  
Sets or queries the mid reference level for the “to” waveform when taking a  
delay measurement, and is the 50% reference level when MEASUrement:RE-  
FLevel:METHod is set to ABSolute. This command is equivalent to setting the  
Reference Levels in the Measure menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 <NR3>  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2?  
MEASUrement  
:
:
REFLevel  
:
MID2  
ABSolute  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2 0.5  
sets the mid reference level for the delay waveform to 0.5 volts.  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod  
Specifies which reference levels are used for measurement calculations. This  
command is equivalent to setting the levels in the Reference Levels side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod { ABSolute | PERCent }  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod?  
ABSolute  
<Space>  
PERCent  
MEASUrement  
:
:
METHod  
REFLevel  
?
2–234  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Arguments  
ABSolute specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute commands. This method is useful when  
precise values are required. For instance, when designing to published interface  
specifications such as RS-232-C.  
PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent relative to  
HIGH and LOW. The percentages are defined using the MEASUrement:REFLe-  
vel:PERCent commands.  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD ABSolute  
specifies that explicit user-defined values are used for the reference levels.  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD?  
returns either ABSolute or PERCENT, indicating the reference levels used.  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH  
Sets or queries the percent, where 100% is equal to HIGH, that is used to  
calculate the high reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is  
set to PERCent. This command is equivalent to setting the Reference Levels in  
the Measure menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH <NR3>  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH?  
MEASUrement  
:
:
REFLevel  
:
HIGH  
PERCent  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> ranges from 0 to 100 percent, and is the high reference level. The default  
is 90%.  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 95  
specifies that the high reference level is set to 95% of HIGH.  
2–235  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW  
Sets or queries the percent, where 100% is equal to HIGH, that is used to  
calculate the low reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set  
to PERCent. This command is equivalent to setting the Reference Levels in the  
Measure menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW <NR3>  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW?  
MEASUrement:  
:
REFLevel  
:
LOW  
PERCent  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> ranges from 0 to 100 percent, and is the low reference level. The default is  
10%.  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW?  
might return 15, meaning that the low reference level is 15% of HIGH.  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID  
Sets or queries the percent, where 100% is equal to HIGH, that is used to  
calculate the mid reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is  
set to PERCent. This command is equivalent to setting the Reference Levels in  
the Measure menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID <NR3>  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID?  
2–236  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement  
:
:
REFLevel  
:
MID  
PERCent  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> ranges from 0 to 100 percent, and is the mid reference level. The default is  
50%.  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID 60  
specifies that the mid reference level is set to 60% of HIGH.  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2  
Sets or queries the percent, where 100% is equal to HIGH, that is used to  
calculate the mid reference level for the second waveform specified when taking  
a delay measurement. This command is equivalent to setting the Reference  
Levels in the Measure menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 <NR3>  
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2?  
MEASUrement  
:
:
REFLevel  
:
MID2  
PERCent  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> ranges from 0 to 100 percent, and is the mid reference level. The default is  
50%.  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2 40  
specifies that the mid reference level is set to 40% of HIGH.  
2–237  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement:SNAPShot  
Displays the measurement snapshot.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:SNAPShot  
:
MEASUrement  
SNAPShot  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:SNAPSHOT  
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODE  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Controls the operation and display of measurement statistics.  
Measurement  
Group  
Syntax  
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODE { OFF | MINMax | MEANSTDdev }  
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODE?  
OFF  
MINMax  
<Space>  
MEANSTDdev  
MEASUrement  
:
STATIstics  
:
MODE  
?
Arguments  
OFF turns measurements off. This is the default value.  
MINMax turns on statistics and displays the min and max statistics.  
MEANSTDdev turns on statistics and displays the mean and standard deviation  
statistics.  
Examples  
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE MINMAX  
turns on statistics and displays the min and max statistics.  
2–238  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Controls the responsiveness of mean and standard deviation to waveform  
changes.  
Group  
Syntax  
Measurement  
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting <NR1>  
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
MEASUrement  
:
STATIstics  
:
WEIghting  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> is the time constant for the mean and standard deviation statistical  
accumulations.  
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:WEIGHTING 4  
sets the weighting to 4.  
MESSage  
Clears the message window and the MESSage? query returns the current  
message parameters.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
MESSage CLEar  
MESSage?  
<Space>  
CLEar  
MESSage  
?
Arguments  
CLEar removes the message from the message window. This is equivalent to  
sending MESSage SHOW "".  
2–239  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
MESSAGE CLEAR  
clears the message from the window.  
MESSage:BOX  
Defines the size and position of the message window. This command does not  
display the window unless MESSage:STATE is ON.  
Group  
Syntax  
Display  
MESSage:BOX <X1>,<Y1>,<X2>,<Y2>  
MESSage:BOX?  
<Space>  
<X1>  
<Y1>  
<X2>  
<Y2>  
?
MESSage  
:
BOX  
Arguments  
<X1> and <X2> = 0 to 640, and are pixel positions along the horizontal axis. <X1>  
defines the left and <X2> defines the right side of the window.  
<Y1> and <Y2> = 0 to 480, and are pixel positions along the vertical axis. <Y1>  
defines the top and <Y2> defines the bottom of the window. The reserved height  
of all characters is 15 pixels so the window must be at least that high to fully  
display characters. For a complete list of character widths in pixels, see Table  
A–1 on page A–1. Shorter windows clip characters.  
Figure 3-1 shows the coordinate system relative to the screen.  
2–240  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
0
34  
84  
134  
184  
234  
284  
334  
384  
434  
480  
Figure 2–5: Message Window Coordinates  
MESSage:SHOW  
Clears the contents of the message window and displays the new message in the  
window.  
Group  
Display  
Syntax  
MESSage:SHOW <QString>  
MESSage:SHOW?  
<Space>  
<QString>  
?
MESSage  
:
SHOW  
Arguments  
<QString> is the message and can include any of the characters shown in the  
TDS Character Chart in Appendix A. The maximum length of the message is  
1000 characters.  
2–241  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
The message is left-justified, and is displayed on a single line starting with the  
top most line in the window. A line feed character can be embedded in the string  
to position the message on multiple lines. You can also use white space and tab  
characters to position the message within a line.  
You can send a tab by transmitting a tab character (decimal 9) followed by two  
characters representing the most significant eight bits followed by the least  
significant eight bits of a 16-bit number. The number specifies the pixel column  
relative to the left margin of the label area. For example, to tab to pixel 13, send  
TAB (decimal 9), NUL (decimal 0), and CR (decimal 13).  
The ESC character followed by the @ character turns inverse video on or off and  
can be embedded in the message string. The first ESC character followed by a @  
character displays all the text that follows in inverse video until another ESC  
character followed by a @ character is found in the string.  
NOTE. The use of any escape codes other than those described above may  
produce unpredictable results.  
The label area is the height and width you have set using the MESSage:Box  
command. The length of the label that fits in the label area depends on the  
contents of the label because the width of characters varies. For a complete list of  
character widths in pixels, see Table A–1 on page A–1.  
If the message exceeds the limits of the window, either horizontally or vertically,  
the portion of the message that exceeds the limits will not be displayed. The  
message string itself is not altered. The entire message can be returned as a query  
response regardless of what is displayed in the window.  
Examples  
MESSAGE:SHOW "Hello world"  
displays “Hello world” in the upper left corner of the box (you can define the  
box size with the MESSAGE BOX command).  
MESSAGE:SHOW "Hello a@worlda@ ... hello  
displays “Hello world ... hello” in the upper left corner of the box and the word  
“world” is displayed in inverse video. In this example, a stands for the escape  
character. The escape character may appear differently for you depending on your  
GPIB talker-listener program.  
MESSage:STATE  
Controls the display of the message window.  
Display  
Group  
2–242  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
MESSage:STATE { OFF | ON | <NR1> }  
MESSage:STATE?  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
MESSage  
:
STATE  
?
Arguments  
<OFF> or <NR1> = 0 removes the message window from the screen.  
<ON> or <NR1> ꢀ 0 displays the message window and its contents on the screen.  
The size of the window is defined by MESSage:BOX.  
NEWpass (No Query Form)  
Changes the password that enables access to password protected data. The  
PASSWord command must be successfully executed before using this command  
or an execution error will be generated.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Miscellaneous  
PASSWord, *PUD  
NEWpass <QString>  
<Space>  
NEWpass  
<QString>  
Arguments  
Examples  
<QString> is the new password. The password can include up to 10 characters.  
NEWPASS "mypassword"  
creates a new password for accessing the user protected data.  
*OPC  
Generates the operation complete message in the Standard Event Status Register  
(SESR) when all pending operations finish. The *OPC? query places the ASCII  
character “1” into the output queue when all pending operations are finished. The  
*OPC? response is not available to read until all pending operations finish. For a  
2–243  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
complete discussion of the use of these registers and the output queue, see page  
3–1.  
Group  
Status and Error  
BUSY?, *WAI  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
*OPC  
*OPC?  
*OPC  
?
The *OPC command allows you to synchronize the operation of the digitizing  
oscilloscope with your application program. Synchronization methods are  
described starting on page 3–7. Table 2–33 shows commands that generate an  
Operation Complete message.  
Table 2–33: Commands that Generate an Operation Complete Message  
Operation  
Command  
AUTOSet EXECute  
*CAL  
Automatic scope adjustment  
Internal self-calibration  
Single sequence acquisition  
ACQuire:STATE ON or  
ACQuire:STATE RUN  
(when ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to  
SEQuence)  
Hardcopy output  
HARDCopy STARt  
*OPT? (Query Only)  
Not on TDS 400A  
Returns a list of options installed in your digitizing oscilloscope.  
Group  
Syntax  
Status and Error  
*OPT?  
2–244  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
*OPT?  
Examples  
OPT?  
Might return: 13:Rs232/cent,1M:extended record length,  
2F:math pack,05:video trigger,0,CD:color display.  
PASSWord (No Query Form)  
Enables the *PUD and NEWpass set commands. Sending PASSWord without  
any arguments disables these same commands. Once the password is successful-  
ly entered, the *PUD and NEWpass commands are enabled until the digitizing  
oscilloscope is powered off, or until the FACtory command, the PASSWord  
command with no arguments, or the *RST command is issued.  
To change the password, you must first enter the valid password with the  
PASSWord command and then change to your new password with the NEWpass  
command. Remember that the password is case sensitive.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Miscellaneous  
NEWpass, *PUD  
PASSWord  
PASSWord<QString>  
PASSWord  
<Space>  
<QString>  
Arguments  
Examples  
<QString> is the password and can include up to 10 characters. The factory  
default password is “XYZZY”and is always valid.  
PASSWORD "XYZZY"  
Enables the *PUB and NEWpass set commands.  
PASSWORD  
Disables the *PUD and NEWpass set commands. You can still use the query  
version of *PUD.  
2–245  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
*PSC  
Sets and queries the power-on status flag that controls the automatic power-on  
handling of the DESER, SRER, and ESER registers. When *PSC is true, the  
DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers are set to 0 at  
power-on. When *PSC is false, the current values in the DESER, SRER, and  
ESER registers are preserved in nonvolatile memory when power is shut off and  
are restored at power-on. For a complete discussion of the use of these registers,  
see page 3–1.  
Group  
Status and Error  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
DESE, *ESE, FACtory, *RST, *SRE  
*PSC <NR1>  
*PSC?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
*PSC  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> = 0 sets the power-on status clear flag to false, disables the power-on clear  
and allows the digitizing oscilloscope to possibly assert SRQ after power-on.  
<NR1> ꢀ 0 sets the power-on status clear flag true. Sending *PSC 1 therefore  
enables the power-on status clear and prevents any SRQ assertion after power-  
on. Using an out-of-range value causes an execution warning.  
*PSC 0  
sets the power-on status clear flag to false.  
*PSC?  
might return the value 1, showing that the power-on status clear flag is set to  
true.  
*PUD  
Sets or queries a string of Protected User Data. This data is protected by the  
PASSWord command. You can modify it only by first entering the correct  
password. The password is not necessary to query the data.  
2–246  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Miscellaneous  
PASSWord  
*PUD <Block>  
*PUD?  
<Space>  
<Block>  
?
*PUD  
Arguments  
Examples  
<Block> is a string containing up to 100 characters.  
*PUD #229This instrument belongs to me  
stores the string “This instrument belongs to me” in the user protected data area.  
*PUD?  
might return #221Property of Company X.  
*RCL (No Query Form)  
Restores the state of the digitizing oscilloscope from a copy of its settings stored  
in memory. (The settings are stored using the *SAV command.) This command  
is equivalent to RECAll:SETUp and performs the same function as the Recall  
Saved Setup item in the front-panel Save/Recall Setup menu.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Save and Recall  
DELEte:SETUp, FACtory, *LRN?, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp  
*RCL <NR1>  
*RCL  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
Arguments  
<NR1> is a value in the range from 1 to 10, and specifies a setup storage location.  
Using an out-of-range value causes an execution error (222, “Data out of range”).  
2–247  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
*RCL 3  
restores the digitizing oscilloscope from a copy of the settings stored in memory  
location 3.  
RECAll:ACQDATA (No Query Form)  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Replaces the indicated channel’s live acquisition data with that saved in the  
indicated file.  
Group  
Save and Recall  
Syntax  
RECAll:ACQDATA <file-path>, CH<x>  
RECAll  
:
ACQDATA  
<Space>  
<file path>  
,
CH  
<x>  
Arguments  
<file path> is the location in mass storage memory where the setup will be  
recalled from.  
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file  
path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more  
<dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will read the file from  
the current directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8 characters  
followed by a period (“.”) and any 3-character extension. Do not use wild card  
characters.  
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the  
FILESystem:CWD command.  
CH <x> is an input channel.  
Examples  
RECALL:ACQDATA hd0:/MYFILE.WF1",CH2  
replaces CH2’s data with that stored in hd0:/MYFILE.WF1.  
RECAll:SETUp (No Query Form)  
Restores a stored or factory front-panel setup of the digitizing oscilloscope. This  
command is equivalent to selecting Recall Saved Setup or Recall Factory  
Setup or Recall Current Setup in the Save/Recall Setup menu.  
Group  
Save and Recall  
2–248  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
DELEte:SETUp, FACtory, *RCL, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp  
RECAll:SETUp { FACtory | <NR1> | <file path> }  
FACtory  
<NR1>  
RECAll  
:
SETUp  
<Space>  
<file path>  
Arguments  
FACtory selects the factory setup.  
<NR1> is a value in the range from 1 to 10 and specifies a setup storage location.  
Using an out-of-range value causes an execution error (222, “Data out of range”).  
<file path> is the location in mass storage memory where the setup will be  
recalled from.  
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file  
path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more  
<dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will read the file from  
the default directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8 characters  
followed by a period (“.”) and any 3-character extension. Do not use wild card  
characters.  
The default directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the  
FILESystem:CWD command.  
Examples  
RECALL:SETUP FACTORY  
recalls (and makes current) the front panel setup to its factory defaults.  
RECALL:SETUP 1  
recalls the front panel setup from setup1.  
RECALL:SETUP TEK00000.SET"  
recalls the front panel setup from the file TEK00000.SET in the default directory  
and on the default drive.  
RECAll:WAVEform (No Query Form)  
File System Only  
Recalls a stored waveform into a reference location. This command is similar to  
selecting Recall File in the Save/Recall Waveform menu.  
Group  
Save and Recall  
2–249  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
RECAll:WAVEform <file path>,REF<x>  
RECAll  
:
WAVEform  
<Space>  
<file path>  
,
REF  
<x>  
Arguments  
REF<x> is the location in internal reference memory where the waveform is  
recalled from.  
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file  
path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more  
<dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will recall the  
waveform from the default directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to  
8 characters followed by a period (“.”) and any 3-character extension. Do not use  
wild card characters.  
The default directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the  
FILESystem:CWD command.  
Examples  
RECALL:WAVEFORM TEK00000.WFM",REF1  
recalls the waveform stored in the file named TEK00000.WFM to reference  
location 1.  
REM (No Query Form)  
Specifies a comment. This line is ignored by the instrument.  
Group  
Syntax  
Miscellaneous  
REM <QString>  
REM  
<Space>  
<QString>  
Arguments  
Examples  
<QString> is a string that can have a maximum of 80 characters.  
REM "This is a comment"  
is ignored by the instrument.  
*RST (No Query Form)  
(Reset) returns the digitizing oscilloscope to a known set of instrument settings,  
but does not purge any aliases or stored settings.  
2–250  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Status and Error  
FACtory, *PSC, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp  
*RST  
*RST  
*RST returns the instrument settings to the factory defaults (see Appendix D:  
Factory Initialization Settings).  
The *RST command does not alter the following:  
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
The state of the IEEE Std 488.1–1987 interface.  
The selected IEEE Std 488.1–1987 address of the digitizing oscilloscope.  
Calibration data that affect device specifications.  
The Output Queue.  
The Service Request Enable Register setting.  
The Standard Event Status Enable Register setting.  
The Power-on status clear flag setting.  
Alias definitions.  
Stored settings.  
The *PUD? response.  
RS232:BAUd  
RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only  
Sets or queries RS-232-C interface transmission speed.  
Group  
Syntax  
RS232  
RS232:BAUd <NR1>  
RS232:BAUd?  
2–251  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
RS232  
:
BAUd  
Arguments  
<NR1> where <NR1> can be 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200.  
Examples  
RS232:BAUD 9600  
sets the transmission rate to 9600 baud.  
RS232:HARDFlagging  
RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only  
Sets or queries the input and output hard flagging over the RS-232 port. It uses  
the RFR (Ready For Receive) and CTS (Clear To Send) lines to control data  
transmission. On output, the oscilloscope transmits data only when CTS is  
asserted. When CTS is not asserted, the oscilloscope stops transmitting data. On  
input, it asserts RFR until the receive queue is full. Then it unasserts RFR to stop  
transmission from an external printer. CTS remains unasserted until the receive  
queue is not full. At that time, CTS is asserted again to restart transmission.  
Group  
Syntax  
RS232  
RS232:HARDFlagging { ON | OFF | <NR1> }  
RS232:HARDFlagging?  
ON  
<Space>  
OFF  
<NR1>  
RS232  
:
HARDFlagging  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<ON> or <NR1>ꢀ 0 turn on hardflagging.  
<OFF> or <NR1> = 0 turn off hardflagging.  
RS232:HARDFLAGGING ON  
turns on hard flagging.  
2–252  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
RS232:PARity  
RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only  
Sets or queries the parity used for all RS-232-C data transfers. Parity adds a bit  
to the character sequence. When parity is odd or even, the digitizing oscilloscope  
generates the selected parity on output and checks all input against the selected  
parity. When parity is none, the digitizing oscilloscope performs no input parity  
error checks and generates no output parity.  
Group  
Syntax  
RS232  
RS232:PARity { EVEN | ODD | NONe }  
RS232:PARity?  
EVEN  
ODD  
<Space>  
NONe  
RS232  
:
PARity  
?
Arguments  
EVEN indicates the parity bit is sent with even parity and bytes received are  
expected to have even parity.  
ODD indicates the parity bit is sent with odd parity and bytes received are  
expected to have odd parity.  
NONe indicates that no parity bit is sent and none are expected.  
Examples  
RS232:PARITY EVEN  
sets the parity to even.  
RS232:SOFTFlagging  
RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only  
Sets or queries the input and output soft flagging over the RS-232 port. It stops  
transmitting data any time it receives an XOFF (DC3) character. It sends an  
XOFF character when its 512 byte input buffer has 80 free bytes. The digitizing  
oscilloscope begins transmitting data again when it receives an XON (DC1)  
character. It sends XON when its input buffer has 100 free bytes.  
Group  
RS232  
2–253  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
RS232:SOFTFlagging { ON | OFF | <NR1> }  
RS232:SOFTFlagging?  
ON  
OFF  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
RS232  
:
SOFTFlagging  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 turn on softflagging.  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turn off softflagging.  
RS232:SOFTFLAGGING ON  
turns on soft flagging.  
RS232:STOPBits  
RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only  
Sets or queries the number of transmission stop bits sent with each character to  
identify the end of data for that character.  
Group  
Syntax  
RS232  
RS232:STOPBits <NR1>  
RS232:STOPBits?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
RS232  
:
STOPBits  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> is 1 or 2.  
RS232:STOPBITS 1 sets the number of stop bits to 1.  
2–254  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
RS232? (Query Only)  
RS-232/Centronics Hardcopy Interface Only  
Queries the RS232 settings.  
Group  
Syntax  
RS232  
RS232?  
RS232  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
None  
RS232? queries for RS232 settings.  
It might return:  
RS232 BAUD: 9600, SOFTFLAGGING: OFF, HARDFLAGGING: ON, PARITY:  
NONE, STOPBITS: 1  
*SAV (No Query Form)  
(Save) stores the state of the digitizing oscilloscope into a specified memory  
location. You can later use the *RCL command to restore the digitizing  
oscilloscope to this saved state. This is equivalent to selecting the Save Current  
Setup in the Save/Recall Setup menu.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Save and Recall  
DELEte:SETUp, FACtory, *RCL, RECAll:SETUp, SAVe:SETUp  
*SAV <NR1>  
*SAV  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
Arguments  
<NR1> is a value in the range from 1 to 10 and specifies a location. Using an  
out-of-range value causes an execution error. Any settings that have been stored  
previously at this location will be overwritten.  
2–255  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
*SAV 2  
saves the current settings in memory location 2.  
SAVe:ACQDATA (No Query Form)  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Writes out the acquisition data and its characteristics to the indicated file.  
When extended-acquisition-length mode is on, this command will only write in  
the internal data format.  
Group  
Save and Recall  
Syntax  
SAVe:ACQDATA <file-path>, CH<x>  
SAVe  
:
ACQDATA  
CH  
<Space>  
<x>  
,
<file path>  
Arguments  
<file path> (available on instruments with the Option 1F File System) is the  
location in mass storage memory where the setup will be recalled from. It is a  
quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the  
form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are  
optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will read the file from the current  
directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8 characters followed by a  
period (“.”) and any 3-character extension. We recommend you use .WF1 to  
identify the extension to files that store waveform/acquisition data. Do not use  
wild card characters.  
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the  
FILESystem:CWD query.  
CH <x> is an input channel.  
Examples  
SAVE:ACQDATA CH3, "hd0:MYFILE.WF1"  
saves the CH3 acquisition data to the MYFILE.WF1 file on device hd0.  
SAVe:SETUp (No Query Form)  
Saves the current front-panel setup into the specified memory location or file.  
This is equivalent to selecting the Save Current Setup in the Save/Recall Setup  
menu.  
2–256  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Save and Recall  
DELEte:SETUp, RECAll:SETUp, *RCL, *SAV  
SAVe:SETUp { <NR1> | <file path> }  
<NR1>  
SAVe  
:
SETUp  
<Space>  
<file path>  
Arguments  
<NR1> is a value in the range from 1 to 10 and specifies a location. Using an  
out-of-range value causes an execution error. Any settings that have been stored  
previously at this location will be overwritten.  
<file path> (available on instruments with the Option 1F File System) is a  
quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the  
form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are  
optional. If you do not specify them, the TDS will write the file to the current  
directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8 characters followed by a  
period (“.”) and a 3-char extension . We recommend you use “SET” for the  
extension to identify files that store setup data.  
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the  
FILESystem:CWD query.  
Settings saved in one TDS oscilloscope may or may not work on a different  
model TDS or on the same model TDS with a different version of firmware.  
Examples  
SAVE:SETUP 5  
saves the current front-panel setup in memory location 5.  
SAVE:SETUP TEK00000.SET  
saves the current front-panel setup to the file TEK00000.SET in the current  
directory and on the current drive.  
SAVe:WAVEform (No Query Form)  
Stores a waveform in one of four reference memory locations or a mass storage  
file. This command is equivalent to selecting either the Save Waveform or the  
Save to File Waveform item in the Save/Recall Waveform menu.  
Group  
Save and Recall  
2–257  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
DELEte:WAVEform, SAVE:WAVEform:FILEFormat  
SAVe:WAVEform <wfm>,{ REF<x> | <file path> }  
REF  
<x>  
,
SAVe  
:
WAVEform  
<Space>  
<wfm>  
<file path>  
Arguments  
<wfm> is CH<x>, MATH<x>, or REF<x>, and is the waveform that will be  
saved.  
REF<x> is the location where the waveform will be stored.  
<file path> (on instruments with the Options 1F or HD File System) is a  
quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the  
form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are  
optional. If you do not specify them, the digitizing oscilloscope will write the  
file to the current directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 8  
characters followed by a period (“.”) and the proper 3-character extension.  
Internal format waveforms use the “WFM” extension. The TDS 400A, 500C,  
600B, and TDS 700C can also use a “CSV” extension for spreadsheet format files  
or a “DAT” extension for MathCad format files.  
The current directory refers to the name of a directory as returned by the  
FILESystem:CWD query.  
Examples  
SAVE:WAVEFORM MATH2,REF1  
saves the math 2 waveform in reference memory location 2.  
SAVE:WAVEFORM MATH1,TEK00000.WFM  
saves the math1 waveform to the file TEK00000.WFM in the default directory and  
on the default drive.  
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat  
Not on TDS 510A  
Specifies the file format for saved waveforms.  
Group  
Save and Recall  
Related Commands  
SAVE:WAVEform  
2–258  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat{ INTERNal | SPREADSheet | MATHCad }  
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat?  
INTERNal  
SPREADSheet  
MATHCad  
<Space>  
SAVe  
:
WAVEform  
:
FILEFormat  
?
Arguments  
INTERNal specifies the internal format. Internal format files usually have a .wfm  
extension.  
When Extended-Acquisition-Length mode is on, the convention is to use a .wf1  
extension. Also, the oscilloscope will only use this internal format with this  
mode.  
SPREADSheet specifies the spreadsheet format. Spreadsheet format files usually  
have a .CSV extension.  
MATHCad specifies the MathCad format. MathCad format files usually have a  
.DAT extension.  
If you are writing a MathCad program, you should be aware that the  
TDS-MathCad file has the following features:  
H
H
H
H
H
ASCII format  
first four values contain header information  
first header value holds the TDS waveform record length  
second header value holds time, in seconds, between samples  
third header value holds the trigger position  
(expressed as an index in the data position. For extended-acquisition-length  
records, the index reported can be outside the waveform because the trigger  
can be outside the waveform. If before the waveform, it’s negative. If after,  
it’s a large positive)  
H
H
fourth header value refers to the fractional trigger position  
delimiters are carriage returns  
Examples  
SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT SPREADSHEET  
specifies the waveform, when saved, will be stored in a spreadsheet-compatible  
format.  
2–259  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
SELect? (Query Only)  
Returns the selected waveform and the display status of all waveforms.  
Group  
Syntax  
Vertical  
SELect?  
SELect  
?
Examples  
SELECT?  
might return :SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;CH3 0;CH4 0;MATH1 0;  
MATH2 0;MATH3 0;REF1 0;REF2 0;REF3 0;REF4 0;SELECT CH1  
SELect:<wfm>  
Controls the display and selection of waveforms. There can be up to eleven  
waveforms displayed at one time, but only one waveform can be selected at a  
time. The selected waveform is the waveform that was most recently turned on.  
This command is equivalent to pressing a front-panel CH or MORE button.  
<wfm> can be CH<x>, MATH<x>, or REF<x> except in extended-acquisition-  
length and InstaVu modes where MATH<x> is not used.  
Group  
Syntax  
Vertical  
SELect:<wfm> {OFF | ON | <NR1> }  
SELect:<wfm>?  
OFF  
<Space>  
ON  
<NR1>  
:
SELect  
<wfm>  
?
Arguments  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform.  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 turns on the display of the specified waveform. The waveform  
also becomes the selected waveform.  
2–260  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
SELECT:CH2 ON  
turns the channel 2 display on and selects channel 2.  
SELECT:REF1?  
returns either 0 or 1, indicating whether the REF1 waveform is selected.  
SELect:CONTROl  
Sets or queries the waveform that is currently affected by the cursor and vertical  
commands.  
<wfm> can be CH<x>, MATH<x>, or REF<x> except in extended-acquisition-  
length and InstaVu modes where MATH<x> is not used.  
Group  
Syntax  
Vertical  
SELect:CONTROl <wfm>  
SELect:CONTROl?  
<Space>  
<wfm>  
?
:
SELect  
CONTROl  
Arguments  
Examples  
<wfm> is CH<x>, MATH<x>, or REF<x>, and is the selected waveform.  
SELECT:CONTROL?  
might return CH1 as the selected waveform.  
SET? (Query Only)  
Returns a string listing the digitizing oscilloscope settings, except for configura-  
tion information for the calibration values. You can use this string to return the  
digitizing oscilloscope to the state it was in when you made the SET? query.  
This command is identical to the *LRN? command.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Miscellaneous  
HEADer, *LRN?, VERBose  
SET?  
2–261  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
SET  
?
NOTE. The SET? query always returns a string with command headers,  
regardless of the setting of the HEADer command. This is because the returned  
string is intended to be able to be sent back to the digitizing oscilloscope as a  
command string. The VERBose command can still be used to specify whether the  
returned headers should be abbreviated or full length.  
Examples  
SET?  
a partial return string may look like this:  
:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG  
16;REPET 1;:APPMENU:TITLE "Application Menu";LABEL:BOTTOM1  
"";BOTTOM2 "";BOTTOM3 "";BOTTOM4 "";BOTTOM5 "";BOTTOM6 "";BOTTOM7  
"";RIGHT1 "";RIGHT2 ""; RIGHT3 "";RIGHT4 "";RIGHT5 "";:HEADER  
1;:VERBOSE 1;:ALIAS:STATE 0;:DISPLAY:FORMAT YT;STYLE VECTORS;  
FILTER SINX;PERSISTENCE 500.0E-3;GRATICULE FULL;TRIGT 1;INTENSIĆ  
TY:OVERALL 85;WAVEFORM75;TEXT 60;CONTRAST 150;:MESSAGE:SHOW  
"hello";STATE 1;BOX 74,84,475,135;:LOCK NONE; :HARDCOPY:FORMAT  
EPSIMAGE;PORT GPIB;LAYOUT PORTRAIT;  
*SRE  
(Service Request Enable) sets and queries the bits in the Service Request Enable  
Register (SRER). For a complete discussion of the use of these registers, see  
page 3–1.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Status and Error  
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMSg?, FACtory, *PSC, *STB?  
*SRE <NR1>  
*SRE?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
*SRE  
Arguments  
<NR1> is a value in the range from 0 to 255. The binary bits of the SRER are set  
according to this value. Using an out-of-range value causes an execution error.  
2–262  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
The power-on default for SRER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the SRER  
maintains its value through a power cycle.  
Examples  
*SRE 48  
sets the bits in the SRER to 00110000 binary.  
*SRE?  
might return a value of 32, showing that the bits in the SRER have the binary  
value 00100000.  
*STB? (Query Only)  
(Read Status Byte) query returns the contents of the Status Byte Register (SBR)  
using the Master Summary Status (MSS) bit. For a complete discussion of the  
use of these registers, see page 3–1.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Status and Error  
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMSg?, FACtory, *SRE  
*STB?  
?
*STB  
Returns  
<NR1>  
*STB?  
Examples  
might return the value 96, showing that the SBR contains the binary value  
01100000.  
TEKSecure  
Initializes both waveform and setup memories. This overwrites any previously  
stored data.  
TEKSecure writes zeros in all waveform reference memory, regardless of  
selected record length, and puts all setups in the factory init state.  
TEKSecure then verifies that the waveform and setup memory are in the desired  
state. It asserts a pass or a fail event on completion.  
2–263  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Syntax  
Miscellaneous  
TEKSecure  
TEKSecure  
TIMe  
Sets or queries the time that the digitizing oscilloscope can display.  
Group  
Miscellaneous  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
DATE, DISplay: CLOCk  
TIMe <QString>  
TIMe?  
<Space>  
<QString>  
?
TIMe  
Arguments  
Examples  
<QString> is a date in the form hh:mm:ss".  
hh refers to the hour number from 01 to 24.  
mm refers to the minute number in the hour from 00 to 59.  
ss refers to the seconds number in the minute from 00 to 59.  
There must be a colon after the hh and after the mm.  
Use two digits for each of the hh, mm, and ss.  
TIME "01:24:00"  
specifies that the time is set to 01:24 AM.  
TRIGger  
Forces a trigger event to occur, and the TRIGger query returns the current trigger  
parameters.  
2–264  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger FORCe  
TRIGger?  
<Space>  
FORCe  
?
TRIGger  
Arguments  
Examples  
FORCe creates a trigger event. If TRIGger:STATE is REAdy, the acquisition will  
complete, otherwise this command will be ignored. This is equivalent to pressing  
the front-panel FORCE TRIGGER button.  
TRIGGER FORCe  
forces a trigger event to occur.  
TRIGGER?  
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL -480.0E-3;  
HOLDOFF:VALUE 0;:TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE  
RISE;:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN;FUNCTION AND;WHEN  
TRUE;THRESHOLD:CH1 1.40E+0;CH2 1.200E+0;CH3 1.200E+0;CH4  
1.200E+0;:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 X;CH3 X;  
:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 X;:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:  
STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE;:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE CH1;  
GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0E-9;FILTER ACCEPT;POLARITY POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:  
MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 2.00E+0;LOW  
800.0E-3;:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0E-9;HIGHLIMIT  
2.0E-9;WHEN WITHIN;POLARITY POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:DELAY:TYPE  
EDGE;LEVEL -480.0E-3;BY TIME; EDGE:SOURCE CH1;SLOPE RISE;COUPLING  
DC;:TRIGGER:DELAY:TIME 16.0E-9;EVENTS:COUNT 2  
TRIGger:DELay  
Sets the delayed trigger level and returns the current delayed trigger parameters.  
Trigger  
Group  
Syntax  
TRIGger:DELay SETLevel  
TRIGger:DELay?  
2–265  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
<Space>  
SETLevel  
?
TRIGger  
:
DELay  
Arguments  
SETLevel sets the delayed trigger level to half way between the MIN and MAX  
amplitudes of the trigger source input. This is equivalent to selecting Set to 50%  
in the Delayed Edge Level side menu.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:DELAY SETLEVEL  
sets the delayed trigger level to 50% of MAX and MIN.  
TRIGGER:DELAY?  
might return :TRIGGER:DELAY:TYPE EDGE;LEVEL 0.0E+0;BY  
TIME;EDGE:SOURCE CH1;SLOPE RISE;COUPLING DC;:TRIGGER:DELAY:TIME  
16.0E-9;EVENTS:COUNT 2  
TRIGger:DELay:BY  
Selects whether the delayed trigger occurs after a specified number of events or a  
specified period of time after the main trigger. This is equivalent to setting Delay  
by in the Delayed Trig menu.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt, TRIGger:DELay:TIMe  
TRIGger:DELay:BY  
{ EVENTS | TIMe | EVENTSTime (TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C only) |  
RUNSAfter }  
TRIGger:DELay:BY?  
EVENTS  
TIMe  
EVENTSTime  
<Space>  
RUNSAfter  
:
:
DELay  
TRIGger  
BY  
?
2–266  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Arguments  
EVENTS sets the delayed trigger to occur after a set number of trigger events after  
the main trigger. The number of events is specified by  
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt.  
TIMe sets the delayed trigger to be ready to occur a set time after the main trigger  
event. The time period is specified by TRIGger:DELay:TIMe.  
EVENTSTime (TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C only) sets a specified time after a  
specified number of delay trigger trigger events — after the main trigger event.  
For example in examining a pulse train, you might use the main trigger to detect  
the start of the train, then use the delay by events to go to the position of interest  
within the pulse train, and then use the time delay to wait a specified time period  
before starting the data acquisition.  
RUNSAfter looks for a main trigger, then waits a user-specified time, then starts  
acquiring data.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:DELAY:BY?  
might return EVENTS.  
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE? (Query Only)  
Returns the coupling, slope, and source for the delayed trigger.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE?  
TRIGger  
:
DELay  
:
EDGE  
?
Examples  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE?  
might return :TRIGGER:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;SLOPE RISE;  
COUPLING DC  
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:COUPling  
Selects the type of coupling for the delayed trigger. This command is equivalent  
to selecting Coupling in the Delayed Trig menu.  
Group  
Trigger  
2–267  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:COUPling { AC (TDS 400A, 510A) | DC | HFRej  
(TDS 400A, 510A) | LFRej (TDS 400A, 510A) | MAINTrigger (TDS 500C,  
600B & 700C only) | NOISErej }  
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:COUPling?  
AC  
TRIGger  
:
DELay  
:
EDGE  
:
COUPling  
DC  
HFRej  
<Space>  
LFRej  
MAINTrigger  
NOISErej  
?
Arguments  
AC selects AC trigger coupling (TDS 400A, 510A).  
DC selects DC trigger coupling.  
HFRej coupling removes the high frequency components of the DC signal  
(TDS 400A, 510A).  
LFRej coupling removes the low frequency components of the AC signal  
(TDS 400A, 510A).  
MAINTrigger coupling sets the delayed trigger coupling to match the setting on  
the main trigger (TDS 500C, 600B & 700C only).  
NOISErej selects DC low sensitivity.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:COUPLING DC  
sets the delay trigger to DC coupling.  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:COUPLING?  
might return LFREJ for the delayed trigger coupling.  
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SLOpe  
Selects either a rising or falling edge for the delayed trigger. This command is  
equivalent to selecting Slope in the Delayed Trig menu.  
Group  
Trigger  
2–268  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SLOpe { RISe | FALL }  
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SLOpe?  
:
:
SLOpe  
TRIGger  
:
DELay  
EDGE  
RISe  
FALL  
<Space>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.  
RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:SLOPE?  
might return RISE, indicating that the delayed trigger occurs on the rising edge.  
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SOUrce  
Selects the source for the delayed trigger. This command is equivalent to  
selecting Source in the Delayed Trig menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SOUrce { AUXiliary (not available on TDS 520C &  
724C) | CH<x> }  
TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SOUrce?  
:
:
SOUrce  
TRIGger  
:
DELay  
EDGE  
AUXiliary  
CH  
<Space>  
<x>  
?
Arguments  
AUXiliary specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger Input  
connector that is located on the rear panel of the instrument. The TDS 520C &  
724C do not have an Auxiliary Trigger input and so do not support this  
argument.  
2–269  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
CH<x> specifies one of the input channels.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:SOURCE CH1  
selects channel 1 as the input source for the delayed trigger.  
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS? (Query Only)  
Returns the current delayed trigger event parameter.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS?  
:
?
TRIGger  
:
DELay  
EVENTS  
Examples  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS?  
might return :TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS:COUNT 2  
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt  
Sets or queries the number of events that must occur before the delayed trigger  
occurs when TRIGger:DELay:BY is set to EVENTS. This is equivalent to  
setting the Delay by Events count in the Delayed Edge Delay side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt <NR1>  
TRIGger:DELay:EVENTS:COUNt?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
:
:
TRIGger  
:
DELay  
EVENTS  
COUNt  
Arguments  
<NR1> is the number of delayed edge trigger events. The TDS 400A range is 1 to  
(10E7 –1). The TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, and 700C range is 2 to 10E7.  
2–270  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS:COUNT 4  
specifies that the delayed trigger will occur four trigger events after the main  
trigger.  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS:COUNT?  
might return 2, indicating that two events must occur after the main trigger  
before the delayed trigger can occur.  
TRIGger:DELay:LEVel  
Selects the level of the delayed trigger. This command is equivalent to setting  
LEVel in the Delayed Trig menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:DELay:LEVel { ECL | TTL | <NR3> }  
TRIGger:DELay:LEVel?  
ECL  
<Space>  
TTL  
<NR3>  
TRIGger  
:
:
DELay  
LEVel  
?
Arguments  
ECL specifies a preset ECL level of –1.3 V.  
TTL specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.  
<NR3> is the delayed trigger level, in volts.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:DELAY:LEVEL 2E-3  
sets the delayed trigger level to 2 mV.  
TRIGger:DELay:TIMe  
Sets or queries the delay time when HORizontal:DELay:MODe is set to  
TRIGAfter. This command is identical to the HORizontal:DELay:TIME:TRIG-  
After command, and is equivalent to setting the Delay by Time value in the  
Delayed Edge Delay side menu.  
When HORizontal:DELay:MODe is set to RUNSAfter, the delay time is set by  
the HORizontal:DELay:TIME:RUNSAfter command.  
2–271  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Trigger  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
HORizontal:DELay:MODe, HORizontal:DELay:TIME:RUNSAfter,  
HORizontal:DELay:TIME:TRIGAfter  
TRIGger:DELay:TIMe <NR3>  
TRIGger:DELay:TIMe?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
TRIGger  
:
DELay  
:
TIMe  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the delay time, in seconds.  
TRIGGER:DELAY:TIME 4E-6  
sets the delay time to 4 ms.  
TRIGger:DELay:TYPe  
Sets or queries the type of delayed trigger.  
Trigger  
Group  
Syntax  
TRIGger:DELay:TYPe EDGE  
TRIGger:DELay:TYPe?  
<Space>  
EDGE  
?
TRIGger  
:
DELay  
:
TYPe  
Arguments  
EDGE is a normal trigger. A trigger event occurs when a signal passes through a  
specified voltage level in a specified direction. Use the TRIGger:DELay:LEVel  
and TRIGger:DELay:EDGE:SLOpe commands to set the voltage level and  
direction respectively.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:DELAY:TYPE?  
always returns EDGE as the type of delayed trigger.  
2–272  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn  
Sets the main trigger level and returns the current main trigger parameters.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn SETLevel  
TRIGger:MAIn?  
<Space>  
SETLevel  
?
:
TRIGger  
MAIn  
Arguments  
SETLevel sets the main trigger level to half way between the MIN and MAX  
amplitudes of the trigger source input. This is equivalent to pressing the  
front-panel SET LEVel TO 50% button.  
This argument works differently with AMI Communications Triggering settings.  
Specifically, when AMI is chosen, this command measures the peak-to-peak  
level and sets an upper threshold value at 75% and a lower threshold value at  
25% of the peak-to-peak value. If the pulse form is CMI, NRZ, or an Eye  
Diagram, the level is set to 50%.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN SETLEVEL  
sets the main trigger level mid way between MAX and MIN.  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:PULSEForm  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the communication trigger AMI pulse form to one of three  
possibilities.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:PULSEForm { PLUSOne | MINUSOne |  
EYEdiagram }  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:PULSEForm?  
2–273  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
:
COMMunication  
PLUSOne  
<Space>  
MINUSOne  
EEYEdiagram  
:
AMI  
PULSEForm  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
PLUSOne corresponds to the Isolated +1 on the front panel menu. This is the  
default value.  
MINUSOne corresponds to the Isolated –1.  
EYEdiagram corresponds to Eye Diagram.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMM:AMI:PULSEFORM PLUSONE  
selects the AMI pulseform to the Isolated +1.  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:THReshold:HIGH  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the AMI communication trigger’s high threshold value in volts.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:THReshold:HIGH?  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
:
COMMunication  
<NR3>  
<Space>  
:
AMI  
:
THReshold  
HIGH  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the high value of the threshold. The unit of measure is volts. The  
default is +0.5 volts.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMM:AMI:THRESHOLD:HIGH 2.8 E–2  
sets the high threshold to 28 milliVolts.  
2–274  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:THReshold:LOW  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the AMI communication trigger’s low threshold value in volts.  
Trigger  
Group  
Syntax  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:THReshold:LOW <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:AMI:THReshold:LOW?  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
:
COMMunication  
<NR3>  
<Space>  
:
AMI  
:
THReshold  
LOW  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the low value of the threshold. The unit of measure is volts. The default  
is –0.5 volts.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMM:AMI:THRESHOLD:LOW 2.8 E–2  
sets the low threshold to 28 milliVolts.  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:BITRate  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the communication trigger signal bit rate. If this command  
changes the bit rate, the command then also causes the communication standard  
to set to “custom”. If both the TRIGger:MAIn;COMMunication:STANDard  
command and the TRIGger:MAIn;COMMunication:BITRate command are used,  
the last one executed takes precedence.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:BITRate { <NR3> }  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:BITRate?  
2–275  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
:
COMMunication  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
BITRate  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3>is the bit rate in bits per second. The default is 1.544e+6.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMM:BITRATE 1.053 E+8  
sets the bit rate to 105.3 Mb/s.  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CMI:PULSEForm  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the communication trigger CMI pulse form to one of three  
possibilities.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CMI:PULSEForm { PLUSOne | MINUSOne |  
EYEdiagram | ZERO }  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CMI:PULSEForm?  
PLUSOne  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
:
COMMunication  
MINUSOne  
EYEdiagram  
ZERO  
<Space>  
:
CMI  
PULSEForm  
?
Arguments  
PLUSOne corresponds to triggering on a positive mark. This is the default value.  
MINUSOne corresponds to triggering on a negative mark.  
EYEdiagram selects an Eye Diagram image.  
ZERO corresponds to triggering on a Zero bit.  
2–276  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMM:CMI:PULSEFORM PLUSONE  
selects a trigger on a positive mark.  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CODe  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the communication trigger signal code.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CODe { AMI | CMI | NRZ }  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:CODe?  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
:
COMMunication  
AMI  
CMI  
NRZ  
<Space>  
CODe  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
AMI refers to the Alternate Mark Inversion encoding scheme. This is the default.  
CMI refers to the Coded Mark Inversion encoding scheme.  
NRZ refers to Non-Return to Zero codes.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMM:CODE AMI  
selects the AMI communication code.  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:NRZ:PULSEForm  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the communication trigger NRZ pulse form to one of 19  
possibilities.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:NRZ:PULSEForm { EYEdiagram | RISE |  
FALL | PATTERN0 | PATTERN1 | PATTERN2 | PATTERN3 | PATTERN4 |  
2–277  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
PATTERN5 | PATTERN6 | PATTERN7 | P0 | P1 | P2 | P3 | P4 | P5 | P6  
| P7 }  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:NRZ:PULSEForm?  
EYEdiagram  
RISE  
FALL  
PATTERN1  
PATTERN2  
PATTERN3  
PATTERN4  
PATTERN5  
PATTERN6  
PATTERN7  
P1  
P2  
P3  
P4  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
:
COMMunication  
P5  
P6  
P7  
<Space>  
:
NRZ  
PULSEForm  
?
Arguments  
EYEdiagram selects an Eye Diagram image. This is the default value.  
RISE selects a positive edge trigger.  
FALL selects a negative edge trigger.  
PATTERN0 causes a trigger on Pattern0. Intersymbol interference can be identified  
with the Pattern Violations Trigger. The leading symbol (0, 1, x) and trailing  
symbol (0, 1, x) are bit values that precede or follow the three symbols of  
interest (in the middle). The underlying trigger that implements Pattern Violation  
Triggering is pulse width triggering.  
PATTERN1 causes a trigger on Pattern1 1 001 x.  
PATTERN2 causes a trigger on Pattern2 x 010 x.  
PATTERN3 causes a trigger on Pattern3 x 011 0.  
2–278  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
PATTERN4 causes a trigger on Pattern4 x 100 1.  
PATTERN5 causes a trigger on Pattern5 x 101 x.  
PATTERN6 causes a trigger on Pattern6 0 110 x.  
PATTERN7 causes a trigger on Pattern7 0 111 0.  
P0 is a synonym for PATTERN0.  
P1 is a synonym for PATTERN1.  
P2 is a synonym for PATTERN2.  
P3 is a synonym for PATTERN3.  
P4 is a synonym for PATTERN4.  
P5 is a synonym for PATTERN5.  
P6 is a synonym for PATTERN6.  
P7 is a synonym for PATTERN7.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMM:NRZ:PULSEFORM EYEDIAGRAM  
selects a trigger on an Eye Diagram image.  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:SOUrce  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the source for the main communication trigger. This is equivalent  
to selecting the source in the Communication Source side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:SOUrce CH<x>  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:SOUrce?  
TRIGger  
:
:
SOUrce  
MAIn  
:
COMMunication  
<Space>  
CH  
<x>  
?
2–279  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Arguments  
Examples  
CH<x> specifies one of the input channels.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE CH2  
selects Channel 2 as the source for the main communication trigger.  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:STANdard  
TDS 500C & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the communication trigger standard which identifies the code and  
bit rate.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:STANdard { DS1 | DS1A | DS1C | DS2 |  
DS3 | DS4NA | E1 | E2 | E3 | E4 | E5 | STS1 | STS3 | OC1 | OC3 |  
OC12 | STM1E | FC133 | FC266 | FC531 | FC1063 | FDDI | D1 | D2 |  
CUSTom }  
TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunication:STANdard?  
2–280  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
DS1  
DS1A  
DS1C  
DS2  
DS3  
DS4NA  
E1  
E2  
E3  
E4  
E5  
STS1  
STS3  
OC1  
OC3  
OC12  
STM1E  
FC133  
FC266  
FC531  
FC1063  
FDDI  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
:
COMMunication  
D1  
D2  
<Space>  
CUSTom  
STANdard  
?
Arguments  
DS1 refers to DS1 (1.544 Mb/s) AMI standard.  
DS1A refers to DS1A (2.048 Mb/s) AMI standard.  
DS1C refers to DS1C (3.152 Mb/s) AMI standard.  
DS2 refers to DS2 (6.312 Mb/s) AMI standard.  
DS3 refers to DS3 (44.736 Mb/s) AMI standard.  
DS4NA refers to DS4NA (139.26 Mb/s) CMI standard.  
2–281  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
E1 refers to E1 (2.048 Mb/s) AMI standard.  
E2 refers to E2 (8.44 Mb/s) AMI standard.  
E3 refers to E3 (34.368 Mb/s) AMI standard.  
E4 refers to E4 (139.26 Mb/s) CMI standard.  
E5 refers to E5 or CEPT (565 Mb/s) NRZ standard.  
STS1 refers to STS–1 (51.84 Mb/s) AMI standard.  
STS3 refers to STS–3 (155.52 Mb/s) CMI standard.  
OC1 refers to OC1/STM0 (51.84 Mb/s) CMI standard.  
OC3 refers to OC3/STM1 (155.52 Mb/s) NRZ standard.  
OC12 refers to OC12/STM4 (622.08 Mb/s) NRZ standard.  
STM1E refers to STM1E (155.52 Mb/s) CMI standard.  
FC133 refers to FC133 (132.7 Mb/s) NRZ standard.  
FC266 refers to FC266 (265.6 Mb/s) NRZ standard.  
FC531 refers to FC531 (531.2 Mb/s) NRZ standard.  
FC1063 refers to FC1063 (1.063 Gb/s) NRZ standard.  
FDDI refers to FDDI (125 Mb/s) NRZ standard.  
D1 refers to 4:2:2 or D1 (270 Mb/s) NRZ standard.  
D2 refers to 4fsc NTSC or D2 (143.18 Mb/s) NRZ standard.  
CUSTom can take a non-standard, floating-point bit rate. <NR3>.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMM:STANDARD E4  
selects the E4 communication standard.  
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE? (Query Only)  
Returns the trigger coupling, source, and slope for the main edge trigger.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE?  
2–282  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
:
EDGE  
?
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE?  
might return SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE  
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling  
Sets or queries the type of coupling for the main edge trigger. This is equivalent  
to setting Coupling in the Trigger menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling { AC | DC | HFRej | LFRej | NOISErej }  
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:COUPling?  
AC  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn:  
:
EDGE  
COUPling  
DC  
<Space>  
HFRej  
LFRej  
NOISErej  
?
Arguments  
AC selects AC trigger coupling.  
DC selects DC trigger coupling.  
HFRej coupling removes the high frequency components of the DC signal.  
LFRej coupling removes the low frequency components of the AC signal.  
NOISErej selects DC low sensitivity. It requires added signal amplitude for more  
stable, less false triggering.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:COUPLING DC  
sets the main edge trigger coupling to DC.  
2–283  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe  
Selects a rising or falling slope for the main edge trigger. This is equivalent to  
setting Slope in the Trigger menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe { FALL | RISe }  
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SLOpe?  
:
EDGE  
:
SLOpe  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
FALL  
RISe  
<Space>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.  
RISE specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SLOPE RISE  
sets the main edge trigger to occur on the rising slope.  
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce  
Sets or queries the source for the main edge trigger. This is equivalent to setting  
Source in the Trigger menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce { AUXiliary (not available on TDS 520C &  
TDS 724C) | CH<x> | LINE }  
TRIGger:MAIn:EDGE:SOUrce?  
2–284  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
:
EDGE  
:
SOUrce  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
AUXiliary  
<x>  
?
CH  
<Space>  
LINE  
Arguments  
Examples  
AUXiliary specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger Input  
connector located on the rear panel of the oscilloscope. The TDS 520C and 724C  
do not have an Auxiliary Trigger input and so do not support this argument.  
CH<x> specifies one of the input channels.  
LINE specifies AC line voltage.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE LINE  
specifies the AC line voltage as the main edge trigger source.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE?  
might return CH2 for the main edge trigger source.  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff? (Query Only)  
For TDS 500C, 600B and 700C, returns the main trigger holdoff default (TIMe  
or DEFAult) and main trigger holdoff time. For the TDS 400A and 510A, returns  
the main trigger holdoff value.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff?  
TRIGger  
:
:
MAIn  
HOLDOff  
?
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF?  
for the TDS 500C, 600B and 700C, might return  
:TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:TIME 250.0E-9;BYDEFAULT  
or, for TDS 400A and 510A, might return  
:TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:VALUE 0.  
2–285  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:ACTUal? (Query Only)  
TDS 500C, 600B and 700C Only  
Returns the main trigger holdoff value in seconds. This is equivalent to selecting  
Mode & Holdoff from the main Trigger menu and viewing the value in the side  
menu Holdoff Default or Holdoff Time items (whichever is highlighted).  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:ACTUal?  
TRIGger:  
:
:
MAIn  
HOLDOff  
ACTUal  
?
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:ACTUAL?  
might return 4E–6 showing the holdoff time is set to 4 ms.  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:BY  
TDS 500C, 600B & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the main trigger holdoff default. This is equivalent to selecting  
Mode & Holdoff from the main Trigger menu, then setting Default Holdoff or  
Holdoff (Time) in the resulting side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:BY { TIMe | DEFAult }  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:BY?  
TIMe  
:
HOLDOff  
:
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
<Space>  
DEFAult  
BY  
?
Arguments  
TIMe enables the user to set the holdoff time.  
DEFAult automatically calculates a holdoff time to use. This time is typically  
equivalent to the greater of ½ screen (5 divisions) of time or 250 ns. The  
maximum value is 12 seconds. For example, if the oscilloscope is set to  
2–286  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
1 msec/division then the default holdoff will be 1 msec/division × 25 divs =  
25 msec.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:BY TIME  
sets the holdoff to the by time setting. This enables the user to set the holdoff  
time.  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:TIMe  
TDS 500C, 600B & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the main trigger holdoff time. This is equivalent to setting  
Holdoff Time in the Mode & Holdoff side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:TIMe <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:TIMe?  
:
HOLDOff  
:
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
:
TIMe  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> holdoff time in seconds. The range is 250 ns to 12.0 seconds.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:TIME 10  
sets the holdoff time to be 10 seconds.  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue  
TDS 400A & 510A Only  
Sets or queries the main trigger holdoff value. This is equivalent to setting  
Holdoff in the Mode & Holdoff side menu.  
Group  
Trigger  
2–287  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue <NR1>  
TRIGger:MAIn:HOLDOff:VALue?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
TRIGger  
:
:
MAIn  
HOLDOff  
:
VALue  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> is from 0 to 100, and is a percent of the holdoff range.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:VALUE 10  
set the holdoff value to be 10% of the holdoff range.  
TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel  
Sets the main trigger level. This command is equivalent to adjusting the  
front-panel TRIGGER MAIN LEVEL knob.  
With Communications triggers, this command makes no change to AMI  
thresholds. It does change CMI and NRZ levels. It makes no change to value  
ranges.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel { ECL | TTL | <NR3> }  
TRIGger:MAIn:LEVel?  
ECL  
<Space>  
TTL  
<NR3>  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
LEVel  
?
Arguments  
ECL specifies a preset ECL level of –1.3 V.  
TTL specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.  
<NR3> is the main trigger level, in volts.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL?  
might return TTL, indicating that the main edge trigger is set to 1.4 V.  
2–288  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL 0.5  
sets the main trigger level to 0.5 V.  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc? (Query Only)  
Not on TDS 400A  
Returns all main logic trigger parameters.  
Trigger  
Group  
Syntax  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc?  
TRIGger  
:
:
MAIn  
LOGIc  
?
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC?  
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN;  
FUNCTION AND;WHEN TRUE;THRESHOLD:CH1 0;CH2 0;CH3 0;  
CH4 0;:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 X;  
CH3 X;:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 X;  
:TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss  
Not on TDS 400A  
Sets or queries the type of main logic trigger. This command is equivalent to  
selecting Class in the Trigger menu when the Type is set to Logic.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss { PATtern | STATE  
SETHold (TDS 500C, 600B & 700C only)}  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss?  
2–289  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
:
LOGIc  
:
CLAss  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
PATtern  
STATE  
<Space>  
SETHold  
?
Arguments  
PATtern means that the instrument triggers when the specified logical combina-  
tions of channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are met.  
STATE means that the instrument triggers when the specified conditions of  
channels 1, 2, and 3 are met after the channel 4 condition is met.  
SETHold means the oscilloscope will trigger on the setup and hold violations  
between a data source and a clock source (TDS 500C, 600B & 700C only).  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:CLASS?  
might return STATE.  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:FUNCtion  
Not on TDS 400A  
Sets or queries the logical combination of the input channels for the main logic  
trigger.  
When TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss is PATtern, this command applies to  
channels 1, 2, 3, and 4. When TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss is STATE, only  
channels 1, 2, and 3 are logically combined. This command is equivalent to  
selecting the function in the Logic Pattern Function side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:FUNCtion { AND | NANd | NOR | OR }  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:FUNCtion?  
2–290  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
AND  
NANd  
NOR  
OR  
<Space>  
TRIGger  
:
:
LOGIc  
:
FUNCtion  
MAIn  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
AND specifies that the instrument will trigger if all the conditions are true.  
NANd specifies that the instrument will trigger if any of the conditions are false.  
NOR specifies that the instrument will trigger if all of the conditions are false.  
OR specifies that the instrument will trigger if any of the conditions are true.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:FUNCTION NOR  
sets the logical combination of channels to be true when none of the conditions  
are true.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:FUNCTION?  
might return NAND.  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut? (Query Only)  
Not on TDS 400A  
Returns the main logic trigger input for all channels.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut?  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
:
LOGIc  
INPut  
?
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT?  
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 X;CH3 X  
2–291  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>  
Not on TDS 400A  
Sets or queries the main logic trigger input for the specified channel. The  
channel is specified by <x> and is 1, 2, or 3. This is equivalent to setting the  
inputs in the Logic Pattern Inputs side menu.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> { HIGH | LOW | X }  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>?  
HIGH  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
LOGIc  
:
LOW  
X
<Space>  
INPut  
:
CH  
<x>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
HIGH specifies logic high.  
LOW specifies logic low.  
X specifies a do not care state.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT:CH2 LOW  
sets the main logic trigger input to logic low for channel 2.  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4  
Not on TDS 400A  
Sets or queries the main logic trigger input for channel 4. These are the inputs  
used when TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss is set to PATtern. This is equivalent to  
setting the channel 4 input in the Logic Pattern Inputs side menu.  
Group  
Trigger  
Related Commands  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss  
2–292  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4 { HIGH | LOW | X }  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4?  
TRIGger:  
MAIn  
:
LOGIc  
:
HIGH  
LOW  
X
<Space>  
:
PATtern  
INPut  
:
CH4  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
HIGH specifies logic high.  
LOW specifies logic low.  
X specifies a do not care state.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 LOW  
sets the main logic trigger input to logic low for channel 4 when the logic class is  
set to PATtern.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4?  
might return X, indicating that the logic input for channel 4 is do not care.  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn  
Not on TDS 400A  
Sets or queries a condition for generating a main logic pattern trigger.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn { TRUe | FALSe | LESSThan |  
MOREThan }  
TRIGger:MAIn: LOGIc: PATtern: WHEn?  
2–293  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger  
:
:
LOGIc  
:
PATtern  
MAIn  
TRUe  
FALSe  
LESSThan  
<Space>  
MOREThan  
?
:
WHEn  
Arguments  
TRUe specifies the trigger to occur when the pattern becomes true.  
FALSe specifies the trigger to occur when the pattern becomes false.  
LESSThan specifies trigger to occur if the specific pattern is true less than the  
LESSLimit. (see Figure 2–6 and TRIGger:MAIn:LOGic:PATĆ  
tern:WHEn:LESSLimit) Trigger is evaluated at the true-false transition.  
MOREThan specifies trigger to occur if the specific pattern is true longer than the  
more limit. (see Figure 2–6 and TRIGger:MAIn:LOGic:PATtern:WHEn:MORELiĆ  
mit) Trigger is evaluated at the true-false transition.  
MORELimit  
LESSLimit  
t
o
Specified Pattern  
Result  
Figure 2–6: LESSThan and MOREThan Arguments  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit  
Not on TDS 400A  
Sets or queries the maximum time the selected pattern may be true and still  
generate a main logic pattern trigger.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn: LOGIc: PATtern: WHEn: LESSLimit?  
2–294  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger  
:
:
LOGIc  
WHEn  
:
PATtern  
MAIn  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
:
LESSLimit  
:
Arguments  
<NR3> time to hold pattern true.  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit  
Not on TDS 400A  
Sets or queries the minimum time the selected pattern may be true and still  
generate a main logic pattern trigger.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn: LOGIc: PATtern: WHEn: MORELimit?  
TRIGger  
:
:
LOGIc  
WHEn  
:
PATtern  
MAIn  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
:
MORELimit  
:
Arguments  
<NR3> time to hold pattern true.  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE  
TDS 500C, 600B & 700C only  
Sets or queries the clock edge polarity for setup and hold violation triggering.  
This is equivalent to selecting Define Clock from the main Trigger menu and  
Polarity in the resulting side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE { FALL | RISe }  
2–295  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE?  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
LOGIc  
:
FALL  
RISe  
<Space>  
:
SETHold  
CLOCk  
:
EDGE  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
FALL specifies falling edge.  
RISe specifies rising edge.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE  
specifies the polarity as the rising edge.  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:LEVel  
TDS 500C, 600B & 700C only  
Sets or queries the main logic setup/hold clock voltage trigger level. This is  
equivalent to selecting Levels from the main Trigger menu and Clock Level in  
the resulting side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:LEVel { ECL | TTL | <NR3> }  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:LEVel?  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
:
LOGIc  
ECL  
TTL  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
SETHold  
:
:
CLOCk  
LEVel  
?
Arguments  
ECL specifies a preset ECL level of –1.3 V.  
TTL specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.  
<NR3> is the main trigger level, in volts.  
2–296  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:LEVEL 1.4  
sets the main logic trigger setup/hold clock level to 1.4 volts.  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce  
TDS 500C, 600B & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the source for the clock for the main logic trigger setup/hold  
input. The channel is specified by <x> and is 1, 2, 3, or 4. This is equivalent to  
selecting Define Clock from the main Trigger menu and CH1, CH2, CH3, or  
CH4 in the resulting side menu.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce: CH<x>  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce?  
TRIGger  
:
:
SETHold  
MAIn  
:
LOGIc  
<Space>  
CH  
<X>  
?
CLOCk  
:
SOUrce  
Arguments  
Examples  
CH<x> specifies one of the input channels (CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4).  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH2  
selects Channel 2 as the clock source for the main logic trigger setup/hold.  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:LEVel  
TDS 500C, 600B & 700C only  
Sets or queries the main logic set/hold data level. This is equivalent to selecting  
Levels from the main Trigger menu and Data Level in the resulting side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:LEVel { ECL | TTL | <NR3> }  
2–297  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:LEVel?  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
:
LOGIc  
ECL  
TTL  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
SETHold  
:
:
DATa  
LEVel  
Arguments  
Examples  
ECL specifies a preset ECL level of –1.3 V.  
TTL specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.  
<NR3> is the main trigger level, in volts.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:LEVEL 1.4  
sets the main logic setup/hold data level to 1.4 volts.  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce  
TDS 500C, 600B & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the data channel for the main logic trigger set/hold input. The  
channel is specified by <x> and is 1, 2, 3, or 4. This is equivalent to selecting  
Data Source from the main Trigger menu and CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4 in the  
resulting side menu.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce CH<x>  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce?  
TRIGger  
:
:
SETHold  
MAIn  
:
LOGIc  
<Space>  
CH  
<X>  
?
:
DATa  
:
SOUrce  
Arguments  
CH<x> specifies one of the input channels (CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4)  
2–298  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE CH2  
selects Channel 2 as the source for the main logic trigger set/hold.  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime  
TDS 500C, 600B & 700C only  
Sets or queries the main logic trigger hold time. This is equivalent to selecting  
Setup/Hold Times from the main Trigger menu and Hold Time in the resulting  
side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime?  
TRIGger  
:
:
MAIn  
:
LOGIc  
:
SETHold  
HOLDTime  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> specifies the hold time setting in seconds. Positive values for hold time  
occur after the clock edge. Negative values occur before the clock edge.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 200 E-12  
sets the main logic trigger sethold holdtime to 200 nanoseconds.  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime  
TDS 500C, 600B & 700C only  
Sets or queries the main logic trigger set time. This is equivalent to selecting  
Setup/Hold Times from the main Trigger menu and Setup Time in the resulting  
side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime?  
2–299  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger  
:
:
MAIn  
:
LOGIc  
:
SETHold  
SETTime  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> specifies the setup time setting in seconds. Positive values occur before  
the clock edge. Negative values occur after the clock edge.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:SETTIME 600 E-12  
sets the main logic trigger sethold time to 600 nanoseconds.  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4  
Not on TDS 400A  
Sets or queries the main logic trigger input for channel 4. This input is used  
when TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss is set to STATE. This is equivalent to  
setting the channel 4 input in the Logic Pattern Inputs side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4 { FALL | RISe }  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4?  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
LOGIc  
:
FALL  
RISe  
<Space>  
:
STATE  
INPut  
:
CH4  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
FALL specifies falling edge.  
RISe specifies rising edge.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE  
specifies that the main logic trigger input for channel 4 is the rising edge when  
the logic class is set to STATE.  
2–300  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn  
Not on TDS 400A  
Sets or queries the main logic state trigger.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn { TRUe| FALSe}  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn?  
TRIGger  
:
:
LOGIc  
:
MAIn  
STATE  
TRUe  
<Space>  
FALSe  
:
WHEn  
?
Arguments  
TRUe specifies the trigger to occur when the condition is met on the fourth  
channel and the pattern of the first three channels are at the desired states.  
FALSe  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold? (Query Only)  
Not on TDS 400A  
Returns the main logic trigger threshold voltage for all channels.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold?  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
LOGIc  
:
THReshold  
?
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:THRESHOLD?  
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 0;CH2 0;  
CH3 0;CH4 0  
2–301  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>  
Not on TDS 400A  
Sets or queries the main logic trigger threshold voltage for the channel specified  
by <x>. This is equivalent to setting the thresholds in the Logic State Threshold  
and Logic Pattern Threshold side menus.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>?  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
LOGIc  
:
THReshold  
:
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
CH  
<x>  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> specifies the threshold voltage.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 .5  
sets the main logic trigger threshold for channel 1 to .5 volts.  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:WHEn  
Not on TDS 400A  
Specifies whether the main logic trigger occurs when the specified state goes true  
or false when TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:CLAss is set to PATtern. This is equivalent  
to selecting Trigger When in the Trigger menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:WHEn { FALSe | TRUe }  
TRIGger:MAIn:LOGIc:WHEn?  
2–302  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
FALSe  
TRUe  
<Space>  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
LOGIc  
:
WHEn  
?
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:WHEN TRUE  
specifies that the main logic trigger when the logic pattern is true.  
TRIGger:MAIn:MODe  
Sets or queries the main trigger mode. This command is equivalent to selecting  
Mode & Holdoff in the Trigger menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:MODe { AUTO |NORMal }  
TRIGger:MAIn:MODe?  
AUTO  
<Space>  
NORMal  
TRIGger  
:
:
MODe  
MAIn  
?
Arguments  
AUTO generates a trigger if a trigger is not detected within a specific time period.  
NORMal waits for a valid trigger event.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE AUTO  
specifies that a trigger event is automatically generated.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse? (Query Only)  
Not on TDS 400A  
Returns the main pulse trigger parameters.  
Group  
Trigger  
2–303  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse?  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
PULse  
?
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE?  
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE CH1;  
GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0E-9;FILTER ACCEPT;POLARITY POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:  
MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 2.00E+0;LOW  
800.0E-3;:TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0E-9;HIGHLIMIT  
2.0E-9;WHEN WITHIN;POLARITY POSITIVE as the current main pulse trigger  
parameters.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:CLAss  
Not on TDS 400A  
Sets or queries the type of pulse to trigger on. This command is equivalent to  
selecting Class in the Trigger menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:CLAss { GLItch | RUNT | WIDth |  
SLEWRate (TDS 500C, 600B & 700C only) | TIMEOut (TDS 500C, 600B,  
700C only) }  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:CLAss?  
GLItch  
RUNT  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
PULse  
:
WIDth  
SLEWRate  
TIMEOut  
<Space>  
CLAss  
?
Arguments  
GLItch triggers when a pulse is found that is of the specified polarity and width.  
These are set with the commands TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:POLarity and  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth.  
RUNT triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold but does not  
cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the first. The thresholds are  
set with the TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW and TRIG-  
2–304  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH commands. The crossing can be  
either positive or negative as specified by TRIGger:MAIn:PULse: RUNT:PO-  
Larity.  
WIDth triggers when a pulse is found that has the specified polarity and is either  
inside or outside the limits as specified by TRIGger:MAIn:PULse: WIDth:LOW-  
Limit and TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit. The polarity is selected  
using the TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity command.  
SLEWRate triggers when the slew rate of the source violates the specified  
conditions (TDS 500C, 600B & 700C only).  
TIMEOut triggers when the pulse train stops in the selected state for longer than  
the specified time (TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C only).  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:CLASS WIDTH  
specifies a width pulse for the main trigger.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch? (Query Only)  
Not on TDS 400A  
Returns the current main glitch pulse trigger parameters.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch?  
TRIGger  
:
:
GLItch  
?
MAIn  
:
PULse  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH?  
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE CH1;  
GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0E-9;FILTER ACCEPT;POLARITY POSITIVE.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:FILTer  
Not on TDS 400A  
Controls glitch detection. This command is equivalent to selecting Filter in the  
Trigger menu.  
Group  
Trigger  
2–305  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:FILTer { ACCept | REJect }  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:FILTer?  
ACCept  
REJect  
TRIGger:  
MAIn  
:
:
PULse  
:
<Space>  
GLItch  
FILTer  
?
Arguments  
ACCept specifies that the digitizing oscilloscope will trigger only on pulses that  
are narrower than the specified width when the main trigger type is set to pulse  
glitch. The width is specified using TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth  
command.  
REJect specifies that the digitizing oscilloscope will trigger only on pulses that  
are wider than the specified width when the main trigger type is set to pulse  
glitch. The width is specified using TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth  
command.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:FILTER?  
returns either ACCept or REJect, indicating whether glitches are filtered.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:POLarity  
Not on TDS 400A  
Sets or queries the polarity for the main pulse glitch trigger. This command is  
equivalent to selecting Polarity & Width in the Trigger menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:POLarity { EITher | NEGAtive |  
POSITIVe }  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:POLarity?  
2–306  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
:
PULse  
EITher  
NEGAtive  
POSITIVe  
<Space>  
GLItch  
:
POLarity  
?
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:POLARITY EITHER  
specifies that the polarity of the glitch can be either positive or negative.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth  
Not on TDS 400A  
Sets or queries the width for the main pulse glitch trigger. This command is  
equivalent to selecting Polarity & Width in the Trigger menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:GLItch:WIDth?  
TRIGger  
:
GLItch  
:
WIDth  
MAIn  
:
PULse  
:
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the width of the glitch, in seconds.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:WIDTH 15E-6  
sets the width of the glitch to 15 ms.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT? (Query Only)  
Not on TDS 400A  
Returns the current parameters for the main pulse runt trigger.  
2–307  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT?  
TRIGger  
:
RUNT  
?
MAIn  
:
PULse  
:
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT?  
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHĆ  
OLD:HIGH 2.00E+0;LOW 800.0E-3.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:POLarity  
Not on TDS 400A  
Sets or queries the polarity for the main pulse runt trigger. This command is  
equivalent to selecting Polarity in the Trigger menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:POLarity { EITher | NEGAtive | POSITIVe }  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:POLarity?  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
PULse  
:
EITher  
NEGAtive  
POSITIVe  
<Space>  
RUNT  
:
POLarity  
?
Arguments  
NEGAtive indicates that the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the rising  
edge recrosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing the low  
threshold.  
POSITIVe indicates that the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the falling  
edge recrosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing the high  
threshold.  
EITher indicates either NEGAtive or POSITIVe polarity.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY NEGATIVE  
specifies that the polarity of the main pulse runt trigger is negative.  
2–308  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold? (Query Only)  
Not on TDS 400A  
Returns the upper and lower thresholds for the main pulse runt trigger.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?  
TRIGger  
:
RUNT  
:
MAIn  
:
PULse  
:
THReshold  
?
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD?  
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH 2.00E+0;LOW  
800.0E-3.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh  
TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the trigger level switching thresholds for the main pulse runt  
trigger. This command is equivalent to setting Set to TTL or Set to ECL in the  
Main Pulse Runt Trigger menu’s Thresholds side menu item.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh { TTL | ECL }  
TRIGger  
:
:
RUNT  
:
MAIn  
:
PULse  
THReshold  
TTL  
ECL  
:
BOTh  
<Space>  
Arguments  
Examples  
TTL sets the upper threshold to 1.8 V and the lower threshold to 0.8 V.  
ECL sets the upper threshold to –1.1 V and the lower threshold to –1.5 V.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:BOTH TTL  
sets the threshold of the pulse runt trigger to the nominal TTL voltage levels.  
2–309  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the upper limit for the main pulse runt trigger. This command is  
equivalent to setting the threshold in the Pulse Runt Threshold side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH?  
TRIGger  
:
RUNT  
:
MAIn  
:
PULse  
:
THReshold  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
HIGH  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the threshold, in volts.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH 120E-3  
sets the upper limit of the pulse runt trigger to 120 mV.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the lower limit for the main pulse runt trigger. This command is  
equivalent to setting the threshold in the Pulse Runt Threshold side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW?  
2–310  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger  
:
RUNT  
:
MAIn  
:
PULse  
:
THReshold  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
LOW  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the threshold, in volts.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW 50E-3  
sets the lower limit of the pulse runt trigger to 50 mV.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WHEn  
TDS 500C, 600B & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it uncovers a  
runt. This is equivalent to selecting Trigger When from the main Trigger’s  
Pulse, Runt menu and Occurs or Wider Than in the resulting side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WHEN { OCCurs | WIDERthan }  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WHEN?  
OCCurs  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
:
PULse  
:
<Space>  
WIDERthan  
?
RUNT  
WHEN  
Arguments  
Examples  
OCCurs specifies a trigger if a runt of any detectable width occurs.  
WIDERthan specifies a trigger if a runt of greater than the specified width occurs.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN WIDERTHAN  
sets the runt trigger to occur when the oscilloscope detects a runt in a pulse wider  
than the specified width.  
2–311  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WIDth  
TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the minimum width for a valid main pulse runt trigger. This  
command is equivalent to entering a value in the Trigger menu’s Wider Than  
side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WIDth <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:RUNT:WIDth?  
TRIGger  
:
RUNT  
:
MAIn  
:
PULse  
:
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
WIDth  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the minimum width in seconds.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH 15E-6  
sets the minimum width of the pulse runt trigger to 15 ms.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:DELTATime  
TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the delta time used in calculating the slew rate trigger. This is  
equivalent to selecting Trigger When from the main Trigger’s Slew Rate menu  
and Delta Time in the resulting side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:DELTATime <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:DELTATime?  
2–312  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger  
:
SLEWRate  
:
MAIn  
:
PULse  
:
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
DELTATime  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the delta time in seconds.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:DELTATIME 15E-6  
sets the slew rate trigger’s delta time to 15 ms.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:POLarity  
TDS 500C, 600B & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the polarity for the main pulse slew rate trigger. This command is  
equivalent to selecting Polarity in the Trigger menu with Type set to SlewRate.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:POLarity { EITher | NEGAtive |  
POSITIVe }  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:POLarity?  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
:
PULse  
EITher  
NEGAtive  
POSITIVe  
<Space>  
SLEWRate  
:
POLarity  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
NEGAtive indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper (most  
positive) to lower (most negative) level for slew rate triggering to occur.  
POSITIVe indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower (most  
negative) to higher (most positive) level for slew rate triggering to occur.  
EITher indicates either NEGAtive or POSITIVe polarity.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:POLARITY EITHER  
specifies that the polarity of the slew rate can be either positive or negative.  
2–313  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:SLEWRate? (Query Only)  
TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Returns the slew rate value. This is the  
((Upper Threshold – Lower Threshold) / Delta Time)  
The value is limited to the three most significant digits.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:SLEwrate?  
TRIGger  
:
:
MAIn  
:
PULse  
:
SLEWRate  
SLEWRate  
?
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:SLEWRATE?  
returns the slew rate. It is given as an appropriate amount of volts per second.  
For example, 1.2E+6 would represent a slew rate of 1.2 megavolts/second.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:BOTh  
TDS 500, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets the upper and lower slew rate trigger thresholds. This is equivalent to  
selecting Thresholds from the main Trigger’s Slew Rate menu and entering a  
value in the resulting side menu’s High Threshold or Low Threshold items.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:BOTh { TTL | ECL }  
TRIGger  
:
:
MAIn  
:
PULse  
:
SLEWRate  
THReshold  
TTL  
ECL  
BOTh  
Arguments  
TTL sets the upper threshold to 1.8 V and the lower threshold to 0.8 V.  
ECL sets the upper threshold to –1.1 V and the lower threshold to –1.5 V.  
2–314  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:THRESHOLD:BOTH TTL  
sets the trigger threshold to TTL.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:HIGH  
TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the upper (most positive) limit of the two threshold levels that a  
pulse edge must traverse for the slew rate trigger to occur. This command is  
equivalent to setting the higher threshold in the Pulse Slew Rate Trigger’s  
Thresholds side menu item.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:HIGH?  
TRIGger  
:
:
MAIn  
:
PULse  
:
SLEWRate  
THReshold  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
HIGH  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the threshold, in volts.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:THRESHOLD:HIGH 120E-3  
sets the upper limit of the pulse slew rate trigger to 120 mV.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:LOW  
TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the lower (most negative) limit of the two threshold levels that a  
pulse edge must traverse for the slew rate trigger to occur. This command is  
equivalent to setting the lower threshold in the Pulse Slew Rate Trigger’s  
Thresholds side menu item.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:LOW <NR3>  
2–315  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:THReshold:LOW?  
TRIGger  
:
:
MAIn  
:
PULse  
:
SLEWRate  
THReshold  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
LOW  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the threshold, in volts.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:THRESHOLD:LOW 50E-3  
sets the lower limit of the pulse slew rate trigger to 50 mV.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:WHEn  
TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets or queries whether to check for a slewing signal that is faster or slower than  
the specified delta time. This is equivalent to selecting Trigger When from the  
main Trigger’s Slew Rate menu and entering a value in the resulting side menu’s  
Trig if Less Than or Trig if Greater Than items.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:WHEn { FASTERthan | SLOWERthan }  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SLEWRate:WHEn?  
FASTERthan  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
:
PULse  
:
<Space>  
SLOWERthan  
?
SLEWRate  
WHEN  
Arguments  
FASTERthan sets the trigger to occur when the slew is faster than the set  
volts/second rate.  
SLOWERthan sets the trigger to occur when the slew is slower than the set  
volts/second rate.  
2–316  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:WHEN FASTERTHAN  
sets the slew rate trigger to work when the slew is faster than the set volts/second  
rate.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the source for the main pulse trigger. This is equivalent to  
selecting the source in the Pulse Runt Source side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce CH<x>  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:SOUrce?  
TRIGger  
:
:
SOUrce  
MAIn  
:
PULse  
<Space>  
CH  
<X>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
CH<x> specifies one of the input channels.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SOURCE CH2  
selects Channel 2 as the source for the main pulse trigger.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity  
TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the polarity for the main pulse timeout trigger. This command is  
equivalent to selecting Polarity in the Trigger menu with Type set to Time out.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity { STAYSHigh (or POSITIVe) |  
STAYSLow (or NEGAtive) | EITher }  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity?  
2–317  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:  
MAIn  
:
:
PULse  
EITher  
STAYSLow  
STAYSHigh  
<Space>  
TIMEOut  
:
POLarity  
?
Arguments  
STAYSLow (or NEGAtive) indicates that a pulse edge must stay low the required  
time period for timeout triggering to occur.  
STAYSHigh (or POSITIVe) indicates that a pulse edge must stay high the required  
time period for timeout triggering to occur.  
EITher indicates either STAYSHigh or STAYSLow polarity.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY EITHER  
specifies that the polarity of the timeout trigger can be either positive or  
negative.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe  
TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the pulse timeout trigger time, in seconds. This command is  
equivalent to selecting Time in the Trigger menu and entering a value with the  
keypad or general purpose knob.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe?  
TRIGger  
:
TIMEOut  
:
TIMe  
MAIn  
:
PULse  
:
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
Arguments  
<NR3> is the timeout time period, in seconds.  
2–318  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:TIMEOUT:TIME 3.134E-6  
sets the timeout time to 3.134 ms.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth? (Query Only)  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Returns the width parameters for the main pulse width trigger.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth?  
TRIGger  
:
:
WIDth  
?
MAIn  
:
PULse  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH?  
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0E-9;HIGHLIMIT  
2.0E-9;WHEN WITHIN;POLARITY POSITIVE as the current main pulse trigger  
parameters.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the upper limit for the main pulse width trigger. This is equiva-  
lent to setting Upper Limit in the Pulse Width Trig When side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit?  
TRIGger  
:
:
WIDth  
:
MAIn  
:
PULse  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
HIGHLimit  
Arguments  
<NR3> is the upper limit, in seconds.  
2–319  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the lower limit for the main pulse width trigger. This is equiva-  
lent to setting Lower Limit in the Pulse Width Trig When side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit?  
TRIGger:  
:
WIDth  
:
MAIn  
:
PULse  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
LOWLimit  
Arguments  
<NR3> is the lower limit, in seconds.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the polarity for the main pulse width trigger. This is equivalent to  
selecting the polarity in the Pulse Width Polarity side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity { NEGAtive | POSITIVe }  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:POLarity?  
TRIGger:  
:
WIDth  
:
MAIn  
:
PULse  
POLarity  
NEGAtive  
POSITIVe  
<Space>  
?
Arguments  
NEGAtive specifies a negative pulse.  
2–320  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
POSITIVe specifies a positive pulse.  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEn  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Selects the condition when the trigger occurs. This is equivalent to selecting the  
condition in the Pulse Width Trig When side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEn { OUTside | WIThin }  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:WHEn?  
TRIGger:  
WIDth  
:
MAIn  
:
:
PULse  
OUTside  
WIThin  
<Space>  
WHEn  
?
Arguments  
OUTside specifies a trigger when the duration of the pulse is greater than the  
high limit or less than the low limit specified. The high and low limits are  
specified with the TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit and  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit commands respectively.  
WIThin specifies a trigger when the duration of the pulse is within the high and  
low limits. The high and low limits are specified with the  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit and  
TRIGger:MAIn:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit commands respectively.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:WHEN?  
returns either OUTSIDE or WITHIN, indicating the conditions for generating a  
pulse trigger.  
TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe  
Sets or queries the type of main trigger. This is equivalent to setting Type in the  
Trigger menu.  
Group  
Trigger  
2–321  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe  
{ EDGE | LOGIc | PULse | COMMunication (TDS 500C & 700C) | VIDeo  
}
(Only the TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C use the LOGIc and PULse argu-  
ments. Only the TDS 500C and 700C use the COMMunication argument. Only  
digitizing oscilloscopes with option 05 use the VIDeo argument.)  
Syntax  
TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe { EDGE | LOGIc | PULse | COMMunication  
(TDS 500C & 700C) | VIDeo }  
(Only the TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C use the LOGIc and PULse argu-  
ments. Only digitizing oscilloscopes with option 05 use the VIDeo argument.)  
TRIGger:MAIn:TYPe?  
EDGE  
LOGIC  
PULse  
COMMunication  
VIDeo  
<Space>  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
TYPe  
?
Arguments  
EDGE is a normal trigger. A trigger event occurs when a signal passes through a  
specified voltage level in a specified direction and is controlled by the TRIG-  
ger:MAIn:EDGE commands.  
LOGIc (TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C only) specifies that a trigger occurs  
when specified conditions are met and is controlled by the TRIGger:MAIn:LOG-  
Ic commands.  
PULse (TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C only) specifies that a trigger occurs  
when a specified pulse is found and is controlled by the TRIGger:MAIn:PULse  
commands.  
COMMunication (TDS 500C & 700C only) specifies that a trigger occurs when a  
specified signal is found and is controlled by the TRIGger:MAIn:COMMunica-  
tion commands.  
VIDeo (option 05 only) specifies that a trigger occurs when a specified signal is  
found and is controlled by the TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo commands.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:TYPE?  
might return PULSE indicating that the main trigger type is a pulse trigger.  
2–322  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo? (Query Only)  
Option 05 Only  
Returns the main video trigger parameters.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo?  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
?
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO?  
might return: NTS;CH1;NEGA;NUMER;2;1;COLO;COLO;787;  
59.94E+0;1050;2;890.0E-9;3.56E-6;15.00E-6;11.56E-6;  
15.89E-6 as the current main video trigger parameters.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:BY  
TDS 400A Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the video trigger delay mode. This is equivalent to using the  
Video TV Delay Mode side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:BY { TIMe | LINES | LINE }  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:BY?  
TRIGger  
:
BY  
MAIn  
:
:
VIDeo  
TIMe  
LINES  
LINE  
<Space>  
?
Arguments  
TIMe specifies a delay by time.  
LINES specifies a delay by a number of video lines. For the TDS 400A, this  
argument is available only for backward compatibility. If the TDS 400A receives  
2–323  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
this argument, it will convert it to LINE. The TDS 400A will not output this  
argument in response to a query.  
LINE specifies a delay by a number of video lines.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:BY TIME  
specifies a delay by time.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELD  
TDS 400A Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the field the video trigger acts on. This is equivalent to using the  
Video Scan side menu when Class is NOT set to Custom.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELD {ĂODD | EVEN | ALL | FIELD1 | FIELD2 |  
FIELDEitherĂ}  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELD?  
ODD  
EVEN  
ALL  
TRIGger  
:
FIELD  
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
:
FIELD1  
<Space>  
FIELD2  
FIELDEither  
?
Arguments  
ODD specifies interlaced video field 1.  
EVEN specifies interlaced video field 2.  
ALL specifies alternating both video field 1 and video field 2.  
FIELD1 specifies interlaced video field 1. For the TDS 400A, this argument is  
available only for backward compatibility. If the TDS 400A receives this  
argument, it will convert it to ODD. The TDS 400A will not output this  
argument in response to a query.  
FIELD2 specifies interlaced video field 2. For the TDS 400A, this argument is  
available only for backward compatibility. If the TDS 400A receives this  
2–324  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
argument, it will convert it to EVEN. The TDS 400A will not output this  
argument in response to a query.  
FIELDEither specifies alternating both video field 1 and video field 2. For the  
TDS 400A, this argument is available only for backward compatibility. If the  
TDS 400A receives this argument, it will convert it to ALL. The TDS 400A will  
not output this argument in response to a query.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FIELD ODD  
selects odd fields.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELD  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the field the video trigger acts on. This is equivalent to pressing  
Field in the video main menu, then Field in the side menu, and entering a value  
with the keypad or general purpose knob.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELD <NR1>  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELD?  
<NR1>  
<Space>  
TRIGger  
:
FIELD  
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
:
?
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> specifies the video (color) field. For example, 1 specifies interlaced video  
field one and 2 specifies interlaced video field two.  
PAL signals have 1 to 8 fields, HDTV signals have 1 or 2, and FlexFormat  
supports 1 or 2.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FIELD 1  
selects field 1.  
2–325  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELDType  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the field the video trigger acts on. This is equivalent to pressing  
Field in the video main menu and then Field, Odd, Even or All in the side  
menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELDType {ĂNUMERic | ALL | EVEN | ODDĂ}  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FIELDType?  
NUMERic  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
:
ALL  
EVEN  
ODD  
<Space>  
FIELDType  
?
Arguments  
NUMERic specifies a selected line in the selected field. If you send this  
command when the mode is MONO or SECAM, the digitizing oscilloscope will  
generate an SRQ.  
ALL specifies a selected line in all fields.  
EVEN specifies a selected line in even fields.  
ODD specifies a selected line in odd fields.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FIELDTYPE ALL  
selects a selected line in all fields.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat? (Query Only)  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05 Only  
Returns the main flexible-format video trigger parameters.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat?  
2–326  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger  
:
FLEXformat  
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
:
?
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT?  
might return: 59.94E+0;1050;2;890.0E-9;3.56E-6;15.00E-6;11.56E-6;  
15.89E-6 as the flexible-format video trigger parameters.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDRATE  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the flexible-format video frames per second (e.g. 59.94 frames  
per second for 1050 and 50 for 1250). This is equivalent to selecting Setup from  
the video main menu (with FlexFmt as the Standard), Field Rate from the side  
menu, and entering a value with the keypad or the general purpose knob.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDRATE <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDRATE?  
TRIGger  
:
:
FLEXformat  
:
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
FIELDRATE  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> the field rate.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:FIELDRATE?  
returns the specified field rate.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDS  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the flexible-format video fields. This is equivalent to pressing  
Setup from the video main menu (with FlexFmt as the Standard), Fields from  
the side menu, and entering the value with the keypad or the general purpose  
knob.  
Group  
Trigger  
2–327  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDS <NR1>  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:FIELDS?  
FLEXformat  
TRIGger:  
:
:
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
FIELDS  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> the number of fields in the standard.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXformat:FIELD?  
returns the number of fields in the format.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:LINES  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the flexible-format video lines in a frame. This is equivalent to  
pressing Setup from the video main menu (with FlexFmt as the Standard),  
Lines from the side menu, and entering the value with the keypad or the general  
purpose knob.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:LINES <NR1>  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:LINES?  
TRIGger:  
:
FLEXformat  
:
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
LINES  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> the frame lines.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:LINES?  
returns the specified number of lines.  
2–328  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:NEGSyncwidth  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the flexible-format negative sync width. The HDTV horizontal  
sync is a tri-level sync. The first of the two consecutive sync pulses used is  
negative and the second is positive. The positive sync pulse starts on the rising  
edge of the negative sync. The two pulses have the same width such that  
specifying the negative pulse is only required. Setting the width is equivalent to  
pressing Setup from the video main menu (with FlexFmt as the Standard),  
Sync Width from the side menu, and entering the value with the keypad or the  
general purpose knob.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:NEGSyncwidth <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:NEGSyncwidth?  
TRIGger  
:
:
FLEXformat  
:
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
NEGSyncwidth  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> the negative sync width.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:NEGSYNCWIDTH?  
returns the specified flexible-format negative sync width.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STArttime  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the time from the positive edge of the tri-sync pulse for the last  
line in the selected field (t0) to the leading edge (negative) of the first negative  
vertical sync pulse. This is equivalent to selecting Setup from the video main  
menu (with FlexFmt as the Standard), pressing V1 Start Time in the side  
menu, and entering a value with the keypad or the general purpose knob.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STArttime <NR3>  
2–329  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STArttime?  
TRIGger  
:
:
FLEXformat  
:
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
V1STArttime  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> the v1 starttime.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:V1STARTTIME?  
returns the specified HDTV v1 starttime.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STOptime  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 5 Only  
Sets or queries the time from t0 to the trailing edge (positive) of the first negative  
vertical sync pulse. This is equivalent selecting Setup from the video main menu  
(with FlexFmt as the Standard), pressing V1 Stop Time in the side menu, and  
entering a value with the keypad or the general purpose knob.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STOptime <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V1STOptime?  
TRIGger  
:
:
FLEXformat  
:
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
V1STOptime  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> the v1 stoptime.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:V1STOPTIME?  
returns the specified v1stoptime.  
2–330  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STArttime  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the time from the positive edge of the tri-sync pulse for the last  
line in the selected field (t0) to the leading edge (positive) of the second vertical  
sync pulse. Note: the second pulse may be a negative pulse or the negative  
portion of a tri-sync pulse that is within the last line (usually located at the ½  
line point). This is equivalent to selecting Setup from the video main menu  
(with FlexFmt as the Standard), pressing V2 Start Time in the side menu, and  
entering a value with the keypad or the general purpose knob.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STArttime <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STArttime?  
TRIGger  
:
:
FLEXformat  
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
:
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
V2STArttime  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> the v2 starttime.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:V2STARTTIME?  
returns the specified v2 starttime.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STOptime  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the time from t0 to the trailing edge (positive) of the second  
negative vertical sync pulse. This is equivalent selecting Setup from the video  
main menu (with FlexFmt as the Standard), pressing V2 Stop Time in the side  
menu, and entering a value with the keypad or the general purpose knob.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STOptime <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:FLEXformat:V2STOptime?  
2–331  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger  
:
:
FLEXformat  
:
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
V2STOptime  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> the v2 stoptime.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:V2STOPTIME?  
returns the specified v2 stoptime.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HDTv  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the high definition TV frame rate. This is equivalent to toggling  
HDTV from the Video main-menu Standard pop-up, pressing Format, and then  
selecting a frame rate from the side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HDTv <NR1>  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HDTv?  
<NR1>  
?
<Space>  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
:
VIDeo  
HDTv  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> specifies the frame rate. More precisely, 787 selects a 787/59.94/2:1  
format. 1050 selects a 1050/59.94/2:1 format. 1125 selects a 1125/60/2:1 format.  
1250 selects a 1250/50/2:1 format.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HDTV 787  
specifies 787/59.94/2:1 format.  
2–332  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff? (Query Only)  
TDS 400A Option 05 Only  
Returns the video trigger holdoff value.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff?  
TRIGger  
:
:
VIDeo  
:
MAIn  
HOLdoff  
?
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HOLDOFF?  
might return :TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HOLDOFF:VALUE 0.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff:VALue  
TDS 400A Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the video trigger holdoff value. This is equivalent to setting  
Holdoff in the Mode & Holdoff side menu of the video trigger menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff:VALue <NR1>  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:HOLdoff:VALue?  
TRIGger  
:
:
HOLdoff  
:
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
VALue  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> is from 0 to 100, and is a percent of the holdoff range.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:VALUE 10  
set the holdoff value to be 10% of the holdoff range.  
2–333  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:INTERLAce  
TDS 400A Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the video trigger interlace format. This is equivalent to setting  
Interlace in the Scan Rate and Interlace main menu of the video trigger menu  
when Class is set to Custom.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:INTERLAce { FIELD1 | FIELD2 | FIELDEither |  
OFF }  
TRIGger:MAIN:VIDeo:INTERLAce?  
TRIGger  
:
:
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
FIELD1  
FIELD2  
FIELDEither  
OFF  
<Space>  
INTERLAce  
?
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE  
Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the video trigger in terms of a number of lines. This is equivalent  
to pressing the Line (TV Delay Mode in the TDS 400A) item in the video main  
menu, pressing Line in the side menu (if needed), and entering a value with the  
keypad or the general purpose knob. The minimum line number is the starting  
line in the field. For PAL, field 1 (odd fields in the TDS 400A) has line 2 (1 in  
the TDS 400A) as the minimum, and field 2 (even fields in the TDS 400A) has  
line 315 (314 in the TDS 400A).  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE <NR1>  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINE?  
2–334  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
TRIGger  
:
:
LINE  
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> specifies a number of lines to delay by.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:LINE 5  
selects 5 lines for the desired delay period.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINES  
TDS 400A Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the video trigger delay in terms of a number of lines. This is  
equivalent to entering data in the Line item in the Video TV Delay Mode side  
menu. This command is available for backwards compatibility.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINES <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:LINES?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
TRIGger  
:
:
LINES  
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> specifies a number of lines to delay by.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:LINES 5  
selects 5 lines for the desired delay period.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:NTSc  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the NTSC mode selection. This is equivalent to choosing  
525/NTSC in the video main-menu pop-up, Mode in the main menu, and a side  
menu item (NTSC or Mono).  
Group  
Trigger  
2–335  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:NTSc { MONo | COLOr }  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:NTSc?  
TRIGger  
:
NTSc  
MAIn  
:
:
VIDeo  
MONo  
<Space>  
COLOr  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
MONo specifies mode for noncolor signals.  
COLOr specifies mode for color field triggering and enables numeric triggering.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:NTSC MONO  
specifies numeric fields are invalid.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:PAL  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the PAL video trigger mode selection. This is equivalent to  
toggling 625/PAL in the video main-menu pop-up, Mode in the main menu, and  
a side menu item (PAL, Mono, or SECAM).  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:PAL { MONo | COLOr | SECAm }  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:PAL?  
TRIGger  
:
PAL  
MAIn  
:
:
VIDeo  
MONo  
COLOr  
<Space>  
SECAm  
?
Arguments  
MONo specifies mode for non-color signals.  
COLOr specifies mode for color field triggering and enables numeric triggering.  
2–336  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
SECAm specifies mode for SECAM signals.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:PAL MONO  
specifies non-color PAL signals.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCAN  
TDS 400A Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the video trigger scan parameters. This is equivalent to using the  
Video Scan Parameters side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCAN { RATE1 | RATE2 | RATE3 | RATE4 }  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCAN?  
RATE1  
TRIGger  
:
SCAN  
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
:
RATE2  
RATE3  
RATE4  
<Space>  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
RATE1 specifies a 15 to 20 kHz video line rate.  
RATE2 specifies a 20 to 25 kHz video line rate.  
RATE3 specifies a 25 to 35 kHz video line rate.  
RATE4 specifies a 35 to 64 kHz video line rate.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SCAN RATE1  
selects rate 1.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCANPeriod  
TDS 400A Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the video trigger scan period.  
2–337  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCANPeriod <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SCANPeriod?  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce  
Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the source for the main video trigger. This is equivalent to  
selecting the Source in the video main menu and a desired channel from the side  
menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce CH<x>  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SOUrce?  
TRIGger  
:
SOUrce  
MAIn  
:
:
VIDeo  
<Space>  
<x>  
CH  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
CH<x> specifies one of the input channels (CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4; or CH1,  
CH2, AUX1, or AUX2 on the TDS 520C, 620B, 680B, & 724C).  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE CH1  
selects channel 1 as the source for the main video trigger.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANdard  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the video trigger standard. This is equivalent to selecting the  
standard in the video Standard pop-up (525/NTSC, 625/PAL, HDTV, or  
FlexFmt).  
Group  
Trigger  
2–338  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANdard { NTSc | PAL | HDTv | FLEXformat}  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:STANdard?  
NTSc  
TRIGger  
:
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
:
PAL  
<Space>  
HDTv  
FLEXformat  
STANdard  
?
Arguments  
NTSc specifies the NTSC 525/59.94/2:1 standard.  
PAL specifies the PAL 625/59.94/2:1 standard.  
HDTv allows selection of the following HDTV formats: 787/59.94/1:1,  
1050/59.94/2:1, 1050/59.94/2:1, 1125/60/2:1, 1250/50/2:1.  
FLEXformat allows the user to specify the video parameters. The default table is  
1050/59.94/2:1.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:STANDARD NTSC  
selects the NTSC video format.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNc  
Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the video trigger sync polarity. This is equivalent to selecting  
Sync Polarity from the video main menu and a side-menu item (Neg Sync or  
Pos Sync).  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNc { POSITIVe | NEGAtive }  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYNc?  
2–339  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
TRIGger:  
SYNc  
MAIn  
:
:
VIDeo  
POSITIVe  
NEGAtive  
<Space>  
?
Arguments  
POSITIVe specifies a positive going voltage.  
NEGAtive specifies a negative going voltage.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SYNC POSITIVE  
selects a positive going voltage for the desired synchronization pulse.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYStem  
TDS 400A Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the video trigger class. This is equivalent to selecting the class in  
the Video Class side menu of the Video menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYStem { NTSc | PAL | SECAM | CUSTom }  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:SYStem?  
NTSc  
TRIGger:  
SYStem  
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
:
PAL  
<Space>  
SECAM  
CUSTom  
?
Arguments  
NTSc selects a condition that adheres to the National Television System  
Committee standards. Specifically, it assumes a line rate of 525 lines per frame  
and a frame rate of 30 Hz.  
PAL selects a condition that adheres to the Phase Alternate Line standard.  
Specifically, it assumes a line rate of 625 lines per frame and a frame rate of  
25 Hz.  
SECAM selects a condition that adheres to the SECAM standard.  
2–340  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
CUSTom selects a condition that adheres to the frequency range of the video  
signal as you have defined them from the available ranges.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:MAIN:SYSTEM NTSC  
selects triggering to occur on an NTSC compatible signal.  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:TIMe  
TDS 400A Option 05 Only  
Sets or queries the video trigger delay time. This is equivalent to entering the  
time in the Delay by Time item of the Video TV Delay Mode side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:TIMe <NR3>  
TRIGger:MAIn:VIDeo:TIMe?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
TRIGger  
:
:
TIMe  
MAIn  
:
VIDeo  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> specifies a delay time.  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:TIME 5E–6  
selects 5 ms for the desired delay time.  
TRIGger:STATE? (Query Only)  
Returns the current state of the triggering system.  
Group  
Syntax  
Trigger  
TRIGger:STATE?  
TRIGger  
:
STATE  
?
2–341  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Returns  
ARMed indicates that the instrument is acquiring pretrigger information. All  
triggers are ignored when TRIGger:STATE is ARMING.  
AUTO indicates that the digitizing oscilloscope is in auto mode and acquires data  
even in the absence of a trigger.  
FASTframe (TDS 500C and 700C only) indicates that the instrument is in  
FastFrame mode. This means normal trigger status monitoring is turned off. The  
digitizing oscilloscope will not return armed, partial, ready, trigger, or auto while  
in this state.  
INStavu (TDS 500C and 700C only) indicates that the instrument is in InstaVu  
mode.  
PARTial indicates that the main trigger has occurred and the digitizing oscillo-  
scope is waiting for trigger(s) for the delay by events.  
REAdy indicates that all pretrigger information has been acquired and the  
digitizing oscilloscope is ready to accept a trigger.  
SAVe indicates that the digitizing oscilloscope is in save mode and is not  
acquiring data.  
TRIGger indicates that the digitizing oscilloscope has seen a trigger and is  
acquiring the posttrigger information.  
Examples  
TRIGGER:STATE?  
might return ARMED, indicating that pretrigger data is being acquired.  
*TRG (No Query Form)  
(Trigger) executes commands that are defined by *DDT.  
The Group Execute Trigger (GET) interface message has the same effect as the  
*TRG command.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Miscellaneous  
Alias commands, *DDT  
*TRG  
*TRG  
2–342  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
*TRG  
immediately executes all commands that have been defined by *DDT.  
*TST? (Query Only)  
(Self-Test) Tests the GPIB interface and returns a 0.  
Group  
Syntax  
Miscellaneous  
*TST?  
*TST  
?
Returns  
<NR1> and is always 0.  
UNLock (No Query Form)  
Unlocks the front panel. This command is equivalent to LOCk NONe.  
NOTE. If the digitizing oscilloscope is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS),  
the UNLOCk command has no effect. For more information see the ANSI-IEEE  
Std. 488.1-1987 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation,  
section 2.8.3 on RL State Descriptions.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Miscellaneous  
LOCk  
UNLock ALL  
<Space>  
UNLock  
ALL  
Arguments  
ALL specifies all front-panel buttons and knobs.  
2–343  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
VERBose  
Sets and queries the Verbose State that controls the length of keywords on query  
responses. Keywords can be both headers and arguments. This command does  
not affect IEEE Std 488.2-1987 Common Commands (those starting with an  
asterisk).  
Group  
Miscellaneous  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
HEADer, *LRN?, SET?  
VERBose { OFF | ON | <NR1> }  
VERBose?  
OFF  
<Space>  
ON  
<NR1>  
VERBose  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 sets the Verbose State true, which returns full-length keywords  
for applicable setting queries.  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 sets the Verbose State false, which returns minimum-length  
keywords for applicable setting queries.  
VERBOSE ON  
sets the Verbose State true.  
VERBOSE?  
might return the value 1, showing that the Verbose State is true.  
*WAI (No Query Form)  
(Wait) Prevents the digitizing oscilloscope from executing further commands or  
queries until all pending operations finish. This command allows you to  
synchronize the operation of the digitizing oscilloscope with your application  
program. Synchronization methods are described on page 3–7.  
Group  
Status and Error  
2–344  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
BUSY?, *OPC  
*WAI  
*WAI  
WAVFrm? (Query Only)  
Returns WFMPre? and CURVe? data for the waveform or waveforms as  
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. This command is equivalent to  
sending WFMPre?; CURVe?  
TDS 400A: when the TDS 400A is in external clock mode, the time-per-div field  
will contain 50 clks/div.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Waveform  
CURVe?, DATa:SOUrce, WFMPre?  
WAVFrm?  
WAVFrm  
?
WFMPre? (Query Only)  
Returns the waveform formatting data for the first ordered waveform as specified  
by the DATa:SOUrce command. The channel and math waveforms selected by  
the DATa:SOUrce command must be displayed.  
TDS 400A: when the TDS 400A is in external clock mode, the time-per-div field  
will contain 50 clks/div.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Waveform  
WAVFrm?  
WFMPre?  
2–345  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
WFMPre  
?
Returns  
The format of the response is:  
BYT_Nr <NR1>;BIT_Nr <NR1>;ENCdg { ASC | BIN };  
BN_Fmt { RI | RP };BYT_Or { LSB | MSB };  
<wfm>:WFID <Qstring>;NR_PT <NR1>;PT_FMT { ENV | Y };  
XUNit <QString>;XINcr <NR3>;PT_Off <NR1>;YUNit <QString>;YMUlt  
<NR3>; YOFf <NR3>;YZEro<NR3>[;<wfm>:  
WFID <Qstring>;NR_PT <NR1>;PT_FMT{ ENV | Y };  
XUNit<QString>;XINcr <NR3>;XZEro <NR3>;PT_Off <NR1>;  
YUNit <QString>;YMUlt <NR3>; YOFf <NR3>;YZEro <NR3>...]  
Example  
wfmpre?  
might return  
:WFMPRE:BYT_NR 1;BIT_NR 8;ENCDG BIN;BN_FMT RI;BYT_OR LSB;CH1:WFID  
"Ch1, DC coupling, 100.0mVolts/div, 500.0us/div, 500 points,  
Sample mode";NR_PT 1;PT_FMT Y;XUNIT "s";XINCR 10.00E-6;XZERO  
8.95E-6;PT_OFF -249;YUNIT "Volts";YMULT 4.000E-3;YOFF 0.0E+0;YZĆ  
ERO 0.0E+0  
WFMPre:BIT_Nr  
Returns the number of bits per binary waveform point for the first ordered  
waveform as specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The WFMPre:BIT_Nr  
command is ignored on input.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Waveform  
DATa:WIDth, WFMPre:BYT_Nr  
WFMPre:BIT_Nr <NR1>  
WFMPre:BIT_Nr?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
WFMPre  
:
BIT_Nr  
Arguments  
<NR1> is either 8 or 16, and is equivalent to WFMPre:BYT_Nr * 8.  
2–346  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
WFMPRE:BIT_NR?  
might return 8, indicating that there are 8 bits per waveform point.  
WFMPre:BN_Fmt  
Sets or queries the format of binary data for the first ordered waveform as  
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Waveform  
DATa:ENCdg, WFMPre:BYT_Or, WFMPre:ENCdg  
WFMPre:BN_Fmt { RI | RP }  
WFMPre:BN_Fmt?  
RI  
<Space>  
RP  
:
BN_Fmt  
WFMPre  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
RI specifies signed integer data-point representation.  
RP specifies positive integer data-point representation.  
WFMPRE:BN_FMT RP  
specifies that the binary waveform data are positive integer data-points.  
WFMPRE:BN_FMT?  
returns either RI or RP as the current waveform data format.  
WFMPre:BYT_Nr  
Sets or queries the binary field data width for the first ordered waveform as  
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. This command is equivalent to the  
DATa:WIDth command.  
Group  
Waveform  
Related Commands  
DATa:WIDth, WFMPre:BIT_Nr  
2–347  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Syntax  
WFMPre:BYT_Nr <NR1>  
WFMPre:BYT_Nr?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
WFMPre  
:
BYT_Nr  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> is the number of bytes per point and can be 1 or 2.  
WFMPRE:BYT_NR 2  
specifies that there are 2 bytes per waveform data point.  
WFMPre:BYT_Or  
Selects which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted first during a  
waveform data transfer when DATa:WIDth (or WFMPre:BYT_Nr) is set to 2.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Waveform  
DATa:ENCdg, WFMPre:BN_Fmt, WFMPre:ENCdg  
WFMPre:BYT_Or { LSB | MSB }  
WFMPre:BYT_Or?  
LSB  
<Space>  
MSB  
:
BYT_Or  
WFMPre  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
LSB selects the least significant byte to be transmitted first.  
MSB selects the most significant bye to be transmitted first.  
WFMPRE:BYT_OR MSB  
specifies that the most significant byte in the waveform data will be transferred  
first.  
WFMPRE:BYT_OR?  
returns either MSB or LSB depending on which data byte is transferred first.  
2–348  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
WFMPre:ENCdg  
Sets or queries the type of encoding for waveform data transferred with the  
CURVe command.  
Group  
Waveform  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
DATa:ENCdg, WFMPre:BYT_Or, WFMPre:BN_Fmt  
WFMPre:ENCdg { ASC | BIN }  
WFMPre:ENCdg?  
ASC  
BIN  
<Space>  
:
ENCdg  
WFMPre  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
ASC specifies ASCII curve data.  
BIN specifies binary curve data.  
WFMPRE:ENCDG ASC  
specifies that the waveform data is in ASCII format.  
WFMPRE:ENCDG?  
might return BIN, indicating that the waveform data is in binary format.  
WFMPre:PT_Fmt (No Query Form)  
Selects the point format of the waveform data for the first ordered waveform as  
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.  
Group  
Syntax  
Waveform  
WFMPre:PT_Fmt{ EN V | Y }  
2–349  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ENV  
Y
:
PT_Fmt  
<Space>  
WFMPre  
Arguments  
ENV specifies that the waveform is transmitted as maximum and minimum point  
pairs. Only y values are explicitly transmitted. Absolute coordinates are given  
by:  
Xn + XZEro ) XINcr (n–PT_Off)  
Yn + YZEro ) YMUlt (ynmax * YOFf)  
max  
Ynmin + YZEro ) YMUlt (ynmin * YOFf)  
Y specifies a normal waveform where one ASCII or binary data point is  
transmitted for each point in the waveform record. Only y values are explicitly  
transmitted. Absolute coordinates are given by:  
Xn + XZEro ) XINcr (n–PT_Off)  
Yn + YZEro ) YMUlt (yn * YOFf)  
Examples  
WFMPRE:PT_Fmt ENV  
sets the waveform data point format to enveloped.  
WFMPre:PT_Off (No Query Form)  
Specifies the trigger point within the waveform record for the reference  
waveform specified by the DATa:DESTination command.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Waveform  
HORizontal:TRIGger:POsition  
WFMPre:PT_Off <NR1>  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
WFMPre  
:
PT_Off  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR1> = 0 to the recordlength, and is the position of the trigger point relative to  
DATa:STARt.  
WFMPRE:PT_OFF 1  
specifies that the trigger point is the first point in the waveform record.  
2–350  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
WFMPre:XINcr (No Query Form)  
Specifies the horizontal sampling interval for the reference waveform specified  
by the DATa:DESTination command.  
Group  
Syntax  
Waveform  
WFMPre:XINcr <NR3>  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
WFMPre  
:
XINcr  
Arguments  
<NR3> is the sampling interval in seconds per point.  
WFMPre:YMUlt (No Query Form)  
Specifies the vertical scale factor for the reference waveform specified by the  
DATa:DESTination command.  
Group  
Syntax  
Waveform  
WFMPre:YMUlt <NR3>  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
WFMPre  
:
YMUlt  
Arguments  
<NR3> is the vertical scale factor in YUNits (usually volts) per division.  
WFMPre:YOFf (No Query Form)  
Specifies the offset of the vertical component for the reference waveform  
specified by the DATa:DESTination command.  
Group  
Syntax  
Waveform  
WFMPre:YOFf <NR3>  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
WFMPre  
:
YOFf  
2–351  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Arguments  
<NR3> is the vertical offset in digitizing levels.  
WFMPre:YZEro (No Query Form)  
Specifies the offset voltage for the reference waveform specified by the  
DATa:DESTination command.  
Group  
Syntax  
Waveform  
WFMPre:YZEro <NR3>  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
WFMPre  
:
YZEro  
Arguments  
<NR3> is of the offset in YUNits (usually volts).  
Table 2–34 lists additional WFMPre commands that are included for compatibil-  
ity purposes.  
NOTE. These commands do not support a query form and all information is  
ignored.  
Table 2–34: Additional WFMPre Commands  
Command  
Argument  
{CHKsmo|NONe}  
<NR1>  
Description  
WFMPre:CRVchk  
WFMPre:NR_PT  
WFMPre:WFId  
WFMPre:XUNit  
WFMPre:XMUlt  
WFMPre:XOFf  
WFMPre:YUNit  
WFMPre:ZMUlt  
WFMPre:ZOFf  
WFMPre:ZUNit  
WFMPre:ZZEro  
Binary curve error check  
Number of waveform points  
Waveform identifier  
Horizontal units  
<QString>  
<QString>  
<NR3>  
Horizontal (X-axis) scale factor  
Horizontal (X-axis) offset  
Vertical units  
<NR3>  
<QString>  
<NR3>  
Z-axis scale factor  
Z-axis offset  
<NR3>  
<QString>  
<NR3>  
Z-axis units  
Z-axis origin offset  
2–352  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
NOTE. When returning WFMPRE:<wfm> information from the oscilloscope,  
<wfm> specifies the waveform source (CH<x>, MATH<x>, or REF<x>). The  
source must also be set using the DAta:SOUrce command. When sending  
WFMPRE:<wfm> information to the scope, the <wfm> specification is ignored  
and the reference location specified by DATa:DESTination is used instead.  
WFMPre:<wfm>? (Query Only)  
Returns the waveform formatting data for first ordered waveform as specified by  
the DATa:SOUrce command. Channel and math waveforms must be displayed  
before they can be queried. Querying an invalid reference waveform generates an  
execution error.  
In extended-acquisition-length mode, it will return the acquisition record  
information as opposed to the waveform record information.  
Group  
Syntax  
Waveform  
WFMPre:<wfm>?  
WFMPre  
:
<wfm>  
?
Returns  
The format of the response is:  
<wfm>:WFID <Qstring>;NR_PT <NR1>;PT_FMT { ENV | Y };  
XUNit <QString>;XINcr <NR3>;PT_Off <NR1>;YUNit <QString>;YMUlt  
<NR3>;YOFf <NR3>;YZEro <NR3>  
[;<wfm>:WFID <Qstring>;NR_PT <NR1>;  
PT_FMT { ENV | Y };XUNit <QString>;XINcr <NR3>;XZEro <NR3>;  
PT_Off <NR1>;YUNit <QString>;YMUlt <NR3>;YOFf <NR3>;  
YZEro <NR3>...]  
Example  
WFMPRE:CH1?  
might return  
:WFMPRE:CH1:WFID "Ch1, DC coupling, 100.0mVolts/div, 500.0us/div,  
500 points, Sample mode";NR_PT 1;PT_FMT Y;XUNIT "s";XINCR  
10.00E-6;XZERO 8.15E-6;PT_OFF -249;YUNIT "Volts";YMULT  
4.000E-3;YOFF 0.0E+0;YZERO 0.0E+0C  
2–353  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt  
Sets or queries the number of points that are in the transmitted waveform record.  
This value is ignored on input.  
In extended-acquisition-length mode, it will set or query the number of points  
that are in the transmitted the acquisition record.  
Related Commands  
Group  
DATa:DESTination  
Waveform  
Syntax  
WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt <NR1>  
WFMPre:<wfm>:NR_Pt?  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
WFMPre  
:
:
NR_Pt  
<wfm>  
Arguments  
<NR1> is the number of data points. If DATa:WIDth is 2 then there are twice as  
many bytes.  
<NR1> = 0 means that the waveform record is of an unspecified length.  
Examples  
WFMPRE:CH1:NR_Pt?  
might return 5000 as the number of data points in the waveform record trans-  
ferred from channel 1.  
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Fmt  
Selects the data point format for the first ordered waveform as selected by the  
DATa:SOUrce command. On input <wfm> always defaults to the reference  
location specified by DATa:DESTination regardless of what is sent.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Waveform  
DATa:DESTination  
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Fmt {EN V | Y }  
2–354  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Fmt?  
ENV  
Y
<Space>  
WFMPre  
:
:
PT_Fmt  
<wfm>  
?
Arguments  
ENV specifies that the waveform is transmitted as minimum and maximum point  
pairs. Only y values are explicitly transmitted. Absolute coordinates are given  
by:  
Xn + XZEro ) XINcr (n–PT_Off)  
Ynmin + YZEro ) YMUlt (ynmin * YOFf)  
Yn + YZEro ) YMUlt (ynmax * YOFf)  
max  
Y specifies a normal waveform where one ASCII or binary data point is  
transmitted for each point in the waveform record. Only y values are explicitly  
transmitted. Absolute coordinates are given by:  
Xn + XZEro ) XINcr (n–PT_Off)  
Yn + YZEro ) YMUlt (yn * YOFf)  
Examples  
WFMPRE:MATH1:PT_FMT?  
might return ENV, indicating that the MATH1 waveform data format is enveloped.  
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Off  
Returns the trigger point within the waveform record or extended acquisition. On  
input <wfm> always defaults to the reference location specified by  
DATa:DESTination regardless of what is sent.  
Group  
Syntax  
Waveform  
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Off <NR1>  
WFMPre:<wfm>:PT_Off?  
2–355  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
?
WFMPre  
:
<wfm>  
:
PT_Off  
Arguments  
<NR1> is the position of the trigger point relative to DATa:STARt when queried.  
In extended-acquisition-length mode, <NR1> refers to the acquistion length.  
Examples  
WFMPRE:CH1:PT_OFF?  
returns 0 indicating the trigger position within the waveform record.  
WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId  
Returns information about the waveform such as input coupling, volts per  
division, time per division, acquisition mode, and record length.  
The WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId command is ignored on input.  
TDS 400A: when the TDS 400A is in external clock mode, the time-per-div field  
will contain “50 clks/div”.  
Group  
Syntax  
Waveform  
WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId <QString>  
WFMPre:<wfm>:WFId?  
<Space>  
<QString>  
?
WFMPre  
:
<wfm>  
:
WFId  
Arguments  
<QString> is the waveform identifier string.  
WFMPre:<wfm>:XINcr  
Sets or queries the horizontal sampling interval. On input <wfm> always  
defaults to the reference location specified by DATa:DESTination regardless of  
what is sent.  
TDS 400A: when the TDS 400A is in external clock mode, the time-per-div field  
will contain “50 clks/div”.  
2–356  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Syntax  
Waveform  
WFMPre:<wfm>:XINcr <NR3>  
WFMPre:<wfm>:XINcr?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
WFMPre  
:
<wfm>  
:
XINcr  
Arguments  
<NR3> is the sampling interval.  
WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit  
Returns the horizontal (X-axis) units of the waveform data at the time of  
creation.  
The WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit command is ignored on input.  
TDS 400A: when the TDS 400A is in external clock mode, the time-per-div field  
will contain “50 clks/div”.  
Group  
Syntax  
Waveform  
WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit <QString>  
WFMPre:<wfm>:XUNit?  
<Space>  
<QString>  
?
WFMPre  
:
<wfm>  
:
XUNit  
Arguments  
Examples  
<QString> is “s” for seconds and specifies the units.  
WFMPRE:CH1:XUNIT?  
might return "s", indicating that the horizontal units for channel 1 are seconds.  
2–357  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
WFMPre:<wfm>:XZEro  
TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Sets or queries the horizontal (X-axis) origin offset. On input <wfm> always  
defaults to the reference location specified by DATa:DESTination regardless of  
what is sent.  
Group  
Syntax  
Waveform  
WFMPre:<wfm>:XZEro <NR3>  
WFMPre:<wfm>:XZEro?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
WFMPre  
:
<wfm>  
:
XZEro  
Arguments  
<NR3> is the offset in XUNits (usually time).  
WFMPre:<wfm>:YMUlt  
Sets or queries the vertical scale factor, in YUNit per unscaled data point value.  
On input <wfm> always defaults to the reference location specified by  
DATa:DESTination regardless of what is sent.  
Group  
Syntax  
Waveform  
WFMPre:<wfm>:YMUlt <NR3>  
WFMPre:<wfm>:YMUlt?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
WFMPre  
:
<wfm>  
:
YMUlt  
Arguments  
<NR3> is the scale factor, in YUNits (usually volts), per digitizing level.  
2–358  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
WFMPre:<wfm>:YOFf  
Sets or queries the vertical position of the waveform. On input <wfm> always  
defaults to the reference location specified by DATa:DESTination regardless of  
what is sent.  
Group  
Syntax  
Waveform  
WFMPre:<wfm>:YOFf <NR3>  
WFMPre:<wfm>:YOFf?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
WFMPre  
:
<wfm>  
:
YOFf  
Arguments  
<NR3> is the position in digitizing levels.  
WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit  
Returns the vertical (Y-axis) units of the waveform data at the time of creation.  
The WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit command is ignored on input.  
Group  
Syntax  
Waveform  
WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit <QString>  
WFMPre:<wfm>:YUNit?  
<Space>  
<QString>  
?
WFMPre  
:
<wfm>  
:
YUNit  
Arguments  
Examples  
<QString> is "V" for volts or "VV" for volts2, and specifies the units.  
WFMPRE:CH2:YUNIT?  
might return "V", meaning that the units for the vertical component of the  
channel 2 waveform data are volts.  
2–359  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro  
Sets or queries the vertical (Y-axis) offset voltage. On input <wfm> always  
defaults to the reference location specified by DATa:DESTination regardless of  
what is sent.  
Group  
Syntax  
Waveform  
WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro <NR3>  
WFMPre:<wfm>:YZEro?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
WFMPre  
:
<wfm>  
:
YZEro  
Arguments  
<NR3> is the offset in YUNits (usually volts).  
ZOOm  
Resets the zoom transforms to default values for all traces or live traces. The  
ZOOm query returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling  
of the display. This command is equivalent to selecting Reset All Factors or  
Reset Live Factors in the TDS 400A, 500C, 600B, 700C Zoom Reset menu or  
selecting Reset Zoom Factors in the Zoom menu of the TDS 510A.  
Group  
Syntax  
Zoom  
ZOOm { RESET | RESETLive (TDS 400A, 500C, 600B, and 700C only) }  
ZOOm?  
RESET  
<Space>  
RESETLive  
ZOOm  
?
Arguments  
RESET resets the zoom transforms to default values for all traces.  
RESETLive (TDS 400A, 500C, 600B, and 700C only) resets the zoom transforms  
to default values for live traces.  
2–360  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Examples  
ZOOM?  
might return :ZOOM:STATE OFF;HORIZONTAL:SCALE 2.00E+0;POSITION  
500.0E-3;LOCK LIVE;:ZOOM:VERTICAL:SCALE 2.0E+0;POSITION 0.0E+0.  
ZOOm:DUAl  
TDS 400A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Turns Dual Zoom mode on and off.  
Group  
Syntax  
Zoom  
ZOOm:DUAl { OFF | ON | <NR1> }  
ZOOm:DUAl?  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
<NR1>  
ZOOm  
:
DUAl  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
OFF or <NR1> = 0 turns Dual Zoom mode off.  
ON or <NR1> ꢀ 0 turns Dual Zoom mode on.  
ZOOM:DUAL ON  
enables the Dual Zoom feature.  
ZOOM:DUAL?  
returns either 0 or 1 depending on the state of Dual Zoom mode.  
ZOOm:DUAl:OFFSet  
TDS 400A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Adjusts the requested horizontal offset between the centers of the main and  
second zoom boxes.  
Group  
Syntax  
Zoom  
ZOOm:DUAl:OFFSet <NR3>  
2–361  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ZOOm:DUAl:OFFSet?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
ZOOm  
:
DUAl  
:
OFFSet  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the offset time in seconds.  
ZOOM:DUAL:OFFSET 100.0E-6  
adjusts the offset time in seconds between the centers of the main and second  
zoom boxes.  
ZOOm:GRAticule  
TDS 400A, 500C, 600B, & 700C Only  
Selects between the upper and lower graticule for use by the zoom preview state.  
If you select the lower graticule, horizontal and vertical knob changes will affect  
the underlying acquisition system. If you select the upper graticule, horizontal  
and vertical knob changes will affect the zoom factors.  
Group  
Syntax  
Zoom  
ZOOm:GRAticule { LOWEr | UPPer }  
ZOOm:GRAticule?  
LOWEr  
<Space>  
UPPer  
ZOOm  
:
GRAticule  
?
Arguments  
Examples  
LOWEr selects the lower graticule.  
UPPer selects the upper graticule.  
ZOOM:GRATICULE?  
might return UPPER, indicating that the upper graticule is selected.  
2–362  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk  
Specifies the waveforms that the horizontal zoom parameters affect. This is  
equivalent to setting Horizontal Lock in the Zoom side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Zoom  
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk { ALL | LIVe | NONe }  
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk?  
ALL  
LIVe  
<Space>  
NONe  
ZOOm  
:
HORizontal  
:
LOCk  
?
Arguments  
LIVe specifies that all live (CH<x>) waveforms will be horizontally positioned  
and scaled together.  
In extended-acquisition-length mode, LIVe is the only valid argument.  
NONe specifies that only the selected waveform is positioned and scaled using the  
horizontal zoom parameters.  
ALL specifies that all (CH<x>, Ref<x>, Math<x>) waveforms will be horizontal-  
ly positioned and scaled together.  
Examples  
ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:LOCK LIVE  
specifies that all live waveforms are positioned and scaled together.  
ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:LOCK?  
returns either ALL, LIVE, or NONE.  
ZOOm:HORizontal:POSition  
Sets or queries the horizontal position of zoomed waveforms. The setting of the  
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk command determines the waveforms affected. For  
example, if ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk is set to LIVe then only live (as opposed  
to reference and math) waveforms are affected.  
In extended-acquisition-length mode, sets or queries the horizontal position of  
the zoomed acquisition record.  
2–363  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
Group  
Syntax  
Zoom  
ZOOm:HORizontal:POSition <NR3>  
ZOOm:HORizontal:POSition?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
ZOOm  
:
HORizontal  
:
POSition  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is from 0 to 100, and is the percent of the waveform or extended  
acquisition that is to the left of graticule.  
ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50  
centers the waveform on the display.  
ZOOm:HORizontal:SCAle  
Sets or queries the horizontal expansion factor. This command is equivalent to  
using the front-panel Horizontal Scale knob when Zoom is on. It is also  
equivalent to using Zoom Preview with the upper graticule selected in the  
TDS 500C, 600B or 700C.  
Group  
Syntax  
Zoom  
ZOOm:HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>  
ZOOm:HORizontal:SCAle?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
ZOOm  
:
HORizontal  
:
SCAle  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the amount of expansion in the horizontal direction.  
It is less than 1 if there is horizontal compression.  
It is more than 1 if there is horizontal expansion.  
ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:SCALE?  
might return 1.00E+0 as the horizontal scale factor.  
2–364  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ZOOm:STATE  
Turns Zoom mode on and off. When Zoom mode is on, the horizontal and  
vertical position and scale commands affect the waveform display, not the  
acquisition. This is the only way to position and scale math and reference  
waveforms. This command is equivalent to turning Zoom on and off in the  
Zoom side menu.  
Group  
Syntax  
Zoom  
ZOOm:STATE { OFF | ON | PREView (noton TDS 510A) }  
ZOOm:STATE?  
OFF  
ON  
<Space>  
PREView  
ZOOm  
:
STATE  
?
Arguments  
OFF turns Zoom mode off.  
ON turns Zoom mode on. When InstaVu is in use, the state value becomes a  
requested value, to be restored when InstaVu is switched off. Do not use this  
condition if InstaVu is on. InstaVu overrides the zoom on state.  
PREView (not on TDS 510A) sets ZOOM:STATE to preview. Also, it causes the  
oscilloscope to display both the ZOOM:STATE OFF and ZOOM:STATE ON  
traces simultaneously in dual, half-height graticules. Do not use this condition if  
InstaVu is on. InstaVu overrides the zoom preview state.  
In extended-acquisition-length mode, entering the zoom preview state causes  
fit-to-screen to be on. If the oscilloscope exits the extended-acquisition-length  
mode or the zoom preview state, the fit-to-screen mode returns back to its prior  
setting.  
Examples  
ZOOM:STATE ON  
enables the Zoom feature.  
ZOOM:STATE?  
returns OFF, PREVIEW, or ON depending on the state of Zoom mode.  
2–365  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Descriptions  
ZOOm:VERTical:POSition  
Sets or queries the vertical position of waveforms.  
Group  
Syntax  
Zoom  
ZOOm:VERTical:POSition <NR3>  
ZOOm:VERTical:POSition?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
ZOOm  
:
VERTical  
:
POSition  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the vertical position in divisions.  
ZOOM:VERTICAL:POSITION?  
might return :ZOOM:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0E+0  
ZOOm:VERTical:SCAle  
Sets or queries the vertical expansion and compression factor.  
Group  
Related Commands  
Syntax  
Zoom  
ACQuire:MODe  
ZOOm:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>  
ZOOm:VERTical:SCAle?  
<Space>  
<NR3>  
?
ZOOm  
:
VERTical  
:
SCAle  
Arguments  
Examples  
<NR3> is the amount of vertical expansion or compression.  
ZOOM:VERTICAL:SCALE?  
might return :ZOOM:VERTICAL:SCALE 2.0E+0  
2–366  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
The digitizing oscilloscope provides a status and event reporting system for the  
GPIB interface. This system informs you of certain significant events that occur  
within the digitizing oscilloscope.  
The digitizing oscilloscope status handling system consists of five 8-bit registers  
and two queues. This section describes these registers and components. It also  
explains how the event handling system operates.  
Registers  
The registers in the event handling system fall into two functional groups:  
H
Status Registers contain information about the status of the digitizing  
oscilloscope. They include the Standard Event Status Register (SESR) and  
the Status Byte Register (SBR).  
H
Enable Registers determine whether selected types of events are reported to  
the Status Registers and the Event Queue. They include the Device Event  
Status Enable Register (DESER), the Event Status Enable Register (ESER),  
and the Service Request Enable Register (SRER).  
Status Registers  
The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) and the Status Byte Register (SBR)  
record certain types of events that may occur while the digitizing oscilloscope is  
in use. IEEE Std 488.2–1987 defines these registers.  
Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of event, such as an  
execution error or service request. When an event of a given type occurs, the  
digitizing oscilloscope sets the bit that represents that type of event to a value of  
one. (You can disable bits so that they ignore events and remain at zero. See the  
Enable Registers section on page 3–3.) Reading the status registers tells you  
what types of events have occurred.  
The Standard Event Status Register (SESR). The SESR, shown in Figure 3–1,  
records eight types of events that can occur within the digitizing oscilloscope.  
Use the *ESR? query to read the SESR register. Reading the register clears the  
bits of the register so that the register can accumulate information about new  
events.  
3–1  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC  
Figure 3–1: The Standard Event Status Register (SESR)  
Table 3–1: SESR Bit Functions  
Bit  
Function  
7 (MSB)  
PON (Power On). Shows that the digitizing oscilloscope was powered on. The  
completion of the diagnostic tests also sets this bit.  
6
5
URQ (User Request). Shows that an Application menu button was pressed.  
CME (Command Error). Shows that an error occurred while the digitizing  
oscilloscope was parsing a command or query. Command error messages are  
listed in Table 3–4 on page 3–12.  
4
EXE (Execution Error). Shows that an error occurred while the digitizing  
oscilloscope was executing a command or query. Execution error messages are  
listed in Table 3–5 on page 3–14.  
3
2
DDE (Device Error). Shows that a device error occurred. Device error  
messages are listed in Table 3–6 on page 3–17.  
QYE (Query Error). Shows that either an attempt was made to read the Output  
Queue when no data was present or pending, or that data in the Output Queue  
was lost.  
1
RQC (Request Control). Not used.  
0 (LSB)  
OPC (Operation Complete). Shows that the operation is complete. This bit is  
set when all pending operations complete following an *OPC command.  
The Status Byte Register (SBR) — shown in Figure 3–2, records whether output  
is available in the Output Queue, whether the digitizing oscilloscope requests  
service, and whether the SESR has recorded any events.  
Use a Serial Poll or the *STB? query to read the contents of the SBR. The bits in  
the SBR are set and cleared depending on the contents of the SESR, the Event  
Status Enable Register (ESER), and the Output Queue. When you use a Serial  
Poll to obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the RQS bit. When you use the *STB? query to  
obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the MSS bit. Reading the SBR does not clear the bits.  
6
RQS  
7
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
ESB MAV  
—
—
—
—
6
MSS  
Figure 3–2: The Status Byte Register (SBR)  
3–2  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
Table 3–2: SBR Bit Functions  
Bit  
Function  
7 (MSB)  
6
Not used.  
RQS (Request Service), obtained from a serial poll. Shows that the digitizing  
oscilloscope requests service from the GPIB controller.  
6
MSS (Master Status Summary), obtained from *STB? query. Summarizes the  
ESB and MAV bits in the SBR.  
5
ESB (Event Status Bit). Shows that status is enabled and present in the SESR.  
MAV (Message Available). Shows that output is available in the Output Queue.  
Not used.  
4
3 – 0  
Enable Registers  
DESER, ESER, and SRER allow you to select which events are reported to the  
Status Registers and the Event Queue. Each Enable Register acts as a filter to a  
Status Register (the DESER also acts as a filter to the Event Queue) and can  
prevent information from being recorded in the register or queue.  
Each bit in an Enable Register corresponds to a bit in the Status Register it  
controls. In order for an event to be reported to its bit in the Status Register, the  
corresponding bit in the Enable Register must be set to one. If the bit in the  
Enable Register is set to zero, the event is not recorded.  
Various commands set the bits in the Enable Registers. The Enable Registers and  
the commands used to set them are described below.  
The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER) — is shown in Figure 3–3. This  
register controls which types of events are reported to the SESR and the Event  
Queue. The bits in the DESER correspond to those in the SESR, as described  
earlier.  
Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the DESER. Use the  
DESE? query to read the DESER.  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC  
Figure 3–3: The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER)  
The Event Status Enable Register (ESER) — is shown in Figure 3–4. It controls  
which types of events are summarized by the Event Status Bit (ESB) in the SBR.  
Use the *ESE command to set the bits in the ESER. Use the *ESE? query to  
read it.  
3–3  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC  
Figure 3–4: The Event Status Enable Register (ESER)  
The Service Request Enable Register (SRER) — is shown in Figure 3–5. It  
controls which bits in the SBR generate a Service Request and are summarized  
by the Master Status Summary (MSS) bit.  
Use the *SRE command to set the SRER. Use the *SRE? query to read it. The  
RQS bit remains set to one until either the Status Byte Register is read with a  
Serial Poll or the MSS bit changes back to a zero.  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
—
—
ESB MAV  
—
—
—
—
Figure 3–5: The Service Request Enable Register (SRER)  
The Enable Registers and  
the *PSC Command  
The *PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power-on.  
Sending *PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows:  
H
H
H
DESER 255 (equivalent to a DESe 255 command)  
ESER 0 (equivalent to an *ESE 0 command)  
SRER 0 (equivalent to an *SRE 0 command)  
Sending *PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values in non-volatile  
memory through a power cycle.  
NOTE. To enable the PON (Power On) event to generate a Service Request, send  
*PSC 0, use the DESe and *ESE commands to enable PON in the DESER and  
ESER, and use the *SRE command to enable bit 5 in the SRER. Subsequent  
power-on cycles will generate a Service Request.  
3–4  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
Queues  
The digitizing oscilloscope status and event reporting system contains two  
queues: the Output Queue and the Event Queue.  
The Output Queue  
The digitizing oscilloscope stores query responses in the Output Queue. It  
empties this queue each time it receives a new command or query message after  
an <EOM>. The controller must read a query response before it sends the next  
command (or query) or it will lose responses to earlier queries.  
WARNING. When a controller sends a query, an <EOM>, and a second query,  
the digitizing scope normally clears the first response and outputs the second  
while reporting a Query Error (QYE bit in the ESER) to indicate the lost  
response. A fast controller, however, may receive a part or all of the first  
response as well. To avoid this situation, the controller should always read the  
response immediately after sending any terminated query message or send a  
DCL (Device Clear) before sending the second query.  
The Event Queue  
The Event Queue stores detailed information on up to 20 events. If more than 20  
events stack up in the Event Queue, the 20th event is replaced by event code  
350, “Too many events.”  
Read the Event Queue with the EVENT? query (which returns only the event  
number), with the EVMSG? query (which returns the event number and a text  
description of the event), or with the ALLEV? query (which returns all the event  
numbers along with a description of the event). Reading an event removes it  
from the queue.  
Before reading an event from the Event Queue, you must use the *ESR? query to  
read the summary of the event from the SESR. This makes the events summa-  
rized by the *ESR? read available to the EVENT? and EVMSG? queries, and  
empties the SESR.  
Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by previous *ESR?  
reads but not read from the Event Queue. Events that follow an *ESR? read are  
put in the Event Queue but are not available until *ESR? is used again.  
3–5  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
Event Handling Sequence  
Figure 3–6, on page 3–6, shows how to use the status and event handling  
system. In the explanation that follows, numbers in parentheses refer to numbers  
in Figure 3–6.  
1
Device Event Status Enable Register  
(DESER)  
Read using DESE?  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC  
Write using DESE  
2
Standard Event Status Register  
(SESR)  
Read using *ESR?  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Event  
Queue  
PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC  
Event  
Event  
Event  
Cannot be written  
3
Event Status Enable Register  
(ESER)  
Read using *ESE?  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Output  
Queue  
PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC  
Byte  
Byte  
Byte  
Write using *ESE  
4
5
6
RQS  
Status Byte Register  
(SBR)  
7
7
5
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
—
—
ESB MAV  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Read using *STB?  
Cannot be written  
6
MSS  
6
7
Service Request Enable Register  
(SRER)  
6
5
4
—
ESB MAV  
Read using *SRE?  
Write using *SRE  
Figure 3–6: Status and Event Handling Process  
When an event occurs, a signal is sent to the DESER (1). If that type of event is  
enabled in the DESER (that is, if the bit for that event type is set to 1), the  
appropriate bit in the SESR is set to one, and the event is recorded in the Event  
Queue (2). If the corresponding bit in the ESER is also enabled (3), then the ESB  
bit in the SBR is set to one (4).  
3–6  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
When output is sent to the Output Queue, the MAV bit in the SBR is set to  
one (5).  
When a bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in the SRER is  
enabled (6), the MSS bit in the SBR is set to one and a service request is  
generated (7).  
Synchronization Methods  
Although most GPIB commands are completed almost immediately after being  
received by the digitizing oscilloscope, some commands start a process that  
requires more time. For example, once a HARDCOPY START command is  
executed it may be a few seconds before the hardcopy operation is complete.  
Rather than remain idle while the operation is in process, the digitizing  
oscilloscope will continue processing other commands. This means that some  
operations will not be completed in the order that they were sent.  
Sometimes the result of an operation depends on the result of an earlier  
operation. A first operation must complete before the next one gets processed.  
The digitizing oscilloscope status and event reporting system provide ways to do  
this.  
For example, a typical application might involve acquiring a single-sequence  
waveform and then taking a measurement on the acquired waveform. You could  
use the following command sequence to do this:  
/** Set up single-sequence acquisition **/  
SELECT:CH1 ON  
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500  
ACQUIRE:MODE NORMALSAMPLE  
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE  
/** Acquire waveform data **/  
ACQUIRE:STATE ON  
/** Set up the measurement parameters **/  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1  
/** Take amplitude measurement on acquired data **/  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?  
The acquisition of the waveform requires extended processing time. It may not  
finish before the digitizing oscilloscope takes an amplitude measurement (See  
Figure 3–7). This can result in an incorrect amplitude value.  
3–7  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
ACQUIRE:STATE ON  
Acquiring Waveform Data  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?  
Processing Time  
Figure 3–7: Command Processing Without Using Synchronization  
To ensure the digitizing oscilloscope completes waveform acquisition before  
taking the measurement on the acquired data, you can synchronize the program.  
Figure 3–8 shows the desired processing sequence.  
ACQUIRE:STATE ON  
Acquiring Waveform Data  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?  
Processing Time  
Figure 3–8: Processing Sequence With Synchronization  
You can use four commands to synchronize the operation of the digitizing  
oscilloscope with your application program: *WAI, BUSY?, *OPC, and *OPC?.  
Using the *WAI Command  
You can force commands to execute sequentially by using the *WAI command.  
This command forces completion of the previous commands before processing  
new ones.  
The same command sequence using the *WAI command for synchronization  
looks like this:  
/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */  
SELECT:CH1 ON  
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500  
ACQUIRE:MODE NORMALSAMPLE  
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE  
/* Acquire waveform data */  
ACQUIRE:STATE ON  
/* Set up the measurement parameters */  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1  
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement */  
*WAI  
3–8  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
/* Take amplitude measurement on acquired data */  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?  
Though *WAI is one of the easiest ways to achieve synchronization, it is also the  
most costly. The processing time of the digitizing oscilloscope is slowed since it  
is processing a single command at a time. This time could be spent doing other  
tasks.  
The controller can continue to write commands to the input buffer of the  
digitizing oscilloscope, but the commands will not be processed by the digitizing  
oscilloscope until all operations in process are complete. If the input buffer  
becomes full, the controller will be unable to write more commands to the buffer.  
This can cause a time-out.  
Using the BUSY Query  
The BUSY? query allows you to find out whether the digitizing oscilloscope is  
busy processing a command that has an extended processing time such as  
single-sequence acquisition.  
The same command sequence using the BUSY? query for synchronization looks  
like this:  
/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */  
SELECT:CH1 ON  
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500  
ACQUIRE:MODE NORMALSAMPLE  
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE  
/* Acquire waveform data */  
ACQUIRE:STATE ON  
/* Set up the measurement parameters */  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1  
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement */  
While BUSY? keep looping  
/* Take amplitude measurement on acquired data */  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?  
This sequence lets you create your own wait loop rather than using the *WAI  
command. The BUSY? query helps you avoid time-outs caused by writing too  
many commands to the input buffer. The controller is still tied up, though, and  
the repeated BUSY? query will result in more bus traffic.  
Using the *OPC Command  
If the corresponding status registers are enabled, the *OPC command sets the  
OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register (SESR) when an operation is  
complete. You achieve synchronization by using this command with either a  
serial poll or service request handler.  
3–9  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
Serial Poll Method. Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable  
Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE  
and *ESE commands. When the operation is complete, the OPC bit in the  
Standard Event Status Register (SESR) will be enabled and the Event Status Bit  
(ESB) in the Status Byte Register will be enabled.  
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization  
with serial polling looks like this:  
/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */  
SELECT:CH1 ON  
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500  
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE  
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE  
/* Enable the status registers */  
DESE 1  
*ESE 1  
*SRE 0  
/* Acquire waveform data */  
ACQUIRE:STATE ON  
/* Set up the measurement parameters */  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1  
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement. */  
*OPC  
While serial poll = 0, keep looping  
/* Take amplitude measurement on acquired data */  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?  
This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY?.  
Service Request Method. Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable  
Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE  
and *ESE commands. You can also enable service requests by setting the ESB  
bit in the Service Request Enable Register (SRER) using the *SRE command.  
When the operation is complete, a Service Request will be generated.  
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization  
looks like this:  
/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */  
SELECT:CH1 ON  
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500  
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE  
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE  
/* Enable the status registers */  
DESE 1  
3–10  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
*ESE 1  
*SRE 32  
/* Acquire waveform data */  
ACQUIRE:STATE ON  
/* Set up the measurement parameters */  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1  
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement */  
*OPC  
Program can now do different tasks such as talk to other  
devices. The SRQ, when it comes, interrupts those tasks and  
returns control to this task.  
/* Take amplitude measurement on acquired data */  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?  
This technique is more efficient but requires more sophisticated programming.  
Using the *OPC? Query  
The *OPC? query places a 1 in the Output Queue once an operation is complete.  
A timeout could occur if you try to read the output queue before there is any data  
in it.  
The same command sequence using the *OPC? query for synchronization looks  
like this:  
/* Set up single-sequence acquisition */  
SELECT:CH1 ON  
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500  
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE  
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE  
/* Acquire waveform data */  
ACQUIRE:STATE ON  
/* Set up the measurement parameters */  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1  
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement */  
*OPC?  
Wait for read from Output Queue.  
/* Take amplitude measurement on acquired data */  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?  
This is the simplest approach. It requires no status handling or loops. However,  
you must set the controller time-out for longer than the acquisition operation.  
3–11  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
Messages  
Tables 3–3 through 3–9 list all the programming interface messages the  
digitizing oscilloscope generates in response to commands and queries.  
For most messages, a secondary message from the digitizing oscilloscope gives  
more detail about the cause of the error or the meaning of the message. This  
message is part of the message string, and is separated from the main message by  
a semicolon.  
Each message is the result of an event. Each type of event sets a specific bit in  
the SESR and is controlled by the equivalent bit in the DESER. Thus, each  
message is associated with a specific SESR bit. In the message tables that follow,  
the associated SESR bit is specified in the table title, with exceptions noted with  
the error message text.  
Table 3–3 shows the messages when the system has no events or status to report.  
These have no associated SESR bit.  
Table 3–3: No Event Messages  
Code  
Message  
0
1
No events to report – queue empty  
No events to report – new events pending *ESR?  
Table 3–4 shows the error messages generated by improper command syntax.  
Check that the command is properly formed and that it follows the rules in  
Command Syntax starting on page 2–1.  
Table 3–4: Command Error Messages – CME Bit 5  
Code  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
108  
109  
110  
Message  
Command error  
Invalid character  
Syntax error  
Invalid separator  
Data type error  
GET not allowed  
Invalid program data separator  
Parameter not allowed  
Missing parameter  
Command header error  
3–12  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
Table 3–4: Command Error Messages – CME Bit 5 (Cont.)  
Code  
111  
Message  
Header separator error  
Program mnemonic too long  
Undefined header  
112  
113  
118  
120  
121  
123  
124  
128  
130  
131  
134  
138  
140  
141  
144  
148  
150  
151  
152  
158  
160  
161  
168  
170  
171  
178  
180  
181  
183  
184  
Query not allowed  
Numeric data error  
Invalid character in number  
Exponent too large  
Too many digits  
Numeric data not allowed  
Suffix error  
Invalid suffix  
Suffix too long  
Suffix not allowed  
Character data error  
Invalid character data  
Character data too long  
Character data not allowed  
String data error  
Invalid string data  
String data too long  
String data not allowed  
Block data error  
Invalid block data  
Block data not allowed  
Expression error  
Invalid expression  
Expression data not allowed  
Alias error  
Invalid outside alias definition  
Invalid inside alias definition  
Command in alias requires more/fewer parameters  
3–13  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
Table 3–5 lists the execution errors that are detected during execution of a  
command. In these error messages, you should read “macro” as “alias.”  
Table 3–5: Execution Error Messages – EXE Bit 4  
Code  
200  
201  
202  
210  
211  
Message  
Execution error  
Invalid while in local  
Settings lost due to rtl  
Trigger error  
Trigger ignored  
212  
220  
221  
222  
223  
224  
230  
240  
241  
242  
243  
250  
251  
252  
253  
254  
255  
256  
257  
258  
260  
261  
2200  
2201  
2202  
Arm ignored  
Parameter error  
Settings conflict  
Data out of range  
Too much data  
Illegal parameter value  
Data corrupt or stale  
Hardware error  
Hardware missing  
Hardware configuration error  
Hardware I/O device error  
Mass storage error  
Missing mass storage  
Missing media  
Corrupt media  
Media full  
Directory full  
File name not found  
File name error  
Media protected  
Expression error  
Math error in expression  
Measurement error, Measurement system error  
Measurement error, Zero period  
Measurement error, No period found  
3–14  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
Table 3–5: Execution Error Messages – EXE Bit 4 (Cont.)  
Code  
2203  
2204  
2205  
2206  
2207  
2208  
2209  
2210  
2211  
2212  
2213  
2214  
2215  
2216  
2217  
2218  
2219  
2220  
2221  
2222  
2223  
2224  
2225  
2226  
2227  
2228  
2229  
2230  
2235  
2236  
2237  
2238  
Message  
Measurement error, No period, second waveform  
Measurement error, Low signal amplitude  
Measurement error, Low amplitude, second waveform  
Measurement error, Invalid gate  
Measurement error, Measurement overflow  
Measurement error, Waveform does not cross Mid Ref  
Measurement error, No second Mid Ref crossing  
Measurement error, No Mid Ref crossing, second waveform  
Measurement error, No backwards Mid Ref crossing  
Measurement error, No negative crossing  
Measurement error, No positive crossing  
Measurement error, No crossing  
Measurement error, No crossing, second waveform  
Measurement error, No crossing, target waveform  
Measurement error, Constant waveform  
Measurement error, Unused  
Measurement error, No valid edge – No arm sample  
Measurement error, No valid edge – No arm cross  
Measurement error, No valid edge – No trigger cross  
Measurement error, No valid edge – No second cross  
Measurement error, Waveform mismatch  
Measurement error, WAIT calculating  
Measurement error, No waveform to measure  
Null Waveform  
Positive and Negative Clipping  
Measurement error, Positive Clipping  
Measurement error, Negative Clipping  
Measurement error, High Ref < Low Ref  
Math error, Invalid math description  
Math error, Reference waveform is invalid  
Out of acquisition memory  
Too many channels need to be acquired  
3–15  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
Table 3–5: Execution Error Messages – EXE Bit 4 (Cont.)  
Code  
Message  
2239  
EAL turned off  
(EAL = extended-acquisition-length mode)  
2240  
2241  
2242  
2243  
2244  
2245  
2246  
2247  
2248  
2249  
2258  
2259  
2260  
2270  
2271  
2272  
2273  
2274  
2275  
2276  
2277  
2278  
2279  
2280  
2281  
2285  
2286  
2290  
2291  
2292  
2293  
Invalid password  
Waveform requested is invalid  
Data start and stop > record length  
Waveform requested is not a data source  
Waveform requested is not turned on  
Saveref error, Selected channel is turned off  
Saveref error, Selected channel data invalid  
Saveref error, Out of reference memory  
Saveref error, Source reference data invalid  
Reference deletion error, Waveform in use for math  
Acq must be stopped  
File too big  
Calibration error  
Alias error  
Alias syntax error  
Alias execution error  
Illegal alias label  
Alias parameter error  
Alias definition too long  
Alias expansion error  
Alias redefinition not allowed  
Alias header not found  
Alias label too long  
Alias table full  
Wrong configuration  
TekSecureR Pass  
TekSecureR Fail  
Limit error, Reference in use  
Limit error, Reference data invalid  
Limit error, Out of reference memory  
Limit error, Selected channel is turned off  
3–16  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
Table 3–5: Execution Error Messages – EXE Bit 4 (Cont.)  
Code  
2301  
2302  
2311  
Message  
Cursor error, Off-screen  
Cursor error, cursors in different frames  
Group requested has not been selected or has been deleted  
Table 3–6 lists the device errors that can occur during digitizing oscilloscope  
operation. These errors may indicate that the oscilloscope needs repair.  
Table 3–6: Device Error Messages – DDE Bit 3  
Code  
300  
310  
311  
Message  
Device-specific error  
System error  
Memory error  
312  
313  
314  
315  
350  
PUD memory lost  
Calibration memory lost  
Save/recall memory lost  
Configuration memory lost  
Queue overflow (does not set DDE bit)  
Table 3–7 lists the system event messages. These messages are generated  
whenever certain system conditions occur.  
Table 3–7: System Event Messages  
Code  
400  
401  
402  
403  
404  
405  
410  
420  
430  
Message  
Query event  
Power on (PON bit 7 set)  
Operation complete (OPC bit 0 set)  
User request (URQ bit 6 set)  
Power fail (DDE bit 3 set)  
Request control  
Query INTERRUPTED (QYE bit 2 set)  
Query UNTERMINATED (QYE bit 2 set)  
Query DEADLOCKED (QYE bit 2 set)  
3–17  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
Table 3–7: System Event Messages (Cont.)  
Code  
440  
450  
451  
452  
453  
454  
460  
461  
462  
463  
464  
465  
466  
Message  
Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response (QYE bit 2 set)  
Right menu button #1 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)  
Right menu button #2 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)  
Right menu button #3 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)  
Right menu button #4 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)  
Right menu button #5 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)  
Bottom menu button #1 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)  
Bottom menu button #2 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)  
Bottom menu button #3 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)  
Bottom menu button #4 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)  
Bottom menu button #5 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)  
Bottom menu button #6 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)  
Bottom menu button #7 pushed (URQ bit 6 set)  
Table 3–8 lists warning messages that do not interrupt the flow of command  
execution. These notify you that you may get unexpected results.  
Table 3–8: Execution Warning Messages – EXE Bit 4  
Code  
500  
510  
525  
526  
527  
528  
530  
531  
532  
540  
541  
542  
543  
Message  
Execution warning  
String data too long, truncated  
Parameter underrange  
Parameter overrange  
Parameter rounded  
Parameter out of range  
Data stop > stop, Values swapped internally  
Data stop > record length, Curve truncated  
Curve data too long, Curve truncated  
Measurement warning  
Measurement warning, Low signal amplitude  
Measurement warning, Unstable histogram  
Measurement warning, Low resolution  
3–18  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status and Events  
Table 3–8: Execution Warning Messages – EXE Bit 4 (Cont.)  
Code  
544  
545  
546  
547  
548  
549  
550  
551  
552  
Message  
Measurement warning, Uncertain edge  
Measurement warning, Invalid in minmax  
Measurement warning, Need 3 edges  
Measurement warning, Clipping positive/negative  
Measurement warning, Clipping positive  
Measurement warning, Clipping negative  
InstaVu active – deactivate to see change  
InstaVu active – deactivate to use math  
EAL on – turn off to see change  
(EAL = extended-acquisition-length mode)  
553  
EAL on – turn off to use math  
(EAL = extended-acquisition-length mode)  
570  
571  
572  
Saveref warning, decimated 500K waveform to 250K Ref (TDS 700A)  
Option 05 not present  
Option 2F not present  
Table 3–9 shows internal errors that indicate an internal fault in the digitizing  
oscilloscope.  
Table 3–9: Internal Warning Messages  
Code  
600  
Message  
Internal warning  
620  
Internal warning, Bad thermistor  
Internal warning, 50 W overload  
630  
3–19  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Examples  
The example programs illustrate methods you can use to control the digitizing  
oscilloscope from the GPIB interface. The disk that comes with this manual  
contains listings for these programs written in Microsoft QuickBASIC 4.5 and  
Microsoft QuickC 2.5.  
The programs run on a PC-compatible system equipped with a Tektronix  
(National Instruments) GPIB board and associated drivers. For example, the  
programs will work with a Tektronix S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-  
PCII/IIA) GPIB package (See Figure 4–1).  
GPIB Board  
(Tektronix S3FG210 or National  
Instruments PCII/IIA)  
and  
or  
PC Compatible  
Figure 4–1: Equipment Needed to Run the Example Programs  
All the example programs assume that the GPIB system recognizes the digitizing  
oscilloscope as DEV1 and the PC (controller) as GPIB0. You can use the  
IBCONF.EXE program to assign these names.  
The example software includes:  
H
H
MEAS: automatically measures waveform parameters.  
COMM: shows communication between controller and oscilloscope.  
4–1  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Examples  
H
H
H
GETWFM: reads a waveform from an oscilloscope and stores it in a file.  
CURSOR: uses cursors to measure waveform parameters.  
TL: a talker-listener program.  
Compiling the Example Programs  
The example programs diskette contains programs written in Microsoft  
QuickBASIC 4.5 and Microsoft QuickC 2.5.  
Executable versions of the programs are in the PROGRAMS directory. Source  
versions are in the SOURCES directory. Within this directory, the QuickBASIC  
programs are in the Q-BASIC subdirectory and the QuickC programs are in the  
QUICK-C subdirectory.  
A README file in each directory explains how to build executable code from the  
source files provided.  
The QuickC directory also comes with sample MAKE files and sample  
executable files. These have the suffix .MAK.  
If you wish to develop code, you will need to use files that come with the  
GPIB system. Specifically, the QuickBASIC programs use QBDECL.BAS  
and QBIB.OBJ. The QuickC programs use DECL.H and MCIB.OBJ.  
NOTE. The programs you compile in the Sources directory work with the  
Tektronix S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-PCII-IIA) GPIB system. It may  
take extra steps or changes to get them to work with older Tektronix GURU and  
other GPIB systems.  
Compiling and Linking  
Your Example Quick-C  
Programs  
To make an executable for any example, perform the following:  
1. Install QuickC. Select the SMALL memory model. Be sure to set up your  
path so DOS can access the QuickC directory.  
2. Install the Tektronix S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-PCII/IIA) GPIB  
board and drivers. Remember to identify the GPIB device as DEV1. You can  
use the IBCONF.EXE program to do this.  
3. Copy the files from the examples diskette to your hard disk. You might also  
create a special directory to store them. For example, if the current drive is  
hard disk C, you want to store the examples in drive C, and the examples  
diskette is in drive B, you might type:  
mkdir examples  
4–2  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Examples  
cd examples  
copy B:\quick-c\*.* .  
4. For this installation, you will also want to copy DECL.H and MCIB.OBJ from  
your Tektronix S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-PCII/IIA) GPIB  
drivers directory to this directory. For example, if the GPIB drivers are in the  
gpibĆpc directory and you are in the example programs directory, you  
would type:  
copy \gpib-pc\decl.h .  
copy \gpib-pc\mcib.obj .  
5. To compile and link your TDS sample C programs, simply type: nmake  
<file name>.mak  
where <file name> refers to the name of the example program you wish to  
compile and link. Specifically:  
To compile and link MEAS.C, type: nmake meas.mak  
To compile and link COMM.C, type: nmake comm.mak  
To compile and link GETWFM.C, type: nmake getwfm.mak  
To compile and link CURSOR.C, type: nmake cursor.mak  
To compile and link TL.C, type: nmake tl.mak  
6. Run the program by simply typing the program name.  
To run meas, type: meas  
To run comm, type: comm  
To run getwfm, type: getwfm  
To run cursor, type: cursor  
To run tl, type: tl  
Compiling and Linking  
Your Example  
QuickBASIC Programs  
To make an executable for any of the following files, perform the following:  
1. Install QuickBASIC.  
2. Install the Tektronix S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-PCII/IIA) GPIB  
board and drivers. Remember to reboot your PC to initialize the GPIB  
drivers.  
3. Copy the files from the examples diskette to your hard disk. You might also  
create a special directory to store them. For example, if the current drive is  
4–3  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Examples  
hard disk C, you want to store the examples in drive C, and the examples  
diskette is in drive B, you might type:  
mkdir examples  
cd examples  
copy b:\q-basic\*.* .  
4. For this installation, you will also want to copy QBDECL.BAS and QBIB.OBJ  
from your Tektronix S3FG210 (National Instruments GPIB-PCII/IIA) GPIB  
drivers directory to the directory your example programs are in. For  
example, if the GPIB drivers are in the gpib-pc directory and you are in the  
example programs directory, you would type:  
copy \gpib-pc\qbdecl.bas .  
copy \gpib-pc\qbib.obj .  
5. Perform the following two steps for example programs:  
a. Compile the program by using the following command:  
bc/o <file>.bas;  
where <file> is one of the example program names.  
To compile MEAS.BAS, type: bc/o meas.bas;  
To compile COMM.BAS, type: bc/o comm.bas;  
To compile GETWFM.BAS, type: bc/o getwfm.bas;  
To compile CURSOR.BAS, type: bc/o ucrsor.bas;  
To compile TL.BAS, type: bc/o tl.bas;  
b. Link the compiled program with the qbib.obj module to create the  
executable program (file.EXE) by using the following command:  
link <file>.obj+qbib.obj;  
where <file> is one of the above program names.  
To link MEAS.OBJ, type: link meas.obj+qbib.obj;  
To link COMM.OBJ, type: link comm.obj+qbib.obj;  
To link GETWFM.OBJ, type: link getwfm.obj+qbib.obj;  
To link CURSOR.OBJ, type: link cursor.obj+qbib.obj;  
To link TL.OBJ, type: link tl.obj+qbib.obj;  
4–4  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Examples  
GPIBIO.BAS is a collection of input/output routines used by the other  
programs and is included for proper file compilation.  
6. Run the program by simply typing the program name.  
To run meas, type: meas  
To run comm, type: comm  
To run getwfm, type: getwfm  
To run cursor, type: cursor  
To run tl, type: tl  
NOTE. The example programs disable front-panel operation while they are  
running and reenable it when they terminate. If your program terminates  
prematurely, front-panel operation may remain disabled. To reenable front-panel  
operation, do one of the following: cycle power on the digitizing oscilloscope or  
send the GPIB command UNLOCK ALL to unlock the front panel. You can send the  
UNLOCK ALL command with the TL program included in your sample programs  
disk.  
4–5  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A: Character Charts  
The characters in Table A–1 are available for the digitizing oscilloscope.  
Numbers in the lower left corners are character widths in pixels.  
Table A–1: The TDS Character Set  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
NUL  
space  
0
@
P
‘
p
0
0
1
5
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
14  
12  
10  
10  
12  
9
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
10  
13  
10  
9
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
5
96  
97  
11  
10  
7
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
12  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
W
D
!
”
1
2
3
4
5
A
B
C
D
E
Q
R
S
T
a
b
c
d
e
q
r
251  
7
5
8
?
7
11  
8
98  
2
B
#
s
t
Ç
W
10  
10  
12  
99  
8
8
3
4
11  
12  
19  
20  
..  
$
10  
12  
10  
9
100  
101  
7
10  
%
U
u
11  
10  
5
12  
21  
6
m
&
’
6
7
8
9
:
F
G
H
I
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
f
g
h
i
v
w
x
y
z
12  
5
6
7
8
9
12  
10  
16  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
12  
5
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
10  
10  
10  
10  
6
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
9
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
11  
15  
10  
10  
10  
6
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
6
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
10  
14  
9
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
7
‘
11  
13  
6
10  
11  
5
!
8
(
5
6
9
HT  
LF  
)
0
16  
6
10  
8
A
B
C
D
*
J
j
0
10  
11  
12  
13  
8
7
5
12  
0
ESC  
+
,
;
K
L
M
k
l
{
10  
11  
0
11  
6
6
10  
8
10  
5
6
<
=
\
x
11  
11  
9
6
9
CR  
—
]
m
}
11  
15  
6
15  
6
11  
10  
10  
29  
30  
31  
E
F
.
/
>
?
N
O
^
_
n
o
~
~
6
9
46  
47  
11  
7
62  
63  
13  
13  
78  
79  
11  
11  
94  
95  
11  
10  
110  
111  
11  
126  
127  
10  
7
14  
15  
D
3
A–1  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A: Character Charts  
Table A–2: ASCII & GPIB Code Chart  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
B7  
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
B6  
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
B5  
BITS  
NUMBERS  
SYMBOLS  
B4 B3 B2 B1  
CONTROL  
UPPER CASE  
LOWER CASE  
0
20  
40  
LA0  
60  
LA16  
100  
TA0  
120  
TA16 140  
SA0  
160  
SA16  
NUL  
SOH  
STX  
ETX  
EOT  
ENQ  
ACK  
BEL  
BS  
DLE  
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
NAK  
SYN  
ETB  
CAN  
EM  
SP  
!
0
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
p
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0 0  
0 1  
1 0  
1 1  
0 0  
0 1  
1 0  
1 1  
0 0  
0 1  
1 0  
1 1  
0 0  
0 1  
60  
80  
96  
0
1
0
10  
21  
16  
20  
41  
32  
30  
61  
48  
40  
64  
50  
70  
112  
GTL  
LL0  
LA1  
LA17  
101  
TA1  
121  
TA17  
141  
SA1  
161  
SA17  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
a
b
c
d
e
f
q
r
1
2
1
11  
22  
17  
21  
42  
33  
31  
62  
49  
41  
65  
51  
81  
61  
97  
71  
113  
LA2  
LA18  
102  
TA2  
122  
TA18  
142  
SA2  
162  
SA18  
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
2
3
2
12  
23  
18  
22  
43  
34  
32  
63  
50  
42  
66  
52  
82  
62  
98  
72  
114  
LA3  
LA19  
103  
TA3  
123  
TA19  
143  
SA3  
163  
SA19  
s
t
3
4
3
13  
24  
19  
23  
44  
35  
33  
64  
51  
43  
67  
53  
83  
63  
99  
73  
115  
SDC  
DCL  
LA4  
LA20  
104  
TA4  
124  
TA20  
144  
SA4  
164  
SA20  
4
5
4
14  
25  
20  
24  
45  
36  
34  
65  
52  
44  
68  
54  
84  
64  
100  
74  
116  
PPC  
PPU  
LA5  
LA21  
105  
TA5  
125  
TA21  
145  
SA5  
165  
SA21  
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
5
6
5
15  
26  
21  
25  
46  
37  
35  
66  
53  
45  
69  
55  
85  
65  
101  
75  
117  
LA6  
LA22  
106  
TA6  
126  
TA22  
146  
SA6  
166  
SA22  
6
7
6
16  
27  
22  
26  
47  
38  
36  
67  
54  
46  
70  
56  
86  
66  
102  
76  
118  
LA7  
LA23  
107  
TA7  
127  
TA23  
147  
SA7  
167  
SA23  
G
H
I
g
h
i
7
7
17  
30  
23  
27  
50  
39  
37  
70  
55  
47  
71  
57  
87  
67  
103  
77  
119  
10  
GET  
SPE  
LA8  
LA24  
110  
TA8  
130  
TA24  
150  
SA8  
170  
SA24  
8
8
18  
31  
24  
28  
51  
40  
38  
71  
56  
48  
72  
58  
88  
68  
104  
78  
120  
11  
TCT  
SPD  
LA9  
LA25  
111  
TA9  
131  
TA25  
151  
SA9  
171  
SA25  
HT  
)
9
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
19  
32  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
29  
52  
41  
39  
72  
57  
49  
73  
59  
89  
69  
105  
79  
121  
12  
LA10  
LA26  
112  
TA10  
132  
TA26  
152  
SA10  
172  
SA26  
LF  
SUB  
ESC  
FS  
J
j
*
A
1A  
33  
2A  
53  
42  
3A  
73  
58  
4A  
74  
5A  
90  
6A  
106  
7A  
122  
13  
LA11  
LA27  
113  
TA11  
133  
TA27  
153  
SA11  
173  
SA27  
;
VT  
+
,
K
L
k
l
B
1B  
34  
2B  
54  
43  
3B  
74  
59  
4B  
75  
5B  
91  
6B  
107  
7B  
123  
14  
LA12  
LA28  
114  
TA12  
134  
TA28  
154  
SA12  
174  
SA28  
FF  
<
=
>
?
\
7C  
124  
C
1C  
35  
2C  
55  
44  
3C  
75  
60  
4C  
76  
5C  
92  
6C  
108  
15  
LA13  
LA29  
115  
TA13  
135  
TA29  
155  
SA13  
175  
SA29  
CR  
GS  
–
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
D
1D  
36  
2D  
56  
45  
3D  
76  
61  
4D  
77  
5D  
93  
6D  
109  
7D  
125  
16  
LA14  
LA30  
116  
TA14  
136  
TA30  
156  
SA14  
176  
SA30  
^
–
SO  
RS  
1
1
1
0
~
E
1E  
37  
2E  
57  
46  
3E  
77  
62  
4E  
78  
5E  
94  
6E  
110  
7E  
126  
17  
LA15  
UNL  
117  
TA15  
137  
UNT  
157  
SA15  
177  
RUBOUT  
(DEL)  
SI  
US  
/
1
1
1
1
F
1F  
2F  
47  
3F  
63  
4F  
79  
5F  
95  
6F  
111  
7F  
127  
ADDRESSED  
COMMANDS  
UNIVERSAL  
COMMANDS  
LISTEN  
ADDRESSES  
TALK  
ADDRESSES  
SECONDARY ADDRESSES  
OR COMMANDS  
Tektronix  
5
5
PPC  
octal  
hex  
GPIB code (with ATN asserted)  
ASCII character  
decimal  
KEY  
REF: ANSI STD X3.4-1977  
IEEE STD 488.1-1987  
ISO STD 646-2973  
ENQ  
5
A–2  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B: Reserved Words  
The following is a list of the reserved words of the digitizing oscilloscope. Do  
not use these words for aliases. Capital letters identify the required minimum  
spelling. Hint: Use the full spelling for the most robost code as the minimum  
spelling rules may change over time and from model to model.  
*CAL  
*CLS  
*DDT  
*ESE  
*ESR  
*IDN  
*LRN  
*OPC  
AUTO  
CH4  
CHKsm0  
CLAss  
DESKJET  
DESKJETC  
DESTination  
DIAg  
AUTOSet  
AUXiliary  
AVErage  
BACKGround  
BACKWards  
BANdwidth  
BASe  
CLEar  
CLEARMenu  
CLEARSNapshot  
CLEARSpool  
CLOCk  
DIR  
DIREction  
DISAbled  
DISplay  
*PSC  
*PUD  
*RCL  
*RST  
*SAV  
*SRE  
*STB  
*TRG  
BAUd  
BELl  
BIN  
BIT_Nr  
BLAckman  
BMP  
BMPCOLOR  
BN_Fmt  
BOLd  
CMEan  
COLLision  
COLOr  
COMPARE  
CONTRast  
CONTROl  
COPy  
COUNt  
COUPling  
CPU  
DOTs  
DPU411  
DPU412  
DUAl  
ECL  
EDGE  
EDGE1  
EDGE2  
EITher  
ENAbled  
*TST  
*WAI  
BOTh  
ABOrt  
ABSolute  
AC  
BOTTOM1  
BOTTOM2  
BOTTOM3  
BOTTOM4  
BOTTOM5  
BOTTOM6  
BOTTOM7  
BOX  
BOXPcnt  
BURst  
BUSY  
BY  
BYCONTents  
BYT_Nr  
BYT_Or  
CALibrate  
CATalog  
CARea  
CENtronics  
CH1  
CH2  
CRMs  
ENCdg  
ENV  
CROSSHair  
CRVchk  
CURRent  
CURSor  
CURSOR1  
CURSOR2  
CURVe  
CUSTom  
CWD  
DATa  
DATE  
ENVElope  
EPSColor  
EPSCOLImg  
EPSImage  
EPSMono  
EPSOn  
EVEN  
EVENT  
EVENTS  
EVENTSTime  
EVMsg  
ACCept  
ACQDAta  
ACQDUration  
ACQLength  
ACQuire  
ACQUISition  
ACTivate  
ACTUal  
ALIas  
ALL  
DC  
ALLEv  
ALLOcate  
AMPlitude  
AND  
APPMenu  
AREa  
ARMed  
ASC  
ASCIi  
DEFAult  
DEFINE  
DELay  
DELAYEd  
DELEte  
DELTa  
DELTATime  
DELWarn  
DESE  
EVQty  
EXECute  
EXTAtten  
EXTDACQ  
EXTDBatten  
EXTINCTPCT  
EXTINCTDB  
FACtory  
CH3  
B–1  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B: Reserved Words  
FALL  
FALSe  
FASTERthan  
FASTframe  
FFT  
HOLDOff  
HOLDTime  
HORizontal  
HPGl  
HPOS1  
HPOS2  
HUNdred  
ID  
MEAS1  
MEAS2  
MEAS3  
MEAS4  
MEASUrement  
MEDian  
MEG  
MESSage  
METHod  
MID  
PARTial  
PASSWord  
PATtern  
PCX  
PCXCOLOR  
PDUty  
PEAKDetect  
PEAKHits  
PERCent  
PERIod  
PERSistence  
PHAse  
PK2pk  
PLUSOne  
POints  
FIELD  
FIELD1  
FIELD2  
FIELDEither  
FIELDRATE  
FIELDS  
FIELDType  
FIFty  
FILEName  
FILESystem  
FILTer  
FIRst  
FITtoscreen  
FLAg  
FLEXformat  
FORCe  
FORMat  
FORWards  
FPAnel  
IMMed  
IMPedance  
INDependent  
INFInite  
INFPersist  
INIT  
MID2  
MINImum  
MINMax  
MINUSOne  
MKDir  
MODe  
MONo  
MORELimit  
MOREThan  
MSB  
NAMe  
NANd  
INPut  
INStavu  
INTENSIFied  
INTENSITy  
INTERLAce  
INTERLeaf  
INVert  
POLarity  
PORT  
PORTRait  
POSition  
POSITION1  
POSITION2  
POSITIVe  
POVershoot  
PREView  
PRInt  
IRE  
LABel  
NDUty  
LANdscape  
LASERJet  
LAYout  
LENgth  
LESSLimit  
LESSThan  
LEVel  
LFRej  
LIMit  
LINE  
LINES  
LINEAr  
LIVe  
LOCk  
LOG  
LOGIc  
LONG  
LOW  
LOWLimit  
LSB  
MAIn  
NEGAtive  
NEGSynchwidth  
NEWpass  
NOISErej  
NONe  
FRAme  
FREE  
PROBE  
FREESpace  
FREQuency  
FULl  
FUNCtion  
GATing  
GLItch  
GND  
PROBECal  
PROCessing  
PT_Fmt  
PT_Off  
PULse  
PWIdth  
RATE1  
RATE2  
RATE3  
NOR  
NORMal  
NOVershoot  
NR_Pt  
NTSc  
GPIb  
NUMACq  
NUMAVg  
NUMEnv  
NUMERic  
NWIdth  
ODD  
GRAticule  
GRAYscale  
GRId  
RATE4  
READFile  
READY  
HALt  
HAMming  
HARDCopy  
HARDFlagging  
HBArs  
HDELTA  
HDR  
HDTv  
HEADer  
HERtz  
HFRej  
HIGH  
HIGHLimit  
HIRes  
RECAll  
OFF  
RECORDLength  
RECORDSNap  
RECORDSTart  
RECTangular  
REF  
REF1  
REF2  
REF3  
REF4  
OFFSET  
OFFSETAdj  
ON  
ONCe  
OR  
OPTion  
OUTside  
OVERAll  
OVERWrite  
PAIred  
PAL  
PALEtte  
PARity  
MAP  
MATH  
MATH1  
MATH2  
MATH3  
MAXimum  
MAXRate  
MEAN  
REFLevel  
REGular  
REJect  
HIStogram  
HISTOMASK  
HITs  
REM  
MEANDBM  
MEANSTddev  
B–2  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B: Reserved Words  
REName  
REPEt  
SEQuence  
SET  
SETHold  
SETLevel  
SETTime  
SETUp  
SHORt  
SHOW  
SINX  
SLEWRate  
SLOpe  
TBposition  
TEKSecure  
TEMPErature  
TEMPLate  
TEXt  
THInkjet  
THReshold  
TIFf  
VOLts  
V1STArttime  
RESET  
RESETAll  
RESUltRI  
RIBinary  
RIGHT1  
RIGHT2  
RIGHT3  
RIGHT4  
RIGHT5  
RISe  
RLE  
RMDir  
RMS  
ROLL  
V1STOptime  
V2STArttime  
V2STOptime  
WAVEform  
WAVEFORMS  
WAVFrm  
WFId  
WFMPre  
WHEn  
WIDth  
WIThin  
WRITEFile  
X
XINcr  
XMUlt  
TIMe  
TIMEOut  
TITLe  
SLOWERthan  
SNAp  
TO  
TOLerance  
TRACk  
TRIGAfter  
TRIGBar  
TRIGger  
TRIGT  
TRUe  
TTL  
TWEnty  
TWOfifty  
TYPe  
SNAPShot  
SOFTFlagging  
SOUrce  
SOURCE1  
SOURCE2  
SPECTral  
SRIbinary  
SRPbinary  
STANdard  
STARt  
RP  
RPBinary  
RS232  
XOFf  
XUNit  
XY  
XZEro  
RUN  
RUNSAfter  
RUNSTop  
RUNT  
Y
YMUlt  
SAMple  
SAVe  
SCAle  
SCAN  
SCANPeriod  
SCROLLBAR  
SCROLLTEXT  
SECAm  
SECdiv  
SECOnds  
SELect  
STATE  
UNITS  
YOFf  
YT  
YUNit  
YZEro  
ZERO  
ZMUlt  
ZOFf  
ZONe  
ZOOm  
STATistics  
STDdev  
STOP  
STOPAfter  
STOPBits  
STORe  
STYle  
SYNc  
SYStem  
TARget  
UNITSTring  
UNLock  
VALue  
VARpersist  
VBArs  
VDELTA  
VECtors  
VERBose  
VERTical  
VIDeo  
ZUNit  
ZZEro  
B–3  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C: Interface Specifications  
This appendix describes details of the GPIB remote interface of the digitizing  
oscilloscope. Normally, you will not need this information to use the digitizing  
oscilloscope, but the information is useful when connecting to controllers of  
unusual configuration.  
GPIB Function Subsets  
The digitizing oscilloscope supports many GPIB function subsets, as listed  
below. Some of the listings describe subsets that the digitizing oscilloscope does  
not support.  
H
SH1 (Source Handshake). The digitizing oscilloscope can transmit multiline  
messages across the GPIB.  
H
H
AH1 (Acceptor Handshake). The digitizing oscilloscope can receive  
multiline messages across the GPIB.  
T5 (Talker). The digitizing oscilloscope becomes a talker when its talk  
address is sent with the ATN (Attention) line asserted. It can send both  
response data and status information when responding to a serial poll. It  
ceases to be a talker when the talk address if another device is sent with ATN  
asserted. The digitizing oscilloscope has talk-only capability for hardcopy  
operation.  
H
L4 (Listener). The digitizing oscilloscope becomes a listener when its listen  
address is sent with the ATN (Attention) line asserted. The digitizing  
oscilloscope does not have listen-only capability.  
H
H
H
SR1 (Service Request). The digitizing oscilloscope asserts an SRQ (Service  
Request) line to notify the controller when it requires service.  
RL1 (Remote/Local). The digitizing oscilloscope responds to both the GTL  
(Go To Local) and LLO (Local Lock Out) interface messages.  
PP0 (Parallel Poll). The digitizing oscilloscope has no parallel poll capabili-  
ty. It does not respond to the following interface messages: PPC, PPD, PPE,  
and PPU. The digitizing oscilloscope does not send out a status message  
when the ATN (Attention) and EOI (End or Identify) lines are asserted  
simultaneously.  
H
DC1 (Device Clear). The digitizing oscilloscope responds to the DCL  
(Device Clear) and, when made a listener, the SDC (Selected Device Clear)  
interface messages.  
C–1  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C: Interface Specifications  
H
DT1 (Device Trigger). When acting as a listener, the digitizing oscilloscope  
responds to the GET (Group Execute Trigger) interface message.  
H
H
C0 (Controller). The digitizing oscilloscope cannot control other devices.  
E2 (Electrical). The digitizing oscilloscope uses tristate buffers to provide  
optimal high-speed data transfer.  
Interface Messages  
Table C–1 shows the standard interface messages that are supported by the  
digitizing oscilloscope.  
Table C–1: TDS Family Oscilloscope Standard  
Interface Message  
Message  
DCL  
GPIB  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
GET  
GTL  
LLO  
PPC  
PPD  
No  
PPE  
No  
PPU  
No  
SDC  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
SPD  
SPE  
TCT  
UNL  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
UNT  
Listen Addresses  
Talk Addresses  
C–2  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D: Factory Initialization Settings  
The factory initialization settings provide you a known state for the digitizing  
oscilloscope.  
Factory initialization sets values as shown in Table D–1.  
Table D–1: Factory Initialization Settings  
Control  
Changed by Factory Init to  
Acquire mode  
Acquire repetitive signal  
Sample  
TDS 400A, 510A, 500C, & 700C: ON  
(Enable ET)  
Acquire stop after  
RUN/STOP button only  
Acquire # of averages  
Acquire # of envelopes  
Channel selection  
16  
10  
Channel 1 on, all others off  
Cursor H Bar 1 position  
10% of graticule height  
(–3.2 divs from the center)  
Cursor H Bar 2 position  
90% of the graticule height  
(+3.2 divs from the center)  
Cursor V Bar 1 position  
Cursor V Bar 2 position  
Cursor amplitude units  
Cursor function  
10% of the record length  
90% of the record length  
Base  
Off  
Cursor mode  
Independent  
Seconds  
Cursor time units  
Date and time  
No change  
Delay events,  
triggerable after main  
TDS 400A: 1  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C: 2  
Delay time,  
delayed runs after main  
TDS 400A: 10 ns  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C: 16 ns  
Delay time,  
delayed triggerable after main  
TDS 400A: 60 ns  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C: 16 ns  
Delay trigger average #  
Delay trigger envelope #  
Delayed, delay by ...  
16  
10  
Delay by Time  
D–1  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D: Factory Initialization Settings  
Table D–1: Factory Initialization Settings (Cont.)  
Control  
Changed by Factory Init to  
Delayed edge trigger coupling  
(TDS 400A only)  
DC  
Main Trigger  
Delayed edge trigger level  
Delayed edge trigger slope  
Delayed edge trigger source  
Delayed, time base mode  
Deskew, Channel/Probe  
Display clock  
0 V  
Rising  
Channel 1  
Delayed Runs After Main  
0 seconds  
No Change  
Display color – collision contrast  
TDS 644B, 684B, & 700C:  
Off  
Display color – map math colors  
Display color – map reference colors  
Display color – palette  
TDS 644B, 684B, & 700C:  
Color ‘Math’  
TDS 644B, 684B, & 700C:  
Color ‘Ref’  
TDS 644B, 684B, & 700C:  
Normal  
Display color – palette colors  
TDS 644B, 684B, & 700C:  
The colors of each palette are reset to factory  
hue, saturation, and lightness (HLS) values  
Display color – persistence palette  
TDS 644B, 684B, & 700C:  
Temperature  
Display format  
YT  
Display graticule type  
Display instavu persistence  
Display instavu style  
Full  
TDS 500C & 700C: Varpersist  
TDS 500C & 700C: Vectors  
TDS 500C & 700C: 500 e–3  
Display instavu varpersist  
Display intensity – contrast  
TDS 400A, 500C, 620B, & 680B: 175%  
TDS 510A: 150%  
Display intensity – overall  
Display intensity – text  
TDS 400A, 510A, 500C, 620B, & 680A: 85%  
TDS 644B, 684B, & 700C: 100%  
TDS 400A, 510A, 500C, 620B, & 680B: 60%  
Display intensity – waveform  
TDS 644B, 684B, & 700C: 100%  
TDS 400A, 510A, 500C, 620B, & 680B: 75%  
Display interpolation filter  
Display mode  
Sin(x)/x  
Normal  
Vectors  
Display style  
D–2  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D: Factory Initialization Settings  
Table D–1: Factory Initialization Settings (Cont.)  
Control  
Changed by Factory Init to  
Display trigger bar style  
Display trigger “T”  
Display variable persistence  
Edge trigger coupling  
Edge trigger level  
Edge trigger slope  
Edge trigger source  
GPIB parameters  
Short  
On  
500 ms  
DC  
0.0 V  
Rising  
Channel 1  
No change  
Hardcopy Format  
Layout  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Palette  
Port  
Horizontal – delay time/division  
Horizontal – delay trigger position  
Horizontal – delay trigger record length  
Horizontal – FastFrame  
50 ms  
50%  
500 points (10 divs)  
TDS 500C & 700C: Off  
TDS 500C & 700C: 2  
500  
Horizontal – FastFrame, frame count  
Horizontal – FastFrame, frame length  
Horizontal – fit to screen  
Off  
Horizontal – main time/division  
Horizontal – main trigger position  
Horizontal – main trigger record length  
Horizontal – time base  
500 ms  
50%  
500 points (10 divs)  
Main only  
Limit template  
±V Limit  
±H Limit  
40 mdiv  
40 mdiv  
Limit template destination  
Limit template source  
Limit test sources  
Ref1  
Ch1  
Ch1 compared to Ref1;  
all others compared to none.  
Limit testing  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Limit testing – hardcopy if condition met  
Limit testing – ring bell if condition met  
Logic pattern trigger Ch4 (Ax2) input  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C:  
X (do not care)  
Logic state trigger Ch4 (Ax2) input  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C: Rising edge  
D–3  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D: Factory Initialization Settings  
Table D–1: Factory Initialization Settings (Cont.)  
Control  
Changed by Factory Init to  
Logic trigger class  
TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C: Pattern  
Logic trigger input  
(pattern and state)  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C:  
Channel 1 = H (high),  
Channels 2 & 3 (Ax1) = X (do not care)  
Logic trigger logic  
(pattern and state)  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C: AND  
Logic trigger pattern time qualification  
Lower limit  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B, & 700C:  
5 ns  
5 ns  
Upper limit  
Logic trigger Setup/Hold times  
Setup  
Hold  
TDS 500C, 600B & 700C: 3 ns  
TDS 500C, 600B & 700C: 2 ns  
Logic trigger sources and levels  
(Setup/Hold)  
TDS 500C, 600B & 700C:  
Data Source = Channel 1 = 1.4 V  
Clock Source = Channel 2 = 1.4 V  
(Source levels are clipped to 1.2 V at the  
default volts/division setting established by  
Factory Init)  
Clock Edge = Rising  
Logic trigger threshold (all channels) (pattern  
and state)  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C: 1.4 V  
(clipped to 1.2 V at the default volts/division  
setting when no 10X probe attached)  
Logic trigger triggers when ...  
(pattern and state)  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C:  
Goes TRUE  
Main trigger mode  
Main trigger type  
Auto  
Edge  
Math1 definition  
Ch 1 + Ch 2  
Math1 extended processing  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C:  
No extended processing  
Math2 definition  
Ch 1 – Ch 2 (FFT of Ch 1 for instruments with  
Option 2F Advanced DSP Math)  
Math2 extended processing  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C:  
No extended processing  
Math3 definition  
Inv of Ch 1  
Math3 extended processing  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C:  
No extended processing  
Measure delay edges  
Measure delay to  
Both rising and forward searching  
Channel 1 (Ch1)  
D–4  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D: Factory Initialization Settings  
Table D–1: Factory Initialization Settings (Cont.)  
Control  
Changed by Factory Init to  
Off  
Measure gating  
Measure high ref  
Measure high-low setup  
Measure low ref  
Measure mid ref  
Measure mid2 ref  
Pulse glitch filter state  
90% and 0 V (units)  
Histogram  
10% and 0 V (units)  
50% and 0 V (units)  
50% and 0 V (units)  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C: On  
(Accept glitch)  
Pulse glitch trigger polarity  
Pulse glitch width  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C: Positive  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C: 2.0 ns  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C: 1.2 V  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C: 0.8 V  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C: Positive  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C: Occurs  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C: 2.0 ns  
2.0 ns  
Pulse runt high threshold  
Pulse runt low threshold  
Pulse runt trigger polarity  
Pulse runt triggers when ...  
Pulse runt width  
Pulse slew rate delta time  
Pulse slew rate polarity  
Positive  
Pulse slew rate thresholds  
Trig if faster than  
1.80 V  
Upper  
Lower  
800 mV  
Pulse slew rate triggers when ...  
Pulse timeout polarity  
Pulse timeout time  
Trig if faster than  
TDS 500C & 600B: Either  
TDS 500C & 600B: 2.0 ns  
Pulse trigger class  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C: Glitch  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C: 0.0 V  
Pulse trigger level  
Pulse trigger source  
(Glitch, runt, and width, and timeout)  
TDS 500C, 600B, & 700C:  
Channel 1 (Ch1)  
Pulse width lower limit  
Pulse width trigger polarity  
Pulse width trigger when  
Pulse width upper limit  
Repetitive signal  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C: 2.0 ns  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C: Positive  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C: Within limits  
TDS 510A, 500C, 600B & 700C: 2.0 ns  
TDS 500C & 700C: On  
RS-232 parameters  
Saved setups  
No change  
No change  
D–5  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D: Factory Initialization Settings  
Table D–1: Factory Initialization Settings (Cont.)  
Control  
Changed by Factory Init to  
Saved waveforms  
Stop after  
No change  
R/S button  
Full  
Vertical bandwidth (all channels)  
Vertical coupling (all channels)  
DC  
Vertical impedance (termination) (all channels) 1 MW  
Vertical offset (all channels)  
Vertical position (all channels)  
Vertical volts per division (all channels)  
Zoom dual  
0 V  
0 divs.  
100 mV per division  
TDS 400A, 500C, 600B, & 700C: Off  
Zoom dual offset  
TDS 400A, 500C, 600B, & 700C: Minimum  
available  
Zoom, dual window, selected graticule  
Zoom graticule  
TDS 400A, 500C, 600B, & 700C: Upper  
Upper  
Zoom horizontal (all channels)  
TDS 510A: 1.0X  
TDS 400A, 500C, 600B, 700C: 2.0X  
Zoom horizontal lock  
All  
Zoom horizontal position (all channels)  
Zoom mode  
50% = 0.5 (the middle of the display)  
Off  
Zoom vertical (all channels)  
TDS 510A: 1.0X  
TDS 400A, 500C, 600B, 700C: 2.0X  
Zoom vertical position (all channels)  
0 divisions  
D–6  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
ASCII  
Acronym for the American Standard Code for Information Interchange.  
Controllers transmit commands to the digitizing oscilloscope using ASCII  
character encoding.  
Address  
A 7-bit code that identifies an instrument on the communication bus. The  
digitizing oscilloscope must have a unique address for the controller to  
recognize and transmit commands to it.  
Backus-Naur Form (BNF)  
A standard notation system for command syntax diagrams. The syntax  
diagrams in this manual use BNF notation.  
Controller  
A computer or other device that sends commands to and accepts responses  
from the digitizing oscilloscope.  
EOI  
A mnemonic referring to the control line “End or Identify” on the GPIB  
interface bus. One of the two possible end-of-message terminators.  
EOM  
A generic acronym referring to the end-of-message terminator. The  
end-of-message terminator can be either an EOI or the ASCII code for line  
feed (LF).  
Equivalent-time sampling (ET)  
A sampling mode in which the oscilloscope acquires signals over many  
repetitions of the event. The TDS Family Series Digitizing Oscilloscopes use  
a type of equivalent time sampling called random equivalent time sampling.  
It utilizes an internal clock that runs asynchronously with respect to the input  
signal and the signal trigger. The oscilloscope takes samples continuously,  
independent of the trigger position, and displays them based on the time  
difference between the sample and the trigger. Although the samples are  
taken sequentially in time, they are random with respect to the trigger.  
Extended–acquisition–length mode  
An acquisition mode with which the oscilloscope can acquire signals of 2M,  
4M, and 8M while maintaining waveform lengths limited to 500K. In other  
words, the acquisition data for a channel may be bigger than a waveform,  
Then, after the data is acquired, you can move to and display any portion of  
the data.  
Glossary–1  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Real-time sampling  
A sampling mode where the digitizing oscilloscope samples fast enough to  
completely fill a waveform record from a single trigger event. Use real-time  
sampling to capture single-shot or transient events.  
GPIB  
Acronym for General Purpose Interface Bus, the common name for the  
communications interface system defined in IEEE Std 488.  
IEEE  
Acronym for the Institute for Electrical and Electronic Engineers.  
QuickBASIC  
A computer language (distributed by Microsoft) that is based on the  
Beginner’s All-Purpose Symbolic Instruction Code.  
QuickC  
A computer language (distributed by Microsoft) that is based on C.  
TEKSecure  
A Tektronix custom command that initializes both waveform and setup  
memories. This overwrites any previously stored data.  
Glossary–2  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Application menu commands  
APPMENU, 2–63  
Numbers  
2 + 2 channel operation, viii  
APPMENU:LABEL, 2–64  
APPMENU:LABEL:BOTTOM, 2–65  
APPMENU:LABEL:RIGHT, 2–66  
APPMENU:LABEL:TITLE, 2–66  
APPMENU, 2–63  
APPMENU:LABEL, 2–64  
APPMENU:LABEL:BOTTOM, 2–65  
APPMENU:LABEL:RIGHT, 2–66  
APPMENU:LABEL:TITLE, 2–66  
Argument, command, 2–2  
ASCII, 2–1, Glossary–1  
A
Abbreviating, command, 2–4  
ACQUIRE?, 2–47  
ACQUIRE:AUTOSAVE, 2–47  
ACQUIRE:MODE, 2–48  
ACQUIRE:NUMACQ?, 2–50  
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG, 2–51  
ACQUIRE:NUMENV, 2–52  
ACQUIRE:REPET, 2–53  
ACQUIRE:STATE, 2–54  
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER, 2–55  
Acquisition command group, 2–13, 2–14  
Acquisition commands  
Audio indicator, 2–68  
AUTOSET, 2–67  
B
ACQUIRE?, 2–47  
Backus-Naur Form, 2–1  
Definition of, Glossary–1  
BELL, 2–68  
Block, command argument, 2–9  
BNF, Glossary–1  
BNF (Backus-Naur form), 2–1  
Break, 2–4  
BUSY?, 2–68  
ACQUIRE:AUTOSAVE, 2–47  
ACQUIRE:MODE, 2–48  
ACQUIRE:NUMACQ?, 2–50  
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG, 2–51  
ACQUIRE:NUMENV, 2–52  
ACQUIRE:REPET, 2–53  
ACQUIRE:STATE, 2–54  
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER, 2–55  
Address, Definition of, Glossary–1  
ALIAS, 2–56  
C
Alias commands  
*CAL?, 2–69  
ALIAS, 2–56  
ALIAS:CATALOG?, 2–57  
ALIAS:DEFINE, 2–57  
Calibration and diagnostic command group, 2–15  
Calibration and diagnostic commands  
*CAL?, 2–69  
ALIAS:DELETE, 2–58  
DIAG:RESULT:FLAG?, 2–109  
DIAG:RESULT:LOG?, 2–109  
DIAG:SELECT:ACQUISITION, 2–110  
DIAG:SELECT:ALL, 2–110  
DIAG:SELECT:CPU, 2–111  
DIAG:SELECT:DISPLAY, 2–111  
DIAG:SELECT:FPANEL, 2–111  
DIAG:STATE, 2–112  
ALIAS:DELETE:ALL, 2–59  
ALIAS:DELETE:NAME, 2–59  
ALIAS:STATE, 2–59  
ALIAS:CATALOG?, 2–57  
ALIAS:DEFINE, 2–57  
ALIAS:DELETE, 2–58  
ALIAS:DELETE:ALL, 2–59  
ALIAS:DELETE:NAME, 2–59  
ALIAS:STATE, 2–59  
ALLEV?, 2–60  
ALLOCATE?, 2–61  
ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM?, 2–61  
ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:FREE?, 2–62  
ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:REF<x>, 2–62  
Application menu command group, 2–14  
CH<x>?, 2–69  
CH<x>:BANDWIDTH, 2–70  
CH<x>:COUPLING, 2–71  
CH<x>:DESKEW, 2–72  
CH<x>:IMPEDANCE, 2–72  
CH<x>:OFFSET, 2–73  
CH<x>:POSITION, 2–74  
Index–1  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
CH<x>:PROBE?, 2–75  
CH<x>:PROBECAL?, 2–75  
CH<x>:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN, 2–76  
CH<x>:PROBEFUNC:EXTDBATTEN, 2–76  
CH<x>:SCALE, 2–77  
CH<x>:VOLTS, 2–78  
Channel, command mnemonic, 2–7  
CH<x>, command mnemonic, 2–7  
Clear Status, 2–79  
CLEARMENU, 2–78  
*CLS, 2–79  
Cursor position, 2–6  
Math waveform, 2–7  
MATH<x>, 2–7  
Measurement specifier, 2–7  
MEAS<x>, 2–7  
POSITION<x>, 2–6  
Reference waveform, 2–7  
REF<x>, 2–7  
Waveform, 2–7  
<wfm>, 2–7  
Command syntax, 2–1  
Command  
BNF (Backus-Naur form), 2–1  
Commands, 1–1  
Abbreviating, 2–4  
Argument, 2–2  
Parts of, 1–1  
Block argument, 2–9  
Common, 2–26, 2–28  
Concatenating, 2–4  
Header, 2–2  
Syntax diagrams, 1–1  
Common command, 2–26, 2–28  
Common GPIB commands  
*CAL?, 2–69  
Message, 2–2  
*CLS, 2–79  
Mnemonic, 2–2  
Query, 2–1  
Rules for forming, 2–1  
Separator, 2–2  
Set, 2–1  
Communication trigger, 2–273, 2–274, 2–275, 2–276,  
2–277, 2–279, 2–280, 2–322  
Concatenating, command, 2–4  
Configuration, Command query, 2–180  
Controller, Definition of, Glossary–1  
Cursor command group, 2–15  
Cursor commands  
Syntax, 2–1  
BNF (Backus-Naur form), 2–1  
Command argument  
Numeric, 2–8  
Quoted string, 2–8  
Command Descriptions, 1–1  
Command group  
CURSOR?, 2–79  
CURSOR:FUNCTION, 2–80  
CURSOR:HBARS?, 2–80  
CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA?, 2–81  
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION<x>, 2–81  
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION<x>PCNT, 2–82  
CURSOR:HBARS:SELECT, 2–83  
CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS, 2–83  
CURSOR:MODE, 2–84  
Acquisition, 2–13, 2–14  
Application menu, 2–14  
Calibration and diagnostic, 2–15  
Cursor, 2–15  
Display, 2–16  
CURSOR:PAIRED, 2–85  
File system, 2–18  
Hardcopy, 2–19  
Horizontal, 2–20  
Limit test, 2–22  
Measurement, 2–24  
Miscellaneous, 2–26  
RS-232, 2–23, 2–27  
Save and recall, 2–28  
Status and error, 2–28  
Trigger, 2–29  
CURSOR:PAIRED:HDELTA, 2–85  
CURSOR:PAIRED:HPOS1, 2–86  
CURSOR:PAIRED:HPOS2, 2–86  
CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION<x>, 2–87  
CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION<x>PCNT, 2–87  
CURSOR:PAIRED:SELECT, 2–88  
CURSOR:PAIRED:UNITS, 2–89  
CURSOR:PAIRED:VDELTA, 2–89  
CURSOR:VBARS, 2–90  
CURSOR:VBARS:DELTA?, 2–91  
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION<x>, 2–91  
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION<x>PCNT, 2–92  
CURSOR:VBARS:SELECT, 2–93  
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS, 2–94  
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITSTring, 2–95  
Cursor position, command mnemonic, 2–6  
CURSOR?, 2–79  
Vertical, 2–37  
Waveform, 2–38  
Zoom, 2–45  
Command Groups, 1–1  
Command mnemonic  
Channel, 2–7  
CH<x>, 2–7  
Index–2  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
CURSOR:FUNCTION, 2–80  
CURSOR:HBARS?, 2–80  
DIAG:SELECT:DISPLAY, 2–111  
DIAG:SELECT:FPANEL, 2–111  
DIAG:STATE, 2–112  
CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA?, 2–81  
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION<x>, 2–81  
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION<x>PCNT, 2–82  
CURSOR:HBARS:SELECT, 2–83  
CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS, 2–83  
CURSOR:MODE, 2–84  
Diagram, syntax, 2–10  
Disks included with this manual, 1–2  
Display command group, 2–16  
Display commands  
CLEARMENU, 2–78  
CURSOR:PAIRED, 2–85  
DISPLAY?, 2–113  
CURSOR:PAIRED:HDELTA, 2–85  
CURSOR:PAIRED:HPOS1, 2–86  
CURSOR:PAIRED:HPOS2, 2–86  
CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION<x>, 2–87  
CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION<x>PCNT, 2–87  
CURSOR:PAIRED:SELECT, 2–88  
CURSOR:PAIRED:UNITS, 2–89  
CURSOR:PAIRED:VDELTA, 2–89  
CURSOR:VBARS, 2–90  
DISPLAY:CLOCK, 2–113  
DISPLAY:COLOR:CONTRAST, 2–114  
DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:item name:TO, 2–116  
DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:item:BYCONTENTS,  
2–115  
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:palette name:item  
name, 2–119  
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:palette name:RESET,  
2–118  
CURSOR:VBARS:DELTA?, 2–91  
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION<x>, 2–91  
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION<x>PCNT, 2–92  
CURSOR:VBARS:SELECT, 2–93  
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS, 2–94  
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITSTring, 2–95  
CURVE, 2–96  
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:PERSISTENCE,  
2–117  
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:REGULAR, 2–117  
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:RESETALL, 2–118  
DISPLAY:DATE/TIME. See DISPLAY:CLOCK  
DISPLAY:FILTER, 2–121  
DISPLAY:FORMAT, 2–122  
DISPLAY:GRATICULE, 2–123  
DISPLAY:INSTAVU:PERSISTENCE, 2–124  
DISPLAY:INSTAVU:STYLE, 2–125  
DISPLAY:INSTAVU:VARPERSIST, 2–125  
DISPLAY:INTENSITY?, 2–126  
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:CONTRAST, 2–126  
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:OVERALL, 2–127  
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:TEXT, 2–128  
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM, 2–128  
DISPLAY:MODE, 2–129  
DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE, 2–129  
DISPLAY:STYLE, 2–130  
DISPLAY:TRIGBAR, 2–131  
DISPLAY:TRIGT, 2–132  
MESSAGE, 2–239  
D
DATA, 2–97  
DATA:DESTINATION, 2–99  
DATA:ENCDG, 2–99  
DATA:SOURCE, 2–101  
DATA:START, 2–102  
DATA:STOP, 2–103  
DATA:TARGET, 2–104  
DATA:WIDTH, 2–104  
DATE, 2–105  
DCL, C–2  
*DDT, 2–106  
Default Model(s), viii  
Delayed trigger, 2–265, 2–266, 2–267, 2–268, 2–269,  
MESSAGE:BOX, 2–240  
MESSAGE:SHOW, 2–241  
MESSAGE:STATE, 2–242  
2–270, 2–271, 2–272  
DELETE:SETUP, 2–106  
DELETE:WAVEFORM, 2–107  
DESE command, 2–108, 3–3  
DESER register, 2–108, 2–246, 3–3  
Device Clear, 2–4, C–2  
DIAG:RESULT:FLAG?, 2–109  
DIAG:RESULT:LOG?, 2–109  
DIAG:SELECT:ACQUISITION, 2–110  
DIAG:SELECT:ALL, 2–110  
DIAG:SELECT:CPU, 2–111  
DISPLAY?, 2–113  
DISPLAY:CLOCK, 2–113  
DISPLAY:COLOR:CONTRAST, 2–114  
DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:item name:TO, 2–116  
DISPLAY:COLOR:MAP:item:BYCONTENTS, 2–115  
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:palette name:item name,  
2–119  
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:palette name:RESET,  
2–118  
Index–3  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:PERSISTENCE, 2–117  
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:REGULAR, 2–117  
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:RESETALL, 2–118  
DISPLAY:DATE/TIME. See DISPLAY:CLOCK  
DISPLAY:FILTER, 2–121  
FILESYSTEM:COPY, 2–137  
FILESYSTEM:CWD, 2–138  
FILESYSTEM:DELETE, 2–138  
FILESYSTEM:DELWARN, 2–139  
FILESYSTEM:DIR, 2–140  
DISPLAY:FORMAT, 2–122  
DISPLAY:GRATICULE, 2–123  
FILESYSTEM:FORMAT, 2–140  
FILESYSTEM:FREESPACE, 2–141  
FILESYSTEM:MKDIR, 2–141  
FILESYSTEM:OVERWRITE, 2–142  
FILESYSTEM:PRINT, 2–142  
FILESYSTEM:READFILE, 2–143  
FILESYSTEM:RENAME, 2–144  
FILESYSTEM:RMDIR, 2–144  
FILESYSTEM:WRITEFILE, 2–145  
FILESYSTEM:COPY, 2–137  
DISPLAY:INSTAVU:PERSISTENCE, 2–124  
DISPLAY:INSTAVU:STYLE, 2–125  
DISPLAY:INSTAVU:VARPERSIST, 2–125  
DISPLAY:INTENSITY?, 2–126  
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:CONTRAST, 2–126  
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:OVERALL, 2–127  
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:TEXT, 2–128  
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM, 2–128  
DISPLAY:MODE, 2–129  
FILESYSTEM:CWD, 2–138  
DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE, 2–129  
DISPLAY:STYLE, 2–130  
DISPLAY:TRIGBAR, 2–131  
FILESYSTEM:DELETE, 2–138  
FILESYSTEM:DELWARN, 2–139  
FILESYSTEM:DIR, 2–140  
DISPLAY:TRIGT, 2–132  
FILESYSTEM:FORMAT, 2–140  
FILESYSTEM:FREESPACE, 2–141  
FILESYSTEM:MKDIR, 2–141  
FILESYSTEM:OVERWRITE, 2–142  
FILESYSTEM:PRINT, 2–142  
FILESYSTEM:READFILE, 2–143  
FILESYSTEM:RENAME, 2–144  
FILESYSTEM:RMDIR, 2–144  
FILESYSTEM:WRITEFILE, 2–145  
FITTOSCREEN, 2–171  
E
Edge trigger, 2–282, 2–283, 2–284, 2–322  
End or Identify, Glossary–1  
EOI, Glossary–1  
EOM, Glossary–1  
EOM (end of message), 2–6  
Equivalent-time sampling, random, Glossary–1  
Error message, programming interface, 3–12  
Error messages, 1–2  
G
*ESE, 2–132, 3–3  
ESER register, 2–132, 2–246, 3–3  
*ESR?, 2–133  
*ESR? query, 3–1  
GET, C–2  
Glitch trigger, 2–304, 2–305, 2–306, 2–307  
Go to local, C–2  
Event handling, 3–1, 3–6  
Event query, 2–134  
Event queue, 2–134, 3–5  
EVENT?, 2–134  
EVMSG?, 2–134  
EVQTY?, 2–135  
GPIB, Glossary–2  
Configurations, 1–4  
Connection rules, 1–4  
EOM (end of message), 2–6  
Function subsets, C–1  
Group execute trigger, C–2  
GTL, C–2  
Example programs, 1–2  
On disk, 1–2  
Extended–Acquisition–Length mode, 2–41, Glossary–1  
H
HARDCOPY, 2–146  
Hardcopy command group, 2–19  
Hardcopy commands  
F
FACTORY, 2–136  
Factory initialization settings, D–1–D–6  
FASTFRAME, 2–168, 2–169, 2–170  
File system command group, 2–18  
File system commands  
HARDCOPY, 2–146  
HARDCOPY:FILENAME, 2–147  
HARDCOPY:FORMAT, 2–148  
HARDCOPY:LAYOUT, 2–151  
Index–4  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
HARDCOPY:PALETTE, 2–151  
HARDCOPY:PORT, 2–152  
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE, 2–172  
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SECDIV, 2–173  
HORIZONTAL:MODE, 2–173  
HORIZONTAL:POSITION, 2–174  
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH, 2–175  
HORIZONTAL:RECORDSTART, 2–176  
HORIZONTAL:ROLL, 2–177  
HARDCOPY:FILENAME, 2–147  
HARDCOPY:FORMAT, 2–148  
HARDCOPY:LAYOUT, 2–151  
HARDCOPY:PALETTE, 2–151  
HARDCOPY:PORT, 2–152  
HDR, 2–153  
HORIZONTAL:SCALE, 2–178  
HEADER, 2–153  
HORIZONTAL:SECDIV, 2–178  
Header  
HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER?, 2–178  
HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER:POSITION, 2–179  
HORIZONTAL?, 2–160  
HORIZONTAL:ACQDURATION?, 2–160  
HORIZONTAL:ACQLENGTH?, 2–161  
HORIZONTAL:CLOCK, 2–161  
Command, 2–2, 2–153  
Included in query response, 2–153, 2–344  
Histogram commands  
HISTOGRAM?, 2–154  
HISTOGRAM:BOX, 2–155  
HISTOGRAM:BOXPCNT, 2–156  
HISTOGRAM:COUNT, 2–157  
HISTOGRAM:DISPLAY, 2–157  
HISTOGRAM:MODE, 2–158  
HISTOGRAM:SIZE, 2–159  
HORIZONTAL:CLOCK:MAXRATE, 2–162  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY?, 2–163  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE, 2–163  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE, 2–164  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SECDIV, 2–165  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME, 2–165  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME?, 2–166  
HISTOGRAM:SOURCE, 2–159  
HISTOGRAM?, 2–154  
HISTOGRAM:BOX, 2–155  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:RUNSAFTER, 2–166  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:TRIGAFTER, 2–167  
HORIZONTAL:EXTDACQ, 2–168  
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT, 2–168  
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:LENGTH, 2–169  
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:POSITION, 2–169  
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE, 2–170  
HORIZONTAL:FITTOSCREEN, 2–171  
HORIZONTAL:MAIN?, 2–172  
HISTOGRAM:BOXPCNT, 2–156  
HISTOGRAM:COUNT, 2–157  
HISTOGRAM:DISPLAY, 2–157  
HISTOGRAM:MODE, 2–158  
HISTOGRAM:SIZE, 2–159  
HISTOGRAM:SOURCE, 2–159  
Horizontal command group, 2–20  
Horizontal commands  
HORIZONTAL?, 2–160  
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE, 2–172  
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SECDIV, 2–173  
HORIZONTAL:MODE, 2–173  
HORIZONTAL:ACQDURATION?, 2–160  
HORIZONTAL:ACQLENGTH?, 2–161  
HORIZONTAL:CLOCK, 2–161  
HORIZONTAL:CLOCK:MAXRATE, 2–162  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY?, 2–163  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE, 2–163  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SCALE, 2–164  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:SECDIV, 2–165  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME, 2–165  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME?, 2–166  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:RUNSAFTER,  
2–166  
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME:TRIGAFTER, 2–167  
HORIZONTAL:EXTDACQ, 2–168  
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT, 2–168  
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:LENGTH, 2–169  
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:POSITION, 2–169  
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE, 2–170  
HORIZONTAL:FITTOSCREEN, 2–171  
HORIZONTAL:MAIN?, 2–172  
HORIZONTAL:POSITION, 2–174  
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH, 2–175  
HORIZONTAL:RECORDSTART, 2–176  
HORIZONTAL:ROLL, 2–177  
HORIZONTAL:SCALE, 2–178  
HORIZONTAL:SECDIV, 2–178  
HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER?, 2–178  
HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER:POSITION, 2–179  
I
ID?, 2–180  
*IDN?, 2–180  
IEEE, Glossary–2  
IEEE Std 488.2-1987, 1–3, 2–1, 2–26, 2–28  
Instrument setup, 1–3  
Interface message, C–2  
Index–5  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
MASK:MASK<n>:POINTS, 2–198  
MASK:MASK<n>COUNt?, 2–197  
MASK:MASK<n>NR_PT?, 2–197  
MASK:SOURCE, 2–200  
L
Limit test command group, 2–22  
Limit Test commands  
LIMIT:BELL, 2–181  
MASK:STANDARD, 2–200  
LIMIT:COMPARE:CH<x>, 2–181  
LIMIT:COMPARE:MATH<x>, 2–182  
LIMIT:HARDCOPY, 2–183  
LIMIT:STATE, 2–184  
LIMIT:TEMPLATE, 2–185  
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:DESTINATION, 2–185  
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:SOURCE, 2–186  
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE: VERTICAL,  
2–188  
MASK:TBPOSITION, 2–204  
MASK?, 2–190  
MASK:AUTOSET:MODE, 2–191  
MASK:AUTOSET:OFFSETADJ, 2–191  
MASK:COUNT, 2–192  
MASK:COUNT:STATE, 2–193  
MASK:COUNT:TOTAL, 2–193  
MASK:COUNT:WAVEFORMS, 2–194  
MASK:DISPLAY. See DISPLAY:CLOCK  
MASK:FILTER, 2–195  
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE:HORIZONTAL,  
MASK:MASK<n>, 2–196  
2–187  
MASK:MASK<n> POINTSPcnt, 2–199  
MASK:MASK<n>?, 2–196  
MASK:MASK<n>:POINTS, 2–198  
MASK:MASK<n>COUNt?, 2–197  
MASK:MASK<n>NR_PT?, 2–197  
MASK:SOURCE, 2–200  
MASK:STANDARD, 2–200  
MASK:TBPOSITION, 2–204  
Math waveform, command mnemonic, 2–7  
MATH<x>?, 2–204  
MATH<x>:DEFINE, 2–205  
LIMIT:BELL, 2–181  
LIMIT:COMPARE:CH<X>, 2–181  
LIMIT:COMPARE:MATH<X>, 2–182  
LIMIT:HARDCOPY, 2–183  
LIMIT:STATE, 2–184  
LIMIT:TEMPLATE, 2–185  
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:DESTINATION, 2–185  
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:SOURCE, 2–186  
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE: VERTICAL,  
2–188  
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE:HORIZONTAL,  
MATH<x>:NUMAVg, 2–206  
2–187  
MATH<x>:PROCessing, 2–207  
MATH<x>, command mnemonic, 2–7  
Measurement command group, 2–24  
Measurement commands  
LLO, C–2  
Local lock out, C–2  
LOCK, 2–188  
Logic trigger, 2–289, 2–290, 2–291, 2–292, 2–293,  
2–294, 2–295, 2–296, 2–297, 2–298, 2–299,  
2–300, 2–301, 2–302, 2–322  
*LRN?, 2–189  
MEASUREMENT?, 2–208  
MEASUREMENT:CLEARSNAPSHOT, 2–208  
MEASUREMENT:GATING, 2–209  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED?, 2–210  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY?, 2–210  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION,  
2–210  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1, 2–211  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE2, 2–212  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1, 2–213  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2, 2–214  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE, 2–214  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:UNITS?, 2–218  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?, 2–218  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>?, 2–219  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY?, 2–219  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:DIREC-  
TION?, 2–220  
M
Manual trigger, Simulation with command, 2–342  
Mask commands  
MASK?, 2–190  
MASK:AUTOSET:MODE, 2–191  
MASK:AUTOSET:OFFSETADJ, 2–191  
MASK:COUNT, 2–192  
MASK:COUNT:STATE, 2–193  
MASK:COUNT:TOTAL, 2–193  
MASK:COUNT:WAVEFORMS, 2–194  
MASK:DISPLAY. See DISPLAY:CLOCK  
MASK:FILTER, 2–195  
MASK:MASK<n>, 2–196  
MASK:MASK<n> POINTSPcnt, 2–199  
MASK:MASK<n>?, 2–196  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:EDGE1,  
2–221  
Index–6  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:EDGE2,  
2–221  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?, 2–218  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>?, 2–219  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY?, 2–219  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:SOURCE1,  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:DIRECTION?,  
2–224  
2–220  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:SOURCE2,  
2–224  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:EDGE1, 2–221  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:EDGE2, 2–221  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:SOURCE1,  
2–224  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: STATE, 2–225  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: TYPE, 2–226  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: UNITS?, 2–230  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: VALUES?, 2–230  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:COUNT?, 2–219  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:MAXIMUM?, 2–222  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:MEAN?, 2–223  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:MIN?, 2–223  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:STDDEV?, 2–226  
MEASUREMENT:METHOD, 2–231  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL?, 2–231  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL: ABSO-  
LUTE:HIGH, 2–232  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: DELAY:SOURCE2,  
2–224  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: STATE, 2–225  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: TYPE, 2–226  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: UNITS?, 2–230  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>: VALUES?, 2–230  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:COUNT?, 2–219  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:MAXIMUM?, 2–222  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:MEAN?, 2–223  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:MIN?, 2–223  
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:STDDEV?, 2–226  
MEASUREMENT:METHOD, 2–231  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL?, 2–231  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH,  
2–232  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL: ABSOLUTE:MID,  
2–233  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL: ABSO-  
LUTE:MID2, 2–234  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL: METHOD, 2–234  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL: PERCENT:HIGH,  
2–235  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW,  
2–232  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID,  
2–233  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL: PERCENT:LOW,  
2–236  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2,  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL: PERCENT:MID,  
2–236  
2–234  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD, 2–234  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH,  
2–235  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL: PERCENT:MID2,  
2–237  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW,  
2–232  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW,  
2–236  
MEASUREMENT:SNAPSHOT, 2–238  
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE, 2–238  
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:WEIGHTING,  
2–239  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID,  
2–236  
MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2,  
2–237  
Measurement specifier, command mnemonic, 2–7  
MEASUREMENT?, 2–208  
MEASUREMENT:SNAPSHOT, 2–238  
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE, 2–238  
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:WEIGHTING, 2–239  
MEAS<x>, command mnemonic, 2–7  
MESSAGE, 2–239  
MEASUREMENT:CLEARSNAPSHOT, 2–208  
MEASUREMENT:GATING, 2–209  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED?, 2–210  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY?, 2–210  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION,  
2–210  
Message  
Command, 2–2  
Command terminator, 2–6  
Handling, 3–1  
Table of program messages, 3–12  
MESSAGE:BOX, 2–240  
MESSAGE:SHOW, 2–241  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1, 2–211  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE2, 2–212  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1, 2–213  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2, 2–214  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE, 2–214  
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:UNITS?, 2–218  
MESSAGE:STATE, 2–242  
Index–7  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Messages, Status and error, 1–2  
Miscellaneous, LOCK, 2–188  
Miscellaneous command group, 2–26  
Miscellaneous commands  
AUTOSET, 2–67  
PPU, C–2  
Programming Examples, 1–2, 4–1  
*PSC, 2–246  
*PSC command, 3–4  
*PUD, 2–246  
BELL, 2–68  
DATE, 2–105  
*DDT, 2–106  
FACTORY, 2–136  
HDR, 2–153  
Pulse trigger, 2–303, 2–304, 2–305, 2–306, 2–307,  
2–308, 2–309, 2–310, 2–311, 2–312, 2–313, 2–314,  
2–315, 2–316, 2–317, 2–318, 2–319, 2–320,  
2–321, 2–322  
HEADER, 2–153  
*IDN?, 2–180  
*LRN?, 2–189  
Q
Query, Header in query response, 2–153, 2–344  
Query command, 2–1  
Queue  
Event, 3–5  
Output, 3–5  
QuickBASIC, 4–1, Glossary–2  
QuickC, 4–1, Glossary–2  
Quoted string, command argument, 2–8  
NEWPASS, 2–243  
PASSWORD, 2–245  
*PUD, 2–246  
REM, 2–250  
SET, 2–261  
TEKSECURE, 2–263  
TIME, 2–264  
*TRG, 2–342  
UNLOCK, 2–343  
VERBOSE, 2–344  
Mnemonic, command, 2–2  
Models, Manual references to, viii  
R
*RCL, 2–247  
Real-time sampling, Glossary–2  
Recall setting command, 2–247  
RECALL:ACQDATA, 2–248  
RECALL:SETUP, 2–248  
RECALL:WAVEFORM, 2–249  
Reference waveform, command mnemonic, 2–7  
REF<x>, command mnemonic, 2–7  
Register  
N
NEWPASS, 2–243  
Numeric, command argument, 2–8  
O
DESER, 2–108, 2–246, 3–3  
ESER, 2–132, 2–246, 3–3  
SBR, 2–263, 3–2  
*OPC, 2–243  
Operation complete command, 2–243  
Operation complete wait, 2–344  
*OPT, 2–244  
Option Identification Query, 2–244  
Output queue, 3–5  
SESR, 2–79, 2–133, 2–243, 3–1  
SRER, 2–246, 2–262, 3–4  
REM, 2–250  
Reset  
Command, 2–250  
Factory, 2–136  
RS-232 command group, 2–23, 2–27  
RS-232 commands  
P
Parallel poll, C–2  
Parts of commands, 1–1  
PASSWORD, 2–245  
Pattern trigger, 2–292, 2–293, 2–294, 2–295  
POSITION<x>, command mnemonic, 2–6  
Power-on status clear command, 2–246  
PPC, C–2  
RS232?, 2–255  
RS232:BAUD, 2–251  
RS232:HARDFLAGGING, 2–252  
RS232:PARITY, 2–253  
RS232:SOFTFLAGGING, 2–253  
RS232:STOPBITS, 2–254  
RS232?, 2–255  
PPD, C–2  
PPE, C–2  
RS232: BAUD, 2–251  
Index–8  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
RS232:HARDFLAGGING, 2–252  
RS232:PARITY, 2–253  
Setting  
Command query, 2–189  
RS232:SOFTFLAGGING, 2–253  
RS232:STOPBITS, 2–254  
*RST, 2–250  
Rules, command forming, 2–1  
Runt trigger, 2–304, 2–307, 2–308, 2–309, 2–310,  
2–311, 2–312  
Query, 2–189  
Recall command, 2–247  
Save command, 2–255  
Setup, Instrument preparation, 1–3  
Slewrate trigger, 2–304, 2–312, 2–313, 2–314, 2–315,  
2–316  
SPD, C–2  
SPE, C–2  
S
*SRE command, 2–262, 3–4  
SRER register, 2–246, 2–262, 3–4  
SRQ, 1–2  
State trigger, 2–300, 2–301  
Status, 3–1  
Status and error command group, 2–28  
Status and error commands  
*OPT, 2–244  
*SAV, 2–255  
Save and recall command group, 2–28  
Save and recall commands  
ALLOCATE?, 2–61  
ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM?, 2–61  
ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:FREE?, 2–62  
ALLOCATE:WAVEFORM:REF<x>, 2–62  
DELETE:SETUP, 2–106  
DELETE:WAVEFORM, 2–107  
*RCL, 2–247  
RECALL:ACQDATA, 2–248  
RECALL:SETUP, 2–248  
RECALL:WAVEFORM, 2–249  
*SAV, 2–255  
ALLEV?, 2–60  
BUSY?, 2–68  
*CLS, 2–79  
DESE, 2–108, 3–3  
*ESE, 2–132, 3–3  
*ESR?, 2–133, 3–1  
EVENT?, 2–134  
EVMSG?, 2–134  
EVQTY?, 2–135  
SAVE:ACQDATA, 2–256  
SAVE:SETUP, 2–256  
ID?, 2–180  
*OPC, 2–243  
SAVE:WAVEFORM, 2–257  
SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMT, 2–258  
Save setting command, 2–255  
SAVE:ACQDATA, 2–256  
SAVE:SETUP, 2–256  
SAVE:WAVEFORM, 2–257  
SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMT, 2–258  
SBR register, 2–263, 3–2  
SDC, C–2  
*PSC, 2–246, 3–4  
*RST, 2–250  
*SRE, 2–262, 3–4  
*STB?, 2–263, 3–2  
*TST?, 2–343  
*WAI, 2–344  
Status and Events, 1–2  
*STB?, 2–263  
*STB? query, 3–2  
Syntax  
SELECT?, 2–260  
SELECT:<wfm>, 2–260  
SELECT:CONTROL?, 2–261  
Selected device clear, C–2  
Self test, 2–343  
Separator, command, 2–2  
Serial poll, 3–2  
BNF (Backus-Naur form), 2–1  
Command, 2–1  
Diagram, 2–10  
Syntax and Commands, 1–1  
Syntax diagrams, 1–1  
Disable, C–2  
Enable, C–2  
Service request enable command, 2–262  
Service request enable register, 2–262  
Service Requests, 1–2  
SESR register, 2–79, 2–133, 2–243, 3–1  
Set command, 2–1  
T
Table, programming message, 3–12  
TCT, C–2  
Tek Standard Codes and Formats 1989, 2–28  
TEKSECURE, 2–263  
SET?, 2–261  
Sethold trigger, 2–295, 2–296, 2–297, 2–298, 2–299  
TEKSecure, Glossary–2  
Index–9  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Terminator, command message, 2–6  
TIME, 2–264  
Time base, Manual trigger simulation, 2–342  
Timeout trigger, 2–317, 2–318  
*TRG, 2–342  
TRIGGER, 2–264  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:DATA:LEVEL, 2–297  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:FUNCTION, 2–290  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT?, 2–291  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT: CH<x>?, 2–292  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN: INPUT:CH4?,  
2–292  
Trigger command group, 2–29  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN: WHEN,  
Trigger commands  
2–293  
TRIGGER, 2–264  
TRIGGER:DELAY, 2–265  
TRIGGER:DELAY:BY, 2–266  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN:  
WHEN:LESSLIMIT, 2–294  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN: WHEN:MO-  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE?, 2–267  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:COUPLING, 2–267  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:SLOPE, 2–268  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:SOURCE, 2–269  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS?, 2–270  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS:COUNT, 2–270  
TRIGGER:DELAY:LEVEL, 2–271  
TRIGGER:DELAY:TIME, 2–271  
TRIGGER:DELAY:TYPE, 2–272  
TRIGGER:MAIN, 2–273  
RELIMIT, 2–295  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SE-  
THOLD:CLOCK:EDGE, 2–295  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SE-  
THOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE, 2–297  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SE-  
THOLD:DATA:SOURCE, 2–298  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME,  
2–299  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:SETTIME,  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:AMI:PUL-  
2–299  
SEFORM, 2–273  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:BITRATE,  
2–275  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:STATE: INPUT:CH4?,  
2–300  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN, 2–301  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:THRESHOLD?, 2–301  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH<x>,  
2–302  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:WHEN, 2–302  
TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE, 2–303  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE?, 2–303  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:CLASS, 2–304  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH?, 2–305  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:FILTER, 2–305  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:POLARITY,  
2–306  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:WIDTH, 2–307  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT?, 2–307  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY,  
2–308  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:CMI:PUL-  
SEFORM, 2–276  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:CODE,  
2–277  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:NRZ:PUL-  
SEFORM, 2–277  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE,  
2–279  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:STAN-  
DARD, 2–280  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:THRESH-  
OLD:HIGH, 2–274  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:THRESH-  
OLD:LOW, 2–275  
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE?, 2–282  
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:COUPLING, 2–283  
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SLOPE, 2–284  
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE, 2–284  
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF?, 2–285  
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:ACTUAL?, 2–286  
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:BY, 2–286  
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:TIME, 2–287  
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:VALUE, 2–287  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL, 2–288  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC?, 2–289  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:CLASS, 2–289  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:CLOCK:LEVEL, 2–296  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD?,  
2–309  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESH-  
OLD:BOTH, 2–309  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESH-  
OLD:HIGH, 2–310  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESH-  
OLD:LOW, 2–310  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN, 2–311  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH, 2–312  
Index–10  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE: THRESH-  
OLD:HIGH, 2–315  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:DELTA-  
TIME, 2–312  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:POLARITY,  
2–313  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:LINE, 2–334  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:LINES, 2–335  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:NTSC, 2–335  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:PAL, 2–336  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SCAN, 2–337  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SCANPERIOD, 2–337  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE, 2–338  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:STANDARD, 2–338  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SYNC, 2–339  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SYSTEM, 2–340  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:TIME, 2–341  
TRIGGER:STATE?, 2–341  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:SLEW-  
RATE, 2–314  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:THRESH-  
OLD:BOTH, 2–314  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:THRESH-  
OLD:LOW, 2–315  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:WHEN,  
2–316  
TRIGGER:DELAY, 2–265  
TRIGGER:DELAY:BY, 2–266  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE?, 2–267  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:COUPLING, 2–267  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:SLOPE, 2–268  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EDGE:SOURCE, 2–269  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS?, 2–270  
TRIGGER:DELAY:EVENTS:COUNT, 2–270  
TRIGGER:DELAY:LEVEL, 2–271  
TRIGGER:DELAY:TIME, 2–271  
TRIGGER:DELAY:TYPE, 2–272  
TRIGGER:MAIN, 2–273  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:AMI:PULSE-  
FORM, 2–273  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:BITRATE,  
2–275  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SOURCE, 2–317  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY,  
2–317  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:TIMEOUT:TIME, 2–318  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH?, 2–319  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:HIGHLIMIT,  
2–319  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT,  
2–320  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:POLARITY,  
2–320  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:WHEN, 2–321  
TRIGGER:MAIN:TYPE, 2–321  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO?, 2–323  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:BY, 2–323  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FIELD, 2–324, 2–325  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FIELDTYPE, 2–326  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT?, 2–326  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:FIELD,  
2–327  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:CMI:PULSE-  
FORM, 2–276  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:CODE, 2–277  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:NRZ:PULSE-  
FORM, 2–277  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE,  
2–279  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:FRAM-  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:STANDARD,  
2–280  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:THRESH-  
OLD:HIGH, 2–274  
TRIGGER:MAIN:COMMUNICATION:THRESH-  
OLD:LOW, 2–275  
ERATE, 2–327  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:LINES,  
2–328  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:NEG-  
SYNCWIDTH, 2–329  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFOR-  
MAT:V1STARTTIME, 2–329  
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE?, 2–282  
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:COUPLING, 2–283  
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SLOPE, 2–284  
TRIGGER:MAIN:EDGE:SOURCE, 2–284  
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF?, 2–285  
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:ACTUAL?, 2–286  
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:BY, 2–286  
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:TIME, 2–287  
TRIGGER:MAIN:HOLDOFF:VALUE, 2–287  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LEVEL, 2–288  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFOR-  
MAT:V1STOPTIME, 2–330  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFOR-  
MAT:V2STARTTIME, 2–331  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFOR-  
MAT:V2STOPTIME, 2–331  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HDTV, 2–332  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HOLDOFF?, 2–333  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HOLDOFF:VALUE,  
2–333, 2–334  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC?, 2–289  
Index–11  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:CLASS, 2–289  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:FUNCTION, 2–290  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT?, 2–291  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:INPUT: CH<x>?, 2–292  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN: INPUT:CH4?,  
2–292  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:DELTATIME,  
2–312  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:POLARITY,  
2–313  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:SLEWRATE?,  
2–314  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN: WHEN, 2–293  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN: WHEN:LESSLI-  
MIT, 2–294  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:THRESH-  
OLD:BOTH, 2–314  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:THRESH-  
OLD:HIGH, 2–315  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:PATTERN: WHEN:MORE-  
LIMIT, 2–295  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:THRESH-  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE,  
2–295  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:LEV-  
EL, 2–296  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SE-  
OLD:LOW, 2–315  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SLEWRATE:WHEN, 2–316  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:SOURCE, 2–317  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY,  
2–317  
THOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE, 2–297  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:LEVEL,  
2–297  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:TIMEOUT:TIME, 2–318  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH?, 2–319  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:HIGHLIMIT,  
2–319  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SE-  
THOLD:DATA:SOURCE, 2–298  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME,  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT, 2–320  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:POLARITY, 2–320  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:WIDTH:WHEN, 2–321  
TRIGGER:MAIN:TYPE, 2–321  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO?, 2–323  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:BY, 2–323  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FIELD, 2–324, 2–325  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FIELDTYPE, 2–326  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT?, 2–326  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:FIELD,  
2–327  
2–299  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:SETHOLD:SETTIME,  
2–299  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:STATE: INPUT:CH4?,  
2–300  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN, 2–301  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:THRESHOLD?, 2–301  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:THRESHOLD<x>, 2–302  
TRIGGER:MAIN:LOGIC:WHEN, 2–302  
TRIGGER:MAIN:MODE, 2–303  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE?, 2–303  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:CLASS, 2–304  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH?, 2–305  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:FILTER, 2–305  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:POLARITY,  
2–306  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:GLITCH:WIDTH, 2–307  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT?, 2–307  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY, 2–308  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD?,  
2–309  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:FRAMER-  
ATE, 2–327  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:LINES,  
2–328  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:NEG-  
SYNCWIDTH, 2–329  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:V1START-  
TIME, 2–329  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:V1STOP-  
TIME, 2–330  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:V2START-  
TIME, 2–331  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESH-  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:FLEXFORMAT:V2STOP-  
OLD:BOTH, 2–309  
TIME, 2–331  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESH-  
OLD:HIGH, 2–310  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW,  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HDTV, 2–332  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HOLDOFF?, 2–333  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:HOLDOFF:VALUE, 2–333,  
2–334  
2–310  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN, 2–311  
TRIGGER:MAIN:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH, 2–312  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:LINE, 2–334  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:LINES, 2–335  
Index–12  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:NTSC, 2–335  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:PAL, 2–336  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SCAN, 2–337  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SCANPERIOD, 2–337  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SOURCE, 2–338  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:STANDARD, 2–338  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SYNC, 2–339  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:SYSTEM, 2–340  
TRIGGER:MAIN:VIDEO:TIME, 2–341  
TRIGGER:STATE?, 2–341  
W
*WAI, 2–344  
Wait for operation complete, 2–344  
Warranted Characteristics, Listed, 2–42  
Waveform, command mnemonic, 2–7  
Waveform command group, 2–38  
Waveform commands  
CURVE, 2–96  
DATA, 2–97  
*TST? query, 2–343  
DATA:DESTINATION, 2–99  
DATA:ENCDG, 2–99  
DATA:SOURCE, 2–101  
DATA:START, 2–102  
DATA:STOP, 2–103  
DATA:TARGET, 2–104  
DATA:WIDTH, 2–104  
WAVFRM?, 2–345  
WFMPRE?, 2–345  
U
UNL, C–2  
Unlisten, C–2  
UNLOCK, 2–343  
UNT, C–2  
Untalk, C–2  
WFMPRE:<wfm>?, 2–353  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:NR_PT, 2–354  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:PT_FMT, 2–354  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:PT_OFF, 2–355  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:WFID, 2–356  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:XINCR, 2–356  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:XUNIT, 2–357  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:XZERO, 2–358  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:YMULT, 2–358  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:YOFF, 2–359  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:YUNIT, 2–359  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:YZERO, 2–360  
WFMPRE:BIT_NR, 2–346  
WFMPRE:BN_FMT, 2–347  
WFMPRE:BYT_NR, 2–347  
WFMPRE:BYT_OR, 2–348  
WFMPRE:CRVCHK, 2–352  
WFMPRE:ENCDG, 2–349  
WFMPRE:NR_PT, 2–352  
WFMPRE:PT_FMT, 2–349  
WFMPRE:PT_OFF, 2–350  
WFMPRE:WFID, 2–352  
V
VERBOSE, 2–344  
Vertical  
MATH<x>?, 2–204  
MATH<x>:DEFINE, 2–205  
MATH<x>:NUMAVg, 2–206  
MATH<x>:PROCessing, 2–207  
Vertical bar cursors, 2–90  
Vertical command group, 2–37  
Vertical commands  
CH<x>?, 2–69  
CH<x>:BANDWIDTH, 2–70  
CH<x>:COUPLING, 2–71  
CH<x>:DESKEW, 2–72  
CH<x>:IMPEDANCE, 2–72  
CH<x>:OFFSET, 2–73  
CH<x>:POSITION, 2–74  
CH<x>:PROBE?, 2–75  
CH<x>:PROBECAL?, 2–75  
CH<x>:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN, 2–76  
CH<x>:PROBEFUNC:EXTDBATTEN, 2–76  
CH<x>:SCALE, 2–77  
WFMPRE:XINCR, 2–351  
WFMPRE:XMULT, 2–352  
WFMPRE:XOFF, 2–352  
CH<x>:VOLTS, 2–78  
SELECT?, 2–260  
SELECT:<wfm>, 2–260  
WFMPRE:XUNIT, 2–352  
WFMPRE:YMULT, 2–351  
WFMPRE:YOFF, 2–351  
SELECT:CONTROL?, 2–261  
Video trigger, 2–322, 2–323, 2–324, 2–325, 2–326,  
2–327, 2–328, 2–329, 2–330, 2–331, 2–332,  
2–333, 2–334, 2–335, 2–336, 2–337, 2–338,  
2–339, 2–340, 2–341  
WFMPRE:YUNIT, 2–352  
WFMPRE:YZERO, 2–352  
WFMPRE:ZMULT, 2–352  
WFMPRE:ZOFF, 2–352  
WFMPRE:ZUNIT, 2–352  
Index–13  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
WFMPRE:ZZERO, 2–352  
WAVFRM?, 2–345  
<wfm>, command mnemonic, 2–7  
WFMPRE?, 2–345  
WFMPRE:YUNIT, 2–352  
WFMPRE:YZERO, 2–352  
WFMPRE:ZMULT, 2–352  
WFMPRE:ZOFF, 2–352  
WFMPRE:<wfm>?, 2–353  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:NR_PT, 2–354  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:PT_FMT, 2–354  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:PT_OFF, 2–355  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:WFID, 2–356  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:XINCR, 2–356  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:XUNIT, 2–357  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:XZERO, 2–358  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:YMULT, 2–358  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:YOFF, 2–359  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:YUNIT, 2–359  
WFMPRE:<wfm>:YZERO, 2–360  
WFMPRE:BIT_NR, 2–346  
WFMPRE:BN_FMT, 2–347  
WFMPRE:BYT_NR, 2–347  
WFMPRE:BYT_OR, 2–348  
WFMPRE:CRVCHK, 2–352  
WFMPRE:ENCDG, 2–349  
WFMPRE:NR_PT, 2–352  
WFMPRE:PT_FMT, 2–349  
WFMPRE:PT_OFF, 2–350  
WFMPRE:WFID, 2–352  
WFMPRE:XINCR, 2–351  
WFMPRE:XMULT, 2–352  
WFMPRE:XOFF, 2–352  
WFMPRE:XUNIT, 2–352  
WFMPRE:YMULT, 2–351  
WFMPRE:YOFF, 2–351  
WFMPRE:ZUNIT, 2–352  
WFMPRE:ZZERO, 2–352  
Width trigger, 2–304, 2–319, 2–320, 2–321  
Z
ZOOM, 2–360  
Zoom command group, 2–45  
Zoom commands  
ZOOM, 2–360  
ZOOM:DUAL, 2–361  
ZOOM:DUAL:OFFSET, 2–361  
ZOOM:GRATICULE, 2–362  
ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:LOCK, 2–363  
ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:POSITION, 2–363  
ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:SCALE, 2–364  
ZOOM:STATE, 2–365  
ZOOM:VERTICAL:POSITION, 2–366  
ZOOM:VERTICAL:SCALE, 2–366  
ZOOM GRATICULE, 2–362  
ZOOM:DUAL, 2–361  
ZOOM:DUAL:OFFSET, 2–361  
ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:LOCK, 2–363  
ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:POSITION, 2–363  
ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:SCALE, 2–364  
ZOOM:STATE, 2–365  
ZOOM:VERTICAL:POSITION, 2–366  
ZOOM:VERTICAL:SCALE, 2–366  
Index–14  
TDS Family Oscilloscope Programmer Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Texas Instruments Computer Accessories MSP430 User Manual
TOA Electronics Security Camera C CV24 2 NTSC User Manual
Tripp Lite Power Supply APS PV User Manual
Uniden Cordless Telephone TRU9380 3 User Manual
USRobotics Network Card USR7900 User Manual
Vector Computer Drive 6SE70 VC User Manual
ViewSonic Computer Monitor VSD241WTAUS0 User Manual
Viking Beverage Dispenser DFWB300 User Manual
Waves Stereo Equalizer API 550 User Manual
Weed Eater Brush Cutter 4000C User Manual